Gc M. L 974.401 Es7es v. 17-18 1425142 GENEALOGY COLLECTION ALLEN COUNTY PUBLIC LIBRARY 3 1833 01101 1217 Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2013 http://archive.org/details/bulletinofessexv17v18esse BULLETIN ESSEX INSTITUTE, VOLUME XVII. 1885. SALEM, MASS. PRINTED AT THE SALEM PRESS, 1886. 1425142 CONTENTS. Hugo Ried's Account of the Indians of Los Angeles Co., Cal., with notes by W. J. Hoffman, M. D., .... 1 Opening of Hatteras Inlet, communicated by William L. Welch, 37 Through which inlet did the English Adventurers of 1584 enter the Sounds of North Carolina, also some changes in the coast line since their time, communicated by William L. Welch, 43 On the Carapax and Sternum of Decapod Crustacea, by How- ard Ayers, 49 Annual Meeting, Monday, May 18, 1885, 59 Election of officers, 59 ; retrospect of the year, 61 ; members, 61 ; field meetings, 65 ; geological excursions, 66 ; meetings, 67; lectures, 68; library, 69; horticultural, 81; museum, 82; art exhibition, 82; excursion, 84; financial, 86. Indian Games, by Andrew McFarland Davis, ... 89 Ancient and Modern Methods of Arrow Release, by E. S. Morse, .145 (iii) BULLETIN IBS SIB IX IUSTITTTTE. Vol. 17. Salem: Jan., Feb., Mar., 1885. Nos. 1-3. HUGO KIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA.1 WITH NOTES BY W. J. HOFFMAN, M. D. The following epistles were copied by the writer during the summer of the present year, 1884, from the original MSS. in possession of the Hon. A. F. Coronel, of Los Angeles, Cal., to whom they were written in the year 1852 by the late Hugo Ried from the San Gabriel Mission where the author lived at that time. These epistles were intended as a contribution to " A History of the Indians of Los Angeles Co.," but of the original thirty-two only twelve refer to the subject in detail, the remainder con- sisting of information relating to the establishment, and decline, of the Franciscan Missions in California, facts with which we are already familiar through other sources. Some of the epistles are variously signed "Hugo Ried," and n P. Hugo Ried," though the writer could not ascer- tain which was correct. The author, so Mr. Coronel states, was a Scotchman of considerable intelligence, who, after meeting with disappointment in an affaire de coeur in Sonora, came to the San Gabriel Mission, married an Indian woman of the tribe located there, and remained, (i) 2 HUGO R1ED S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS literally cut off from the outside world until the day of his death. With the exception of a few preliminary remarks, not germane to the subject under consideration, the epistles are given verbatim et literatim. Unless otherwise stated, the pronunciation of words, and letters, is in accordance with the Spanish language. The superior figures (as 2) in the text refer to the notes at the end of this article. The writer is responsible for all remarks in brackets. LETTER I. The following are the rancherias with the corresponding present names : Yang-na Los Angeles Sibag-na San Gabriel Isanthcog-na Mision Vieja Sisit cauog-na Pear Orchard Sonag-na Mr. White's Place Acurag-na The Presa Azucsag-na Azuza Cucomog-na Cucamonga Pasinog-na Rancho del Chino Pimocag-na Rancho de Ybarra Awiz-na La Puenta Chokishg-na Iaboneria Pimug-na Island of Santa Catalina Toybipet San Jose" Hutucg-na Santa Ana (Yorbas) Almpquig-na Santa Anita Maug-na Rancho Felis Hahamog-na Rancho Verdugos Cabueg-ua Cabuenga Pasecg-na San Fernando Suang-na Suanga Pubug-ua Alamitos Tibahag-na Serritos Cho\vig-na Palos Verdes Nacaug-na Carpenter's farm Kinkipar Island of San Clemente OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 3 Imp and San Bernardino, etc., belonged to another distinct tribe possessing a language not at all understood by the above lodges, and although reduced by the Spanish Missionaries to the same labor and religion, they never amalgamated their blood, they being considered as much inferior, and named Serranos or Mountaineers. The captains or chiefs of each lodge took its name fol- lowed by ic, with sometimes the alteration of one or more final letters. For instance, the chief of Azucsagna was called Azucsavic; that of Sibagna, Sibapic. The title of a chiefs eldest son was Tomedr; of his eldest daughter, Manisar. Suanga was the most populous village. The Cahuillas were named by the Spanish missionaries ; thus misnamed as a tribal name, the word cahuilla signi- fying master. LETTER II. They have a great many liquid sounds and their gut- turals are even softened down as to become agreeable to the ear. In the following examples i has the sound of ee; u of oo ; e of a as in fare ; a of a as in father ; ay of i; gn as in French. Numerals.2 1 Pucu 2 Wehe 3 Pahe 4: Watzu 5 Mahar 6 Babahe 7 Watza cavia 8 Wehez watza 9 Mahar cavia 10 Wehez mahar 11 Wehez mahar coy pucu [coy •and'] 12 Wehez mahar coy wehe HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS 20 Wehez wehez maghar [g and h combined]2 30 Pahez wehez ma, ghar 40 Watzahez wehez maghar 50 Mahares ' wehez ] maghar 100 Wehez wehez mahares wehez mahar Once Pucushe Twice Wehez Three times Pahez Four times Watzahez Five times Maharez Ten times Wehez maharez There is > There are j Woni There is none > There are none ) Yahez Yes Ehez No Hay Presently Wake Before Aunuco To-day Mitema Yesterday Poana To-morrow Yamte Here Yeuaro There Muro Far off Poane I Noma Thou Oma He or she Mane Man Woroyt Woman Tocor Boy Quits Black Yupiha White Arawatay Red Quaoha Blue Sacasca Yellow Payuhuwi Green Tacape Sun Tamit Moon Moar Stars [sic] Zoot Dog Wozi Coyote Ytur Bear Deer Hunar Zacat OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 1. 3. To hear,— Nahacua. Nonim nahacua, I hear. O-a nahacua, Thou hearest. Mane nahacua, He or she hears. 1. Non him nahacua, 2. O-a him nahacua, 3. Mane him nahacua, 1. Nop nom nahacua, 2. O-pam nahacua, 3. Mane-pom nahacua, To speak, - 1. Non-im sirauaj, 2. O-a sirauaj, 3. Mane sirauaj, 1. Non him sirauaj, 2. O-a him sirauaj, 3. Mane him sirauaj, 1. Nop nom sirauaj, 2. O-pam sirauaj, 3. Mane pom sirauaj, I heard. Thou heardest. He or she heard. I shall hear. Thou shalt hear. He or she shall hear. Sirauaj. I speak. Thou speakest. He or she speaks. I spoke. Thou spokest. He or she spoke. I shall speak. Thou shalt speak. He or she shall speak. They have no word to express love, but terms as to have affection for or to regard. The nearest approach to ex- press the idea of love is uisminoc. [Present tense.] Sing. 1. Nonim uisminoc. 2. O-a uisminoc. 3. Mane uisminoc. [Past tense.] 1. Non him uisminoc. 2. O-a him uisminoc. 3. Mane him uisminoc. [Future tense.] 1. No que im uisminoc. 2. O-que-a uisminoc. 3. Mane que uisminoc. HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS LETTER III. The Santa Inez tongue is understood by the Indians of the Purissima, Santa Barbara4 and San Buenaventura, with this difference, that the two latter splutter their words a little more, which almost seems impossible ! The I is used in this tongue, although not in the Gabrielino, which is strange. The only word in the Gabriel tongue which has an I is an interjection, alala, equal to Oho ! The Serranos have no I either, in use, and their language is as easy as that of San Gabriel. The Serranos generally employ a t> when the Gabriel- inos would use an r, LETTER IV. Gabrielino. Father, mother, husband, son, daughter, face, hair, ear, tongue, mouth and friend, are words never used without a personal pronoun, as : Father, nack, my father, ni nack, thy father, mo nack, his or her father, a nack. Husband and wife. If they have had children, instead of saying ni asum, my husband, they often say ni tdliaisum, which may be translated part of my body. All brothers older than the speaker are styled apa; ni apa, my brother ; all younger, by apeitz; ni apeitz, my younger brother. They have no word to express Indian. Tahat signifies people. The whites are termed chichina- bro, reasonable beings. Face and eyes are expressed by the same word. Ear, nanah; the leaves of a tree are called its ears. Snow and ice are the same.5 Tobagnar, the whole earth ; lahur, a portion of it, a piece of land. OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 7 Caller, forest. No word to signify tree, all varieties have their special names. Cabatcho, good looking. Zizu, devil, an evil spirit. Ayopu-cushna, brother-in-law. Qua-o-ar, God. Held in great reverence, and the name was seldom pronounced among them. They gener- ally used the term, Y-yo-ha-riv-gnina, that which gives us life. LETTER V. Government, Laws and Punishment. The government of the people was in the hands of the chiefs, each captain commanding his own lodge. The command was hereditary in a family, descending from father to son, and from brother to brother. If the right line of descent ran out, they immediately elected one of the same kin nearest in blood. Laws in general were made as they were required, with the exception of some few standing ones. Robbery and thieving were unknown among them, and murder, which was of rare occurrence, was punished by shooting the delinquent with arrows until dead. Incest was held in deep abhorrence and punished with death ; even marriages between kinsfolk were not allowed. The manner of death was by shooting with arrows. All prisoners of war were invariably put to death, after being tormented in a most cruel manner. This was done in presence of all the chiefs, for as war was declared and conducted by a council of the whole, so they had to attend to the execution of enemies in common. A war dance, on such an occasion, was therefore grand, solemn and maddening.6 If a quarrel ensued between two parties the chiefs of 8 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS the lodjre took cognizance in the case and decided accord- ing to the testimony produced. But if a quarrel resulted between parties of distant lodges, each chief heard the witnesses produced by his own people, and then in coun- cil with the chiefs of the opposite side they passed sen- tence. Should they disagree, another chief, impartial, was called in who heard the statements made by the two captains, and he decided alone. There was no appeal from his decision. Whipping was never resorted to as a pun- ishment, restitution being invariably made for damages sustained, in money, food and skins. If a woman proved unfaithful to her husband and he caught her in the act, he had a right to put her to death, if he chose, without any interference by any of the tribe. But what was more generally practised, he informed the paramour he was at liberty to keep her, and then he took possession of the other's spouse. The exchange was ad- mitted as legal by all concerned, and the paramour would not object. Although they counted by moons, still they had an- other mode for long periods, which was to reckon from the time the sun was farthest north, till he was at his southern extremity, and then back again. Summer was counted from the time frogs were first heard to croak. This was used to count war scrapes by, and under the recollection of the chief. When other tribes had to be chastised, the chief sent an express to all other lodges. They brought up from children a number of males, who were taught to hear long stories by the chief and to repeat them word for word. In this manner they became so perfect as to be able to recite the longest oration any one could produce. They were not much given to travel, for they only relate of one who left his people and proceeded north till he OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 9 came to the land where the geese breed. And even ho appears to have possessed that property ascribed to his race, for on his return he informed them of having fallen in with people whose ears reached down to the hips ; others of a small stature ; and finally a people so perfect that they would lay hold of a rabbit or other animal, put it near the mouth, draw a long breath and then throw the rest away ; which on examination was nothing but excre- ment ! They sucked with their breath the essence of the food and so lived without any calls of nature. LETTER VI. Food and Raiment. The animal food used by the Gabrielinos consisted of deer meat, young coyotes, squirrels, badgers, rats, go- phers, skunks, raccoons, wild cats, the small crow, black- birds and hawks, and snakes, with the exception of the rattlesnake. A few eat of the bear, but in general it was rejected on superstitious grounds. The large locust or grasshopper was a favorite morsel, roasted on a stick at the fire. Fish, whales, seals, sea-otter and shell-fish formed the principal subsistence of the immediate coast range lodges and Islanders. Acorns, after being divested of the shell, were dried and pounded in stone mortars, put into filterers of willow twigs worked into a conical form and raised on little sand mounds, which were lined inside with two inches of sand ; water added and mixed up ; filled up again and again with more water, at first hot, then cold, until all the bitter principle was extracted ; the residue was then collected and washed free of any sandy particles it might contain ; on settling, the water was poured off"; on being well boiled it became a sort of mush, and was eaten when cold. The next favorite food was the kernel of a species of plum which grows in the ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 2 10 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS mountains and islands. It is sometimes called the moun- tain cherry, although it partook little of either, having a large stone wrapped in fibre and possessing little pulp. This, cooked, formed a very nutritious, rich, sweet ali- ment and looked much like dry frijoles. Chia, which is a small, gray, oblong seed, was procured from a plant apparently of the thistle kind, having a number of seed vessels on a straight stalk, one above the other like sage. This roasted and ground made a meal which was eaten, mixed with cold water, being of a glutinous consistence and very cooling. Pepper seeds were also much used, likewise the tender tops of wild sage. Salt was used spar- ingly, as they considered it having a tendency to turn the hair gray. All of their food was eaten cold or nearly so. The men wore no clothing ; the women of the interior wore a short waist skirt of deer-skin, while those of the coast had otter-skin. Covering for sleeping consisted of rabbit-skin quilts.7 The women wore ear-rings, the men passing a piece of cane or reed through the ear lobe. The ear-rings of the women were composed of four long pieces of whale's tooth ground smooth and round, about eight inches in length, and hung, with hawks' feathers, from a ring of abalone shell. Their necklaces were very large and heavy, and consisted of their money beads, of beads made of black stone8 and pieces of whales' teeth, ground round and pierced. They used bracelets of very small shell beads on both wrists. LETTEE VII. Marriages. Chiefs or captains had one, two, or three wives, as their inclinations dictated. Their subjects only one. When a person wished to marry, and had selected a suit- CALIFORNIA. 1 1 able partner, he advertised the same to his relations. On the day appointed, the male portion of the lodge and male relations living at other lodges, brought in their contributions of shell-bead money, generally to the value of twenty-five cents each. The contribution ready, they proceeded in a body to the residence of the bride where all of her relations were assembled. The money was then di- vided equally among them, the bride receiving nothing, as it was a purchase. After a few days, the bride's female relations returned the compliment in taking to the bride- groom's dwelling baskets of meal made of Chia, which was distributed among his male relations. These prelim- inaries over, a day was fixed for the ceremony, which consisted in decking out the bride with innumerable strings of beads, paint and skins. Being ready, she was taken up in the arms of one of the strongest of the tribe who carried her, dancing, towards her sweetheart's habi- tation, all her family connections dancing around and throwing food and edible seeds at her feet at every step, which were collected by the spectators as best they could in a scramble. The relations of the groom came and met them, taking away the bride from the carrier and doing the duty themselves, as likewise joining in the ceremonious walking dance. On arriving at the bridegroom's lodge, who was within waiting, the bride was inducted into her new residence, placed beside her husband, and baskets of seeds emptied on them to denote blessing and plenty. These were likewise scrambled for by the spectators, who, in gathering up all of the " seed cake," departed, leaving them to enjoy their honeymoon according to usage. The bride never visited her relations from that day forth, but was at liberty to receive their visits. Should the husband beat the wife and ill-treat her, she gave advice of it to her lodge, when her relations col- 12 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS lected all the money which had been paid at her marriage, took it in deputation to the husband's lodge, left it with him and led off the wife, whom they married immediately to another. LETTER VIII. Birth and Burial. Immediately on the birth of a child, the mother and in- fant were purified, in the following manner : In the centre of a hut a large hole was dug, and an immense fire was kindled in which large stones were heated until red- hot. When nothing remained but hot embers and the stones, bundles of wild tansy were heaped on the same and covered all over with earth, with the exception of a small chimney or aperture. The mother had then to stand over the aperture with her child wrapped up in a mat, flannel fashion ; water was then poured by degrees in at the opening which caused immense quantities of steam or vapor, causing the patient to hop and skip a little at first and provoked profuse perspiration afterwards. When no more steam was procurable, the mother and child lay down on the heap, covered up, until the steam- ing was renewed again. Three days was the term of purification, morning and evening being the times of sweating. No food was allowed the mother during that time, and her drink (water) was warmed. She was now alloAved to eat of everything at discretion, with the ex- ception of animal food, which was debarred her for two months. Her diet at length complete, three pills were prepared of the size of a musket ball composed of one part of meat and one part of wild tobacco. These swal- lowed, she was allowed to eat meat; but she was not per- mitted to share her husband's bed until the child was able to run. OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 13 When a person died all the kin collected to lament and mourn his or her loss. Each one had his own peculiar mode of crying or howling, and one could be as easily distinguished from the other, as one song from another. After lamenting awhile, a mourning dirge was sung in a very low tone, accompanied by a shrill whistling by blow- ing into deers' bones. Dancing can hardly be said to have formed a part of their rites, as it was merely a monoto- nous action of the foot by stamping on the ground. This was continued until the body showed signs of decay, when it was wrapped up in its covering with the hands across the breasts and tied from head to foot. A grave having been dug in their burial place, the body was in- terred according to the means of the family, by throwing in seeds, etc.9 If deceased was the head of a family, or a favorite son, the hut was set fire to, in which he died, and all of his goods and chattels burned with it, reserving only some article with which to make a feast at the end of twelve months. LETTER IX. Medicine and Diseases. Medicine men10 were esteemed as wizards and seers, for they not only cured disease, but caused disease and poi- soned people ; made it rain when required ; consulted the Great Spirit and received answers ; changed themselves into the form of diverse animals, and foretold coming events. The medicine man collected the poison used for dipping the heads of arrows. Fire was supposed to destroy its hurtful properties, consequently the flesh of animals so killed were eaten without anv misgivings. The Seers pretended not only to know poisons which destroyed life by giving it internally, but also others which the simple 14 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS touch was sufficient to produce the desired effect ; and that some were instantaneous, and that others required one, two, or even twelve months before action took effect. Rheumatism comprised nearly all the general com- plaints. Syphilis11 was unknown. Toothache seldom troubled them. Rheumatism was treated by applying a string of blisters, each the size of a dime, to the affected part. The fur off the dry stalks of nettles was used for blistering; this was rolled up, compressed, and applied with saliva ; then fire was applied, when it burned like punk ; as one was extinguished, another was lit. For lumbago, they drank of a sweating herb and lay down for twenty or thirty hours in hot ashes. Fever was treated by giving a large bolus of wild tobacco mixed with lime (of shells), causing vomiting, besides other herbs and manipulations of the Seer. Local inflammation was scarified with pieces of sharp flint and procuring as much blood as possible from the part. Paralysis, stagnation of the blood, etc., was treated by whipping the part or limb, with bunches of nettles for an hour or two, likewise drinking the juice of thorn apple which caused ebriety for two or three days. Decline (of rare occurrence) was treated by giving the cooked meat of the mud turtle for a period of time. Shell lime was well known, but none made from lime- stone. For an emetic, it was mixed with wild tobacco and taken immediately in bolus, but in a more agreeable form it was pounded up and formed into a cake, and used in fragments as required. Strangury was treated by sweating, as in the lying-in woman, only marsh mallows were employed instead of tansy ; then a large bolus of chewed tobacco produced general taxation and prostration which often produced relief at once. If this failed, drawing blood by sucking OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 15 the abdomen immediately above the bladder hardly ever failed to give relief. This operation was performed with a great many rites, prior to the suction, such us smoking to the Great Spirit, pressure and frotation [sic] of the ab- domen with the hands, and a song at the end of every verse concluded with the words Non im mainoc, ni mainoc, Non im mainoc, ni mainoc, Yobarc ! " I do, what I am doing, I do, what I am doing, Oh Church ! " Bites of snakes were cured by the application of ashes and herbs to the wound, and herbs and ashes and the fine dust found at the bottom of ants' nests given internally. Ked clay was sometimes applied to the hair, covering it all over, and allowing it to remain for twenty-four hours when it was washed off, to prevent the hair from splitting. Chilicotes were burnt to charcoal and applied morning and evening to cure baldness. LETTER X. Tradition. There were seven brothers who married seven sisters — according to their respective ages — who lived in a large hut together. The husbands went daily to hunt rabbits, and the wives to gather flag-roots, for food. The hus- bands invariably returned first, and on the wives' arrival reported always bad luck in hunting, with the exception of the youngest brother who invariably handed his wife a rabbit. Consequently the poor women fared badly in regard to animal food. This continued as a daily occur- rence for a length of time, until in a conference held by 16 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS the women they expressed a conviction of being cheated by their husbands, declaring it strange that with the sole exception of the youngest husband, nothing was ever killed. At the same time to find out the truth, they agreed that the youngest should remain at home the fol- lowing day under pretence of toothache and watch the return of the party. Next day the men as usual took their bows and arrows and set forth. The six sisters then departed, leaving the other hidden among flags and rushes at the back of the house, in such a position as to command a view of everything transacted within. Sev- eral hours before sunset the hunting party returned laden with rabbits, which they commenced roasting and eating, with the exception of one which the youngest put apart. The others called him a fool, telling him to eat the rabbit, which, however, he refused to do, saying he esteemed his wife a little and always intended to reserve one for her. M More fool you," said the others, " we care more for our- selves than for them." The feast concluded, the bones were carefully gathered together and concealed in a suit- able place outside. After some time, the youngest wife arose and presented herself in the hut, to the surprise of the males, who asked her where she came from ? "I have been asleep at the back of the house," answered she, "and I have only this minute awoke, having had to remain be- hind from toothache." After a while the women came home, who ran to their sister asking for her health. They soon found an opportunity to leave the hut and learn the results of the espionage, besides visiting the place where the bones were deposited. They cried very much and talked over what they should do. " Let us turn to water," said the eldest. This was objected to by all the rest, saying that their husbands would then drink them, which would never do. The second proposed that they OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 17 should turn into stones, which was likewise rejected, be- cause they would be trod upon. The third wanted them to turn into trees; rejected, as their husbands would use them for firewood ; and so on until it came to the turn of the youngest, who proposed they should change them- selves into stars ; an objection was made on the ground that their husbands would always see them, which was at length overruled from the circumstance of being out of reach. They accordingly went to the lagoon where they procured flagroots, and making an engine (flying concern) out of reeds, they ascended to the sky and located them- selves as the seven stars. Only the youngest brother appeared to be vexed at the loss of his wife, and sought her daily. One day, having wandered to the edge of the lagoon, his wife had compas- sion on him and spoke, directing his attention to the ma- chine they had made, telling him to ascend. He did so, but not wishing him in their immediate vicinity, he was placed a little way off. A song survives, having reference to the seven stars. LETTER XI. Sports and Games. Few games, and of a gambling nature. The principal one was called churcMrJci (or peon, Spanish). It con- sists in guessing in which hand a small piece of stick was held concealed, by one of the four persons who composed a side who sat opposite to each other. They had their singers who were paid by the victorious party at the end of the game. Fifteen pieces of stick were laid on each side, as counters, and a person named as umpire, who, besides keeping account, settled the debts and prevented cheating, and held the stakes. Each person had two pieces of wood, one black and one white. The white ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 3 18 HUGO REID'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS alone counted, the black being to prevent fraud, as they had to change and show one in each hand. The arms were crossed and the hands hidden in the lap ; they kept changing the pieces from one hand to the other. Should they fail to guess right, he lost his peon, and counters allotted to the others, and so on until the counters were gone, or all the peons killed, when the others had a trial. They bet almost everything they possess. The umpire provided the fine and was paid by the night. Another game called charcharake was played between two, each taking a turn to throw with the points down eight pieces of split reed, eight or ten inches long and black one side. Another game, called hararicnar, consisted in throwing rods or canes of the length of a lance, at a ring put in motion, and see who could insert it. The ring was made of buckskin with a twig of willow inside, and four inches in diameter. This is not played now.12 Football was played by children and by those swift of foot. Betting was indulged in by the spectators. LETTER XII. Legend. In Muhuvit,13 which lies behind the hills of San Fer- nando, a woman married a captain of Verdugas. The woman was very stingy and selfish, and when the people brought them roasted rabbit, she devoured it alone and never invited any one to eat with her. The young chiefs would surround her, but she never invited any of them. They returned to their houses, and when their mothers inquired if they had partaken of the feast, said no. Then the people got angry about it, and asked the hus- band to send her home again to her mother. She, by this time, had a daughter. Old men spoke with him ; OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 19 do what you like, said the husband. The old men accord- ingly ordered the people to hunt rabbits as usual, but to stuff them, before roasting, with pieces of wet buckskin, lizards, and other unpalatable reptiles. They did so be- fore giving the repast. The old man asked of the chief, what was to be done with the daughter, whether to take her away or not? "Leave her," said he, "to die with her mother." This day, however, she invited her spectators, for on taking out the leg of a toad, she inquired what it was? "It is a quail," she was answered. "Eat it thou, then," said she, and so she proceeded, taking out strange substances and giving them away. An order was like- wise given to refuse her water, and being very lazy, it was presumed she would not go to the spring. The re- past gave her great thirst. " Give me water !" but none was procurable. She proceeded from hut to hut, with like success, until she arrived at the last, where a large basket of urine was prepared for her ; she nearly finished it at three sups, only leaving a little for her daughter. This occurred every day ; at the end of ten days, all her hair fell out, and from being very pretty, she became old and wrinkled. Seeing herself in such a state, she deter- mined to return to her father, and taking her daughter in her arms, she left ; but on the road, she repented, having taken her daughter, and said, "What a fool I am to be carrying this load, as if they liked me so much." So she threw it away. After going some little distance she looked back and seeing the little infant stretch out its little arms to her, her heart softened, and she exclaimed, "What fault has it committed?" she turned back and took it up again. She went on and on until she got so weak she could go no farther ; at last she was at a great rock, when she took the child by the heels and dashed its brains out, the blood of which is still visible at this day. 20 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS Many affirm the child did not die but turned into a squirrel. Then the mother went on alone until she came to the place where her mother usually kept her seeds and acorns, and lay down with the Charnuca. At length her mother came to take out food, and on putting in her hand gave a loud cry and jumped back. "Yes, be afraid of me," said the daughter, " after all the injury you have heaped on me by marrying me to a man who did not care for me." The mother then heard the story, and left to in- form the father, taking him out of the hut so no one might hear it. The father proceeded with his wife to take food to their daughter, and every day they brought her the same, and herbs to drink so as to restore her to health and purge her of the filth she had eaten ; also to restore her hair and ej^ebrows, which she had lost, they applied the fat or oil of the hamisar, a black berry. In three moons she was well again, fat, young and beautiful, hair nearly equal to her father's and brother's, which reached to the ground. She was commanded then by her father, to go and bathe herself daily in her brother's bathing place. She did so, and the brother from seeing the water when he came, not limpid as usual, suspected something. At last coming one day, shortly after the other had done, he was convinced, and more so on finding a hair half the length of his own. This troubled him much, that others were bathing in his well, and he became sad. At last, arriving one day, he caught her in the bath, and saying, "so it is you who daily dirty the water of my well," caught her by the leg and threw her out ; she fell back and he beheld her nakedness. This caused her so great grief and shame, that she left and proceeded to the seashore to drown herself. She made a run twice to throw herself into the sea but each OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 21 time turned back, but the third [sic] time accomplished it. The brother returned to the house and told his mother of having found au unknown woman in his bath and threw her out of it and saw her nakedness. The father and mother left the hut together, and on seeking their daughter could not find her. "She has gone from shame," said the mother; "Where shall we find her?" The father took the twig of a willow, made a ring of it, and covered it with buckskin ; this was thrown to the north, it returned again ; he threw it to the south, and the same result ; he then threw it east ; then west, the ring following all the turnings and windings of the daugh- ter. The father followed the ring until it came to the sea- shore. "She has drowned herself," said he, when he saw the ring enter the ocean. He returned, debating with himself whether it was better to punish his son first, or the chief of Verdugas ; he determined on the former first. On arriving home he told his wife who cried bitterly, which amazed the people much. Calling together all of his people, he told them they must take his son with them on a hunting excursion and let him be killed by wild beasts. His son was accordingly decked out in all his ornaments and money beads and told to go with the people hunting, when they were to stay out all night. He went, and they slept out, and the next morning a fire was kindled at which all were warming themselves. One of the old Seers had brought a screech owl with him, hidden, which was no other than the father of the boy, which he let out and frightened all the people who ran off leaving the boy alone, when a large bird, the Cuwot (cry cu, nothing of which, save its shadow, had ever been seen), said to be the boy's father in another form, came and took him up. Then the people came back crying, "the Cmvot has carried off the chief's son." As they came up, the bones came 22 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS tumbling down from above. The bones were then buried and the people returned to their huts. Shortly afterwards, the chief saw some one coming and went to meet him ; w Where are you going, where are you from ? " " From Verduga." " Oh ! " said the chief, " How are you getting on there ? " " Very well, the chief is get- ting another wife, and a great feast is preparing." "Be it so," said he, " they have laughed much at me, now we shall laugh and all perish together. What were they do- ing when you left this morning? " "The women had all gone to gather prickly pears." Hearing this, he went to where the women were gathered, and said, " What are you gathering so many prickly pears for ? " " For the feast," said they, "as the captain is to be married." " Take a sieve," said he to an old woman, "and fill it with tunas14 and sift the fine thorns into my eyes." She re- fused ; he insisted and the others told her to do as com- manded. He opened his eyes wide and she commenced, when all of the women set up a wail at once. They were blind. He burst out laughing and said, " Now I laugh, it is my turn now." He left them and went to where the feast was prepared, and going round to the west side changed himself into a huge eagle and went, low down, to where the feast was. On seeing an eagle come, they cried out, " Catch it, catch it !" with the exception of an old woman who was taking care of her grandchildren during her daughter's absence, who immediately covered the children with a blanket, and cried out to the people not to touch the eagle, as it was a human being and not a bird. The people only called her an old liar, and pro- ceeded to catch it, which they did. " Let us pull its wings off," said they, and they did so. Blood gushed out from one side and green matter from the other. Fever and bilious vomiting commenced among them, and killed OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 2.'i all of the people but the old woman and her two grand- children. The old woman had to bury the dead the best way she could and to burn the things. The eagle soared up above and never more was heard of. The old woman brought up the young ones, and when old enough, she constructed a bow with arrow for the boy, and a batea for the girl, teaching the one how to shoot and the other to clean seed. The boy, at last, killed first a lizard, then a mouse, then a gopher. When old enough she married them, but shortly after the girl turned out bad ; at first she gave the old woman to eat, but after- wards she refused to give her any meat brought by the husband. The old woman, to be revenged, took an awl made of deer's bone and placing it where the other sat, she hurt herself; she put it into the bath, and again hurt herself. When her husband came home she acquainted him, saying, "I have had injury done me twice, and know I have to die ; at any time you are out in the hills and I die, you will know it by feeling some drops of water fall- ing on your left shoulder." Not long after, when out hunt- ing, he felt the drops as he had been told he would. He threw the bow and arrows away and hastened home. In the meantime the old woman had burned and buried the body. "Where is my wife?" "I have buried her." " Thou hast done this and shalt die for it ; " taking up a billet of wood to knock her brains out, when she changed into a gopher and hid in the ground. The husband re- mained three days and nights by his wife's grave. On the third day he saw a small whirlwind arise which soon gave out, then another a little larger, and a third, still larger, came out of the grave, and he arose and followed it. After going a long distance he perceived footprints on the ground where it passed over. " This is my wife's," said he, and he followed an immense distance, and a voice from 24 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS the whirlwind addressed him and said, " Return to your hut." "No," said he, "I intend going with thee for- ward." "That cannot be," said the spirit, "for I am not as formerly. I am dead to the world, and you cannot go, for no human being can go where I am going, nor can earthly eyes behold our figures ; therefore return." He would not. " Well ," said the voice, " how can I take thee, there is an immense sea to pass." At last finding him positive, she bound him to her waist with her sash, tell- ing him to hold his breath as they went through the air. They arrived at last in the land of spirits where he could see nothing like human forms, and only heard innumer- able voices, exclaiming, " What a stench of something earthly, you must have brought that." The wife ac- knowledged she had, but exculpated herself on the ground that the being she brought was a superior one, being not only a great hunter, but could do anything. "Return him to the earth again, take him away," exclaimed the voices. But one voice at length said, " Let us try him first and see what he can do." He was ordered to climb a pole of great length, and bring down a feather from the top. He felt afraid to ascend, but his wife told him to try, but not to look down while doing so. He accom- plished the feat and there was great applause, when the voices cried out ayopui-cushna — our brother-in-law — is good at climbing. He was then given a long hair and told to split it from end to end. This again made his courage fail, but his wife told him to do it and to have faith. He had faith in her word and the hair split from end to end with ease. " Well done, our brother-in-law," exclaimed the voices. He was told to make a map of the constel- lation of Ursus Major and show the position of the North star. He felt great fear to attempt this as he had seen the Seers do this but had never learned it himself. His OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 25 wife again aided him and he came out triumphant. They then wanted to test his hunting powers, and four of them were dispatched to drive the deer into his range. lie soon heard loud cries of "Brother-in-law, there ffo the deer," but no deer could he see. The spirits ridiculed his hunting. Another trial was made with the same re- sult. At last his wife told him he would be given a third trial and that he must kill this time. "How can I kill deer if there be none," he said. "Did you not perceive black beetles?" said his wife. "Yes." "Well, those arc deer ; things are different here to what they are on earth, kill them." They went on their third hunt, and hearing the cry of "There they go," he saw black beetles coming on the sands. He drew his bow, shot at, and killed one ; it was converted immediately into a fine, fat buck ; this encouraged him, and he slew right and left, until the spirits tolcl him to desist. The game was carried home, he saw the deer lifted from the ground and carried in the air, though he could not see the carriers, although he could perceive their shadows. Great joy was mani- fested by all at his success. " Sister," said the other spirits to his wife, "no one has ever been permitted to return to earth, as thou knowest, but as our brother-in- law is so good and he cannot participate in our company of those joys and pleasures we partake, and on account of the gross materials of which he is formed, out of compas- sion to him, return again to earth." And addressing him they said, "Brother-in-law, return again to the earth with thy wife, but for three days thou art not permitted to co- habit with her, after that time thou art free, but a non- compliance will be attended with disappointment." They left the spirit realms and travelled on earth towards their home, the wife still invisible. At night he built a large fire and lay down ; on awakening before daylight he saw ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 4t 26 HUGO REID'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS his wife lying at a short distance. They travelled the second day as before and at night he again made a fire ; on awakening he again beheld her, and although he had re- bellious thoughts, still he restrained himself, for he thought that only one day more and he should triumph. The third day also passed in travel and on awakening that night he saw his wife more distinctly than ever ; love for her was this time more powerful than reason ; the three days are assuredly expired by this time, and he crept towards her. He laid hold of the figure and found an old rotten trunk of a tree in his arms. He remained a sorrowful wanderer on earth till his death. Whenever this legend was to be told, the hearers first bathed and washed themselves, then came to listen. The bird Cuwot is still believed in. It is nocturnal in its habits, never seen, but sometimes heard. Its cry was simply Cn. It is said that a man was once carried away by it from the Lodge of Yan (Los Angeles). Some state that the return of the woman to life after the sonl had fled, could not have happened. It being only a compassionate ruse to get the husband back to earth, to return again at a proper time in the form of a celestial being. NOTES. Refers in particular to the sub-tribe located in the vicinity of San Gabriel, usually termed Tobikhar, and known as the Kizh of former investigators. The subdivisions of the Kauvuya tribe are only recognized on account of dialectic differences. The tribe is one of the group composing the Shoshonian lin- guistic family, and formerly extended from the coast to the Colorado river, and from near San Diego, northward to the San Fernando mountains. Later, the tribe was divided into the Serranos, or mountaineers and Playsanos, or lowlanders. Of the latter are the Tobikhar. OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 27 The language is still spoken by a number of people, not- withstanding statements made to the contrary. The words Cahuilla and Coahuilla should be abandoned, as they are Liable to cause confusion with a similar name, of a distinct stock, in Mexico. The word Verdugos also occurs as Verdugas, in Letter XII. 2. The herds of cattle and horses owned by the Missions were grazed in favorable localities, each herd being under the con- trol of a chief herder and the necessary number of assistants. The chief herder's duty was, also, to have every animal branded, a record of which was kept in the shape of a notched stick, or Bali, which was regularly submitted to the major domo of the Mission. Fig. 1 represents a stick of this kind, now in the collection of Mr. Coronel of Los Angeles. The stick is about twenty-four inches in length, and three- fourths of an inch thick in diameter, each way. The handle has the edges bevelled and upon each of the four faces thus pro- duced are the characters I, II, X, > , signifying respectively bull, cow, heifer and ox. For cattle, the end opposite the handle is notched, thus giving the rude idea of horns. For horses, the end is pointed, in imitation of the sharp ear of a horse. When the stick is used by a herder of horses, the same marks are used, upon the handle, as for cattle, but with the signification, in order, as follows : stallion, mare, colt, gelding. Whenever an animal is branded, a notch is cut into the sharp ec\ge of the proper stick, and upon the line of the char- acter on the handle to designate the sex or age of the sub- ject. Thus an accurate record was kept of all stock handled, a custom and method which was copied by the Mexican herders and retained until a few years ago. Notched sticks were also used by the herders and laborers to record their accounts with the major domo. These sticks were nicely worked out of dogwood, polished, though not quite as long as the above. Only two sides were used, one bearing the character 1X1, for money, and a simple line cut cross- wise, for work. On the money side there were notches for reals and long cuts, extending across the stick, for dollars. Upon the opposite side notches for clays worked, and lines across the surface for weeks. In this manner credit could be given on the "money side," and there was always exactness between these stick records and those kept in proper form by the superiors. Other records were also examined by the writer, in which 28 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS the authors had recourse to paper; at the top of the sheet was a representation of the brand used, and beneath the regular number of short and long lines, denoting the decimal system of recording. Sometimes small rings were inserted at every tenth point, instead of the longer vertical stroke. When a rancheria possessed cattle only, there was no neces- sity for notching the end of the stick to denote " cattle," as there was no cause for error. Consequently the sticks were cut off transversely, without any specific pointing or notching. The same was adopted, also, where horses were owned, ex- clusively. Tattooing was practised and nearly all of the older mem- bers of the tribe still bear faint lines upon the chin; this is noticeable to a greater extent among the women than the men. At present, personal ornamentation is done in colors only, applied in the form of vertical lines upon the chin, transverse bars upon the cheeks, or both. The tattoo design worn by a land-owner, formerly served as a property mark by being cut or painted, upon trees or posts selected to indicate the boun- daries. These marks were almost equivalent to the owner's name, and were known to the remainder of the tribe. In this respect of engraving tattoo marks upon the bark of trees, there is great resemblance to a custom prac- tised by the natives of New Zealand, where the facial deco- rations of a dead man are reproduced upon trees near his grave ; this is equal to an autograph and can be readily inter- preted by a native. Knotted cords were used by some of these Indians, in busi- ness transactions, a custom adopted after their northern neighbors, the Palonies, — a sub-tribe of the Chemehuevi, — so called by the Spanish settlers, on account of wearing the hair cut so short as to suggest the idea of "baldheadedness." The method of using knotted cords was in the following manner : Each year the Paloni selected a certain number of their tribe to visit the settlement to sell native blankets, and every one who sent goods provided the salesman with two cords, twisted out of the hair of some animal, on one of which a knot was tied for every real received, and on the other, the number of blankets sold. When the amount reached one dollar, a double knot was made. Upon the return of the agent, each person would select his own cords, count up the number of blankets sold and the amount received for the goods, for which the seller was responsible. OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 29 3. The combination of the letters g and h is intended to represent the sound of the Spanish j in mujer ; ach, German, etc., now expressed by the character %. In the MS., Mr. Bled wrote the letter g over the h. 4. During- the time of the writer's recent investigations among the few Indians remaining in the vicinity of Santa Barbara, he learned the tribal designations of that people, which they gave as Sioqtun'. The band occupying the region about the Cathedral Oaks, was known as the Smiiwitsh. That located nearer the coast, at the Partera, the Saq'pili'. All town villages, i. e., at Santa Barbara, were called Mikique. The Indians formerly living in Santa Cruz Island (now extinct) termed themselves Tslnima. (In the preceding words, the q has the sound of ch, in German nicht). 6. The word, at the present time, is iu'at. 6. Three forms of war-clubs are given in Figures 2, 3 and 4. They are all made of extremely hard, heavy wood, and in some examples there is evidence of an attempt at ornamentation, done in lines burnt upon the surface, no doubt with a metallic substance. The club represented in Fig. 2, measures thirty- four inches in length, one and a quarter inches in diameter near the handle, and two and a half inches at the opposite end ; Fig. 3 measures eighteen inches in length, the handle two and a half inches in diameter, while the four-sided head, four inches each way, is armed with sharp conical points of wood projecting nearly an inch above the surface. These projections are of hard wood, and are secured by a socket, into which the pieces were driven previous to point- ing. Fig. 4 is of the same length as the preceding; it has three sides, each face measuring four inches in width, with just sufficient handle to afford a good grasp. The object represented in Fig. 5 was used as an accompa- niment to the rattle, in dances. Two pieces of hard wood twenty inches long, each two inches broad and a little more than half an inch thick, are secured at the handle with thongs and vegetable gum, allowing the ends of the wooden blades to be about an inch apart. This is shaken, and makes a noise resembling clapping of hands. Fig. 6 is a rattle, made by passing a wooden handle through two boards, each three and three-fourths by four inches in width, over which rawhide is stretched to form a hollow case. Inside of this are seeds, and small stones. The top is ornamented with feathers. 7. Rabbits were killed with the Makana, or boomerang, the form of 30 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS which is given in Fig. 7. The original measures two feet in length in a straight line, one and one-fourth inches across at the handle and one and three-fourths inches at the broadest part. The average thickness is about three-fourths of an inch. The weapon is made of hard wood (apparently dog- wood, or mesquite), and ornamented with various markings which are burnt upon the surface. The end opposite the handle is finished so as to imitate the head of what appears to be a snake. When viewing the weapon edgewise, it will be observed that considerable curve exists, but it is not known that these Indians were ever acquainted with the art of throwing the Makana so as to produce the strange and erratic motions pur- sued by a boomerang at the hands of a native Australian. The weapon was thrown near the ground, so as not to pass over a rabbit while it was running. Its general form seems similar to the Zuiii Kleani, and a similar weapon used by the Moqui, a notice of which was first published by the writer in the Trans. Anthrop. Inst, of Great Britain and Ireland, Vol. IX, p. 464. 8. The black beads referred to are made of dark, greenish black ser- pentine, some specimens resembling diorite, excepting as to hardness. They vary in size ; the smallest one measuring about, one-fourth of an inch in diameter and one-eighth in thickness, and the largest, known to the writer, measures seven-eighths of an inch in diameter by one and a half inches in length. The perforation in this specimen is one-fourth of an inch in diameter, and presents transverse striae caused by the sand used in drilling. The shell beads were usually made of Haliotis and Tivola. Shell money-beads were flat, and about one-third of an inch in diameter. Other beads used for necklaces were cylindri- cal or sub-cylindrical, larger in the middle than toward either end. Many of them, found in graves, present the same style of delicate perforations as we find in the beads from Santa Cruz Island. The writer is of the opinion that these narrow perforations were made by means of sea lions' whiskers as drills, and extremely fine silicious dust. The channels are scarcely large enough to admit a good sized thread, and in several beads which have split lengthwise it is apparent that drilling was done from both ends, as the perforations cease a short distance beyond the middle of the bead, thus passing one another, perhaps less than the tenth of an inch. It is evident, from the appearance of other unfinished specimens OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. ,'J1 that the boring was begun by using a stone drill — of which many and various forms occur— after which the bristle was applied. The channels are slightly conical toward the outer end, and at about one-fourth the length of the shell there is a constriction beyond which and near the middle of the bead, the channel again becomes wider, assuming an elliptical form. No doubt the rapid rotary motion of a flexible drill would cause sufficient divergence to produce such an effect. In addition to this, delicate transverse strise are also visible without the aid of a lens. A body was recently discovered on Santa Cruz Island, with which was obtained a bunch of these bristles carefully wrapped from end to end. Further- more, it is well known that Chinamen on the Pacific coast purchase all the bristles of the sea lion that can be obtained, paying twenty-five cents apiece therefor, to be prepared and sold as tooth-picks. Most of the shells required for use were obtained at the Santa Catalina Islands. These, as well as the islands oppo- site Santa. Barbara, are fine localities for Haliotis shells even at this time. The Serpentine, used in making beads, ollas and large rings, was also obtained at the islands first named. 9. Between Los Angeles and the coast, near San Pedro, gravestones were erected to the memory of the deceased, or, perhaps simply to identify the location of the body, so that his friends might come to offer food, and to mourn. Fig. 8 represents the etchings upon a piece of sandstone slab obtained from the above mentioned locality. On account of the fracture of the specimen, and the loss of, perhaps, important parts, only a few characters are visible, but these, resembling whales, were evidently carved there to show that the deceased had been a fisherman or whale hunter. Such a custom prevails very extensively among the Kiate/amut Innuit of southern Alaska. There, the profession of a man, and even a woman, is carefully recorded upon wooden slabs. 10. The term Shaman is more appropriate in this connection. The Seer was an individual whose profession was distinct from that of the Shaman. With some tribes there are Rain- makers, etc. During the performance of religious or profes- sional ceremonies, the Shaman resorts to many and various utterances and movements not understood by the unitiated. Rattles, small dried animals or skins, curiously shaped veg- etable growths, rare sparkling minerals and wrought stones of odd forms, are employed as fetishes. Among the last named the writer found both oblong and pyriform polished 32 HUGO RIED'S ACCOUNT OF THE INDIANS stones, such as have hitherto been considered, and described, as " plummets, plumb-bobs, sinkers, and weights." An old Tobikhar said that such stones would require too much time and labor to be used only to cast into the sea. The Indians term them " medicine stones," and consider them as possess- ing medicinal properties. That the Shaman also prepared arrow-poison, there is no doubt. Nearly all of the tribes between the Pacific ocean and the Rocky mountains had more or less knowledge of plants, insects, or other materials, which rendered it capable of pro- ducing septicaemia in any person or animal wounded thereby. For more extended information by the present writer, re- specting the methods of preparation, and the tribes by whom used, see Bull. Society d' Anthropologic de Paris, Vol. VI, 3rd Series, 1883, p. 205, et seq. ; Verhandl. Berliner. Gesell. fur Anthrop. Ethnol. und Urgesch., 1880, p. 91, et seq. 11. Although the author says that siphylis was unknown, there is every reason to suppose that this disease made its appear- ance among the coast and island Indians at a very early day. A skull, which the writer obtained at Santa Cruz Island — and has in his possession still, — shows great destruction over the left parietal bone, beginning at the temporal bone and extending backward and upward, so as to embrace the surface of nearly the lower half of the temporal, while on the frontal bone the erosion extended to greater depth, taking in part of the external portion of the supra orbital ridge, thence upward for about one inch and across the forehead to a point above the middle of the right orbit.' In the middle of these eroded areas are the more recent deposits of bony matter, forming, what may have been a healthy reconstruction of the parts. The skull is an extremely interesting one, and the only specimen of this kind known to the writer to have been obtained at that locality. From the general style of burial, and the primitive forms of the relics obtained from the grave, there is every reason to believe that the body was not of receut years. 12. This game was played by many tribes of Indians, and was called " Chunkee " by Adair, who observed it among the Muskoki. The writer saw it played by the Coyotero Apaches, in 1871, at Camp Apache, A. T., and an extended notice of the subject was printed in the American Naturalist, 1878, Vol. XII, pp. 478-481. The Indians at Santa Barbara also played a similar game, using a barrel-shaped stone ring, three inches in diameter OF LOS ANGELES CO., CALIFORNIA. 33 and four in length, at which the players shot arrows, the idea being to penetrate the hole while the ring was in motion. The players stood upon either side of the course. 13. Probably the country of the Mojaves, the tribal name of which is Amo/awi or Amo/arai. The western range of their territory formerly extended along the northern slope of the San Fer- nando range, but how far westward is not known, 14. Tuiias, generally known as prickly pears, are the edible fruit of several varieties of Opuntia, or broad-leaved cactus. These were sometimes crushed and mixed with the meal of seeds or acorns. Many of the mortars found in southern California, are merely circular, flat stones, having a slight depression on one side upon which the pounding was done. To prevent the scattering of seed, a funnel-shaped basket was constructed, similar to those used for carrying fruit, etc. ; the lower apex was cut off allowing the hole to be nearly as large as the stone mortar. The cut edge of the basket was then temporarily se- cured to the mortar by applying a thick coating of bitumen. The basket thus served as a hopper. When the surface of a mortar became smooth by use, it was again roughened by pecking it with a sharp piece of quartz or chalcedony, both of which are abundant. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 5 1425142 y\ o ff T, a.K , 5 e\ . OPENING OF HATTERAS INLET COMMUNICATED BY WILLfAM L. WELCH. Hatteras Inlet is on the coast of North Carolina, be- tween Cape Hatteras and Ocracoke Inlet, about twelve miles from the Cape, southwest ; and fourteen miles north- east of Ocracoke. It is mentioned in Blunt's Coast Pilot, but not in the Gazetteers, or Encyclopaedias : it is surprising that no ac- count of this Inlet and harbor so remarkable in itself, and of so much interest in the late war, by reason of the Burn- side Expedition passing through it, can be found in any of these books of reference. The writer was stationed at Hatteras Inlet in the summer of 1864, for about a month, and was then told by one of the native pilots (Reuben Quidley) that the place where the inlet is, and the water three or four fathoms deep, used to be dry, solid land, and that he (Quidley) had often walked over it. When in Jan., 1884, the writer undertook to determine the date of the opening or cutting through of this Inlet, he consulted everything attainable, without success, and as a last resort, wrote (Jan. 12th) to the U. S. Coast Survey at Washington, D. C, for such particulars as they could and would communicate. In the answer to this (elated Jan. 21st) the information was received, that the first survey of the place in question, was made in 1850, and the results were published in the Coast Survey Reports for 1851 — and fur- ther (37) 38 OPENING OF HATTERAS INLET. " No mention is made of the inlet having been recently formed. I have written to the officer who made this survey and also to others who from their age and interest in the locality would be likely to know something of it, and so far as any of them know, the inlet has existed from remote times. Can your question refer to Oregon Inlet, at Boclie's Island, considerably higher up the coast? That inlet was formed by the hurricane of Sept. 8, 1846." This answer was not satisfactory, and Jan. 25th, a commu- nication was sent to Hon. Thos. J. Jarvis, Governor of North Carolina, asking the same questions, and giving the result of the enquiry at Washington, as set forth above. Jan. 28th the Governor replies : " There was a time in the present half century when there was no Hatteras Inlet. It was cut out in some great storm within that time. I cannot to-day give you the exact date, but will do so soon." This was encouraging, but the matter lay dormant until a letter was received from Gov. Jarvis, dated April 14, as follows : "After considerable delay, I have at last got upon the track of the information you desired as to the opening of Hatteras Inlet. It took me some time to get hold of a man who could fix the exact time. I have inquired of many and most of them like myself had a general idea of the fact that it was cut out some forty years ago." A letter dated April 22d was next received from Gov. Jarvis, enclosing one from Col. Jno. D. Whitford of New Berne, N. C, to the Governor, and one from Eeclding R. Quidlcy, Esq., of Hatteras Inlet to Col. Whitford. Col. Whitford's letter contained an account of a chart in his pos- session dated 1738, made by James Wimble, on which an inlet is shown between Ocracoke Inlet and Cape Hatteras ; and Mr. Quidley's letter contained an account of the cut- ting through of the present inlet in Sept. 1846. Here was a starting-point, and the next step was to determine, if possible, when the old inlet closed, where it OPENING OF HATTER AS INLET. 39 was situated, and if it could or could not be identified with the present inlet. The writer in the meanwhile had sent a letter to the Secretary of War, asking for, and had re- ceived (through the Engineer Department), "Appendix (i of the Annual Keport of the Chief of Engineers for L876, containing the Annual Report upon the Improvement of Eivers and Harbors in North Carolina." In this, the report of S. T. Abert, U. S. Civil Eng. to Brig. Gen. A. A. Humphreys, Chief of Eng. U. S. A., has a "Table showing comparative conditions of the Inlets on the coast of North Carolina at different dates," giving with others the condition of Hatteras Inlet as shown by maps of Hariot 1585, Lawson 1708, Wimble 1738, Mouzin 1775, Atlantic Neptune 1780, Lewis 1795, and U. S. Coast Survey 1875. In each and every one of these charts or maps, Hatteras Inlet is indicated as being open, and the table shows that the Engineer that compiled it, understood, and intended to convey the impression, that the same inlet was there in 1875 that existed in 1585 and that it was at the same place on the coast. A search by the writer among the old charts in possession of the Essex Institute, Salem, Mass., was the means of discovering a "Chart of the Coast of America from Cape Hateras to Cape Roman from the actual Surveys of Daniel Dunbibin, Esq." This chart is bound with others in " The American Pilot" published at Boston by William Norman, Book and Chart seller, an edition of 1794. This chart has no inlet between Cape Hatteras and Ocracoke, and gives 4 fathom of water on bar at Ocracoke, and 9 ft. 6 in. shoalest water on bar inside. A careful perusal of the available histories of North Carolina in the Boston Public Library was made, and in Vol. 2 of Martin's History of North Carolina, page 184, this paragraph occurs: 40 OPENING OF HATTERAS INLET. 11 17C4. A chart of the sea coast having been made by Daniel Dun- bibbin, was this year published by his widow, to whom the legislature allowed a small premium." This last information seems to indicate that the charts of Mouzin 1775, Atlantic Neptune 1780, and Lewis 1795 (mentioned before) are, as regards an inlet between Cape Hatteras and Ocracoke Inlet entirely wrong, and are simply copies of Wimble's or some other older chart. The letter of Mr. Quidley, received in April through Col. Whitford and Gov. Jarvis, was dated at Hatteras Inlet, N. C, Apr. 7, 1884, and says : 11 1 will say in regard to your request, that Hatteras Inlet was cut out by a heavy gale, a violent storm on the 7th of Sept., at night, 1846. The first vessel that passed through into Pamlico Sound, was schooner Asher C. Havens, on the 5th day of Feb'y, 1847, Capt. David Barrett, Commander : I was pilot of said schooner, conducted her through all safe. No other vessel had ever passed through the Inlet. The first vessel that ever crossed over the bar of Hatteras Inlet was in Jan., '47. I was then a licensed pilot for Ocracoke Inlet, got on board to pilot the schooner into Ocracoke, wind came ahead, I went into Hatteras Inlet for harbor, stayed all night, went out next morn- ing and went into Ocracoke. I cannot give any correct report what time the first vessel passed out, it was not long after the first passed through ; the second vessel passed through about two weeks after the first, it was a small steamer bound through Core Sound, I piloted it through." In another letter to the writer of this, Mr. Quidley says : "I was licensed to pilot at Ocracoke Inlet in 1831; I then lived at Hatteras and when I piloted a vessel in at Ocracoke, which very often would be two, three, or four a week, and walked home to Hatteras, there was nothing to cause me or any one, to have any idea that there would be an inlet there, sooner than any other part of the beach ; there was no water passed over the place except in those heavy east- erly gales, when as a general thing it passes over nearly all our beach from Hatteras to Ocracoke. The day the inlet was cut out, there were several families living where the inlet is now, they had no more thought of seeing an inlet there, than of any part of the beach, but to their great surprise, in the morning they saw the sea and sound OPENING OF HATTERAS INLET. 41 connected together, and the live oaks washing up by the roots and tumbling into the ocean. I was well acquainted with the growth of the land where the inlet now is, I lived with my brother where the in- let is now. I have worked with him cutting wood and chopping yo- pon, where now, I have no doubt there is three or four fathoms of water; the growth was live oak principally, did not grow tall, but large trunks and spreading limbs. I had an old uncle lived about where the inlet is, who had a fine fig orchard, and many peach trees on his lot, with fine potato patch and garden." Again he writes : «• Since I wrote you last, I have conversed with the two oldest men living on this portion of the Banks (one is in his 75th year, the other in his 72d), both born and raised where the inlet is now. John Austin, the eldest, says he remembers his grandfather very well ; he says he has heard the old gentleman say, there was an inlet about six miles southwest of where the inlet is now ; he states that the old man said there was an English vessel, a ship, ran on the bar of said inlet, and was lost, and the wreck sanded up and the beach made down to it and finally closed up the inlet; Mr. Austin's grand- father's name was Styron ; died Mch. 7, 1825, aged 86 yrs. The other man I talked with was William Ballance. He says his father died in 1826, 68 years old ; he says he heard his father say that he had seen a piece of wreck standing up, right at, or near the place that Austin speaks of as being the place where the inlet was, and had been told by older people, that it was the stern post of the ves- sel that closed up the inlet. This place that they speak of is about five or six miles from this inlet we have now, between two points known now as « Shingle Creek' and ' Quake Hammock. ' " In a letter from Mr. Quidley dated Sept. 29, 1884, he " The Shingle Creek is about 5 miles from Hatteras Inlet, is 40 or 50 yds. wide, makes up through a portion of marsh and a low growth of woods or bushes to the beach, but not through the beach ; and a little to northeast of it there is another creek, about like the one just named, called the " Old Inlet Creek," which I think might take its name from being somewhere near where the inlet was. The " Great Swash" is a level place of beach, nothing growing on it but some grass or sedge next to the sound side, and extends about a mile to next growth of woods called "Knole": the Quake Hammock is a small clump of woods lying between Shingle Creek and Great Swash. I cannot give the exact time that vessels left off passing through ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII 6 42 OPENING OF HATTERAS INLET. Ocracoke. I was one of the first Commissioners of Navigation ap- pointed for Hatteras Inlet, I think in 1852 ; there has been but very little passing through Ocracoke Inlet since 1855 ; there is no vessel passes through there now except perchance, that a vessel goes in case of distress of weather, or head winds, and draws light draught of water, 4 or 5 feet." To sum up : we find on the old charts of the coast of North Carolina from those of 1585, to that of James Wim- ble 1738, an inlet indicated between Ocracoke Inlet and Cape Hatteras and about eight miles northeast of the for- mer, known as Hatteras Inlet, which from the evidence given must have closed near the middle of the last century ; for the chart of Daniel Dunbibbin was published by his widow, in 1764, and this was made from actual surveys, and it has no inlet between Ocracoke Inlet and Cape Hat- teras ; and we must conclude that all charts of that coast quoted in the paper above, made later than Dunbibbin's, are faulty in the matter of this inlet, and are simply copies of some previous chart. We also conclude that the claim of the U. S. Coast Survey authorities that the present inlet at Hatteras has " existed from remote times, " and that of Mr. Abert, that this present inlet is identical with that of 1585 is erroneous ; for the evidence given cannot be controverted that the present Hatteras Inlet was opened by the great gale of Sept., 1846, which was so severe on our southern coast. This paper and its conclusions are respectfully referred to the U. S. authorities and the publishers of Gazetteers and Encyclopaedias for their adoption. THROUGH WHICH INLET DID THE ENGLISH AD- VENTURERS OF 1584 ENTER THE SOUNDS OF NORTH CAROLINA. ALSO SOME CHANGES IN THE COAST LINE SINCE THEIR TIME. COMMUNICATED BY WILLIAM L. WELCH. The following extracts are from the report of the voy- age under Amadas and Barlowe (written by Barlowe) made in 1584. After mentioning their arrival upon the coast, they say ; " We sailed along the same a hundred and twenty English miles be- fore we could find any entrance or river issuing into the sea. The first that appeared unto us we entered, though not without some dif- ficulty, and cast anchor about three harquebus-shot within the haven's mouth, on the left hand of the same." " This land lay stretching itself to the west, which after we found to be but an island of twenty miles long, and not over six miles broad." They speak of visits of the Indians, and then say "After they had been clivers times aboard the ships, myself with seven more went twenty miles into the river that runs towards the city of Skicoak, which river they call Occam; and the evening following, we came to an island, which they call Koanoak, distant from the harbor by which we entered, seven leagues ; and at the north end thereof was a village of nine houses." " Beyond this island there is the main land, and over against this island, falls into this spacious water, the great river called Occam by the inhabitants, on which stands a town called Pomeiock, and six days journey from the same is situate their greatest city called Skicoak." "Into this river falls another great river, called Cipo, in which there is found great stores of muscles, in which there are pearls ; likewise there descendeth into this Occam, another river called Nomopam, on the one side whereof stands a great town called Chawanook." " Towards the southwest, four days jour- ney, is situated a town called Sequotan, which is the southernmost (43) 44 WHICH INLET DID THEY ENTER? town of Wingandacoa, near into which, six and twenty years past, there was a ship cast away, whereof some of the people were saved, and those were white people, whom the country people preserved. And after ten days remaining in an out island uninhabited, called Wocokon, they with help of some of the dwellers of Sequotan, fast- ened two boats of the country together, and made masts unto them, and sails of their shirts, and having taken into them such victuals as the country yielded, they departed, after they had remained in this out island three weeks." This report was accompanied by a sketch of the coast and adjacent country, as they found it, extending from perhaps forty miles north of Roanoke to ten miles south ef it ; it has five inlets drawn on it, the southern one is north of the southern end of Roanoke Island, the next perhaps five miles north of that ; the first one north of Roanoke Island, and also north of an island ap- parently "Collin gton's", is marked "Trinity Harbor", and there are two north of this, the most northern one, might be "Old Currituck Inlet" ; off these most northern inlets, are anchored the two ships of the adventurers, and inside apparently sailing from "Trinity Harbor" to "Roanoke Island" is a boat with one square sail, full of men ; from these, this sketch and the text of their report, the writer concludes that they entered at "Trinity Harbor" north of Roanoke Island, which inlet was about where "Caffey" inlet used to be; that their river Occam was our Albemarle Sound ; that their river Nomopam was our Chowan ; and that Wo- cokon, our Ocracoke, was to them an unknown place; that is, they did not visit it, for if they had, it would be reasonable to suppose their sketch of the coast would have included it. Bancroft in his History of United States says they entered at Wocokon (our Ocracoke) but it is simply an assertion, and can not be proved . Hawks' History of North Carolina gives New Inlet, south of Roanoke Island, as the place of entrance ; and that the Occam was a part of the WHICH INLET DID THEY ENTER? 45 sound between a line of islands parallel to the coast, one of which was Koanoke ; but, as New Inlet was not open at that time, and the river Nomopam, on which stood "Chaw a- nook" does not fall into Roanoke Sound, this theory fails. Mr. Abert,U. S. Civil Eng. follows Bancroft, and to provide a river Occam, he connects Alligator Eiver with long Shoal River making one long river of them, but the same objec- tion affects his river as that of Hawks' ; he also fails to convince himself that Roanoke Island is seven leagues only from Ocracoke Inlet; most probably his mistake arises from confounding Pomeiock, a town on Albemarle Sound (at or near Edenton) with Pomouik, near Secotan, on or near Mattamuskeet Lake ; other authors place the entrance of Amadas and Barlowe at either Ocracoke or Hatteras Inlet. John W. Moore, in his history of North Carolina, published in 1880, places the entrance at Trinity Harbor "nearly opposite Roanoke Island" ; this last is the nearest of any to what the writer considers the facts, but as the inlet entered was seven leagues from Roanoke Island, Coffey Inlet was in all probability the place of entrance. SOME CHANGES IN THE COAST LINE SINCE 1584. Mr. Abert, U. S. Civil Eng., in the Table of Condition of Inlets, in his report to War Dept. in 1876, says the in- let known as Hatoraskin 1590, New in 1738, Gunt in 1775, Gant in 1795, is the same as that known on U. S. C. Sur- vey chart of 1875 as Oregon : in this he is evidently mis- taken, if we may rely on the evidence of the U. S. C. Survey office, that Oregon Inlet was opened in 1846. In the same table, the Hatteras Inlet of to-day is given as being iden- tical with that of 1585 ; but the evidence of R. R. Quidley and other residents of Hatteras, must be taken as conclu- sive, that the present Hatteras Inlet was also opened in 1846. He also says : 46 CHANGES IN THE COAST LINE. " The same inlets now exist between the outlying islands, and the same shoals are now found off the coast, as were found by the navi- gators of 1584. The beach, banks, barrier reefs, or whatever they may be called, appear to have been much wider than at the present time. This seems to have been notably the case near Cape Hatteras. The preservation of the status of the bars at the inlets for so many years indicates a permanence in the relation of the forces by which they are maintained." Of the inlets on the coast of North Carolina from near Cape Henry to Ocracoke Inlet, that were open in 1585- 90, not one, except Ocracoke, is open to-day, and Ocra- coke is of little use to navigation : there was no inlet be- tween those near, and north of Roanoke Island, and one which appears on the maps as being at Cape Hatteras. The date of closing of the inlet at Cape Hatteras it is im- possible to give, but that there was one admits of no dis- pute ; the old maps give it, and in the report of the last voyage made by John White in 1590, appears this : "On the twelfth, in the morning we departed from thence, and toward night we came to an anchor at the northeast end of the island of Croatoan, by reason of a breach which we perceived to lie out two or three leagues into the sea; here we rode all that night." "This breach is in thirty -five degrees and a half, and lays at the very north- east point of Croatoan, where goes a fret out of the main sea into the inner waters which part the islands and the main land." As was the course in those days, White had made the West Indies first, then the coast of Florida, and was coast- ing along towards Roanoke Island, and the day before the event chronicled above had anchored off Cape Lookout, or near Beaufort. Croatoan was that part of the coast lying northeast and southwest, between old Hatteras Inlet and the inlet at Cape Hatteras. The latitude given in the extract above would place the breach and fret rather north of the present Cape Hatteras, but an error of 15' to 25' in those days, would not be too much to suppose. CHANGES IN THE COAST LINE. 47 The trend of the coast to-day from Capo Henry to within twenty-five miles of Cape Hatteras is southeast; for the next twenty-five miles it is nearly due south, except that, from a few miles north of the Cape it is a little to the west of south. The old maps of 1585-90 give, just south of Roanoke Island, a coast line running nearly east, and so far, that the extreme point was far east of Cape Hatteras, then taking a southwest direction to within a few miles of Cape Hatteras ; it must have been on this point that White, in his last voyage, just escaped being wrecked, and here also were hills, designated as " Kenrick's Mount" : some heavy storm, or series of storms, or some great convulsion of nature has entirely carried this away, and perhaps opened Loggerhead and New Inlets. Piatt and Wimble shoals are, perhaps, all there is left of this large extent of land. The charts of Wimble and Dunbibbin, both give Cape Hatteras as jutting out into the ocean like a sharp elbow, while to-day, the cape as shown by the U. S. Coast Sur- vey charts is rounded in and the point all carried away. These changes, noted above, are well worthy the atten- tion of the U. S Coast Survey and Engineer Department, U. S. A. BULLETIN ESSEX INSTITUTE Vol. 17. Salem: Apr., May, June, 1885. Nos. 4-6. ON THE CARAPAX AND STERNUM OF DECAPOD CRUSTACEA. BY HOWARD AYERS, Ph.D., Ann Arbor, Mich. The determination of the homology of the carapax and sternum among the Crustacea is rendered difficult by the endless variety of forms assumed by their constituent parts, and the consequent perplexing differences in the relation of these parts to each other. Before stating the conclu- sions and arguments in favor of the solution at which I have arrived after a study of several forms chiefly of the Decapod type, it may conduce to clearness to give in a few words, the main facts and conclusions of the previous writers on this subject. Although Huxley (1) is the latest writer who expresses views on the homologies of the Crustacean carapax, he offers no new explanation but adheres to the old conception of a fusion of the terga of the fourteen anterior somites into a carapax. He writes (in describing Astacus flu- viatilis) "The carapace, therefore, corresponds in position with the terga and tergal halves of the pleura of all the somites which are thus reflected into it, and these somites * This paper was prepared in the Mus. Comp. Zool., under the direction of Prof. W. Faxon, in the college year 1882-83. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 7 (49) 50 ON THE CARAPAX AND STERNUM include all, without exception, from the last thoracic to the ophthalmic. * * * " At the sides of the antennulary and antennary somites the rostral prolongation of the car- apace is the direct continuation outward of the epimeraof these somites, and there is nothing to be compared to an apodeme, but the sternum of the ophthalmic somite after giving off the lamella which forms the inferomedian ros- trum, is prolonged on each side of the middle line back- wards and outwards into a free, expanded, thin, calcified process which applies itself against the carapace by its upper surface, and by its under surface gives attachment to the anterior gastric muscles. * * * On the dorsal sur- face there is no indication of any division of the carapace into terga corresponding with the sterna of the somites, but it is marked by a well-defined curved groove. * * * " The accompanying diagram explains his views of the so- mite in Astacus. Milne-Edwards(2) considers the carapax in the major- ity of the Decapods to consist of a single piece, part of Diagram of crustacean segment; ept epimerum; es, episternum; s, sternum t, tergum. which is furnished by the antennary and mandibulary som- ites respectively. This author states, that while in Squilla the carapax belongs almost entirely to the antennary seg- ment, in Limnetis on the other hand, it pertains chiefly to the mandibulary somite. Furthermore, the tergum of the antennulary segment is entirely wanting in the Deca- OF DECAPOD CRUSTACEA. 51 pods. He continues (he. cit.f p. 233), "J'ai fait voir, dans un autre ecrit que le carapace, lors meme qu'elle recouvre la totalite du thorax aussi bien que toute la portion cepha- lique du corps doit etre consideree comme une portion de la tete dont une portion dusquelette s'est developpee d'une maniere excessif, et a chevauche en avant et en arriere sur les parties voisines ; j'ai etabli aussi qu'elle appartenait au systeme des pieces tergales, et qui celles-ci n'etaient fournies ni par les anneaux ophthalmique ou antennulaire, ni par les zoonites cephaliques posterieures. II me parais- soit probable qu'elle dependait de l'anneau antennaire ou de l'anneau mandibulaire, e'est-a-dire du troisieme ou du quatrieme anneau de la t&te, mais qu'elle ne procedait que d'unseul ces zoonites. Les faitsdont il vient d'etre ques- tion permettent de rectifier une partie de ces conclu- sions, et d'arriver a une approximation plus grande de la verite. Effectivement l'arceau cephalique de la carapace des Decapodes me semble ne pouvoir etre qu'une depend- ence de l'anneau antennaire, tant a raison connexions avec les autres pieces du squelette tegumentaire, qu'en conse- quence de l'origine des nerfs clont ses parties molles sont pourvues, puisque ces nerfs proviennent des ganglions cerebroides ou sous-cesophagiens, tandis que les nerfs appartenant au appendices du zoonite suivant, ou anneau mandibulaire, naissent des ganglions post-cesophagiens. Mais l'arceau scapulaire ou posterieur de la carapace de ces Crustaces doit pour des raisons analogues, etre considere comme etant etranger au troisieme zoonite cephalique, et comme appartenant a l'aimeau mandibulaire. La carapace serait done un organ plus complexe que je ne le supposait d'abord, et serait formee par deux anneaux tergaux, depen- dant du troisieme et du quatrieme anneaux de la tete, ar- ceaux qui fournaient d'une inclependance presque complete chez les Pairuriens et les Thalassines, mais ne seraient 52 ON THE CARAPAX AND STERNUM represents ehez les D^capodes ordinaires que par un seul segment dorsal du a l'ossification diffuse ou fusion des ele- mentes scleroderniique de toute la portion du squelette teg- umentaire correspondant a ces deux arceaux. Mais chez les Crustaces inferieures, la carapace ne parait avoir d'or- dinaire une composition plus simple, et etre formeetantot par les analogues de l'arceau cephaliqne seulement, tantot par les representants de l'arceau scapulaire. Ainsi, chez les Squilles, la portion cephalique de la carapace est tres- devellopee ; mais toute la portion posterieure au scapulaire parait manquer completement, et chez les Limnadies, au contraire, l'espece de coquille bivalve, qui tient lieu d'une carapace ordinaire, me parait etre due au developpement excessif de la portion scapulaire seulement, et dependre de l'anneau mandibulaire, out peut-etre meme de Tun des zoonites suivant. " Owen (3) reflects Milne-Edwards' views throughout as quoted above. Dana (4) differs from Milne-Edwards in that he considers the lateral (ventral) plates of the carapax of crabs to be true terga instead of epimera (he. cit.> p. 27). He infers "that the epistome (or its anterior part) belongs to the second, or to the sec- ond and first normal segments, that is, to the antennulary or to the antennulary and ophthalmic segments. For con- venience of reference I have compiled the following table from the author's statements of his views reoardino- the number of segments and what parts of each enter into the composition of the crab carapax. 1. Ophthalmic somite. Parts entirely wanting; appendages, how- ever, present. 2. Antennulary somite. Sternum present (probably fused with the ophthalmic sternum into one piece) ; the other parts wanting ; appen- dages present. 3. Antennary somite. The parts (sternum, tergum, episternal plate) present. 4. Mandibular^ somite. The sternum, episternal plates, epimeral plates and tergum present. OF DECAPOD CRUSTACEA. 53 After stating in a very clear milliner the facts he had established, the author draws the following conclusions. The carapax of the Bra- chyura includes : I. The first and second normal segments represented by the e pis to me, or its anterior position, and the inter-antennary septum. II. The third normal segment, represented by the main body of the carapax, and the anterior portion of the prelabial plate or pal- ate. III. The fourth normal or mandibular segment represented by the posterior and outer part of the prelabial plate and the ventral pieces of the carapax. Concerning the carapax of the Macroura the author again differs from Milne-Edwards in designating the lateral and posterior plates of the carapax of Astacus mandibular terga instead of epimera. After a careful comparative descrip- tion of numerous forms both among the Macroura and the lower Crustacea (he. cit., pp. 32-37) in which he men- tions several seemingly adverse cases, the author concludes that the origin of the carapax and the disposition of its parts are essentially the same throughout the class. From the foregoing extracts it will be seen that Dana's views are in advance of those of the other investigators, but there yet remain several points of interest on which it is desirable to collect further evidence. Both Milne- Edwards and Dana have established with a high degree of probability the origin of the carapax from the terga of the mandibulary and antennary somites, but neither of them succeeded in finding a conclusive demonstration of the fact. In the very young Squilla the thoracic and ab- dominal segments of the body may, by careful dissection, be removed from their connection with the carapax, with- out disturbing the relation of the parts in intimate connex with the latter. In such a preparation the point of attach- ment will be seen to lie immediately behind the mandibu- lary sternum^ fig. 15, z. Since both the opJitJiahnic and the antennulary segments are entire and have no connection 54 ON THE CARAPAX AND STERNUM with the carapax it follows that the carapax in the young Squilla pertains to the antennary and mandibulary somite — to these and these only. The same is true of the zoea of Porcellana. The relations of the carapax in the young stages of Cancer and Carcinus could not be made out ac- curately, owing to the poor state of preservation of the specimens at my disposal. Among the Brachyurathe ter- gum of the ophthalmic somite is present as a distinct plate beneath the carapax and may be exposed by cutting away the rostral region of the carapax, or it may sometimes be seen from behind (e. g.9 Platyonychus, Actceodes, Scylla). The antennulary tergum, on the other hand, seems to have dis- appeared entirely. The sternum of the ophthalmic somite, considered by Dana to be wanting among the Brachyura, is present, as it appears to me, in what has hitherto been considered as a portion of the antennary somite and designated the an- tennary septum (compare Huxley, he. cit., p. 296, fig. 76, c). In Actmodes, figs. 4, 6 and 7, the sternum of this somite is a distinct cuneiform body, wedged in be- tween the rostrum and the antennary sternum, but sep- arated from both by sutures. Its connection is more intimate with the antennary ster- num than with the rostrum. The basal joints of the antennae lie in contact with it, since it helps to form the inner angle of both antennary orbits. This wedge- shaped body extends backward into the facial region and furnishes the calcareous sockets for the bases of the eye- stalks; but has nothing to do with the orbital region. This latter has arisen by the overgrowth of the rostral region (i. e., forwards) which at the same time has been forced downward into the facial area. This growth is well illustrated in the series from Ilomarus, through Lithodesy Platyonychus, Scylla and Cancer, to Actccodes. OF DECAPOD CRUSTACEA. 55 In Cancer, fig. 3, the connection of the ophthalmic with the antennulary sternum is still closer and the former is a much thinner plate. In iScylla, fig. 9, the rostrum is hardly in contact with the ophthalmic sternum, although it is bent down close over it. The suture between the ophthalmic and antennary sterna is obliterated. In Platy- onychus, fig. 1, the fusion between the two sterna is com- plete. In Palinurus, figs. 14 and 16, Lithodes, fig. 11, and Homarus, fig. 5, the rostrum has not encroached up- on the ophthalmic somite and the sternum sustains its nor- mal relations to the appendages. Antennulary sternum. The antennulary sternum in Actceodes is an elongated, bar-shaped plate extending across the facial area immediately below the antennas. The antennules abut upon its ends, while the ophthalmic sternum is fused to its upper part dividing it into halves. The figure formed by these two plates is that of a short- stemmed T inverted. This plate forms the floor of the antennary sockets. The suture between the antennulary and the antennary sterna is lenticular in form and occu- pied by a semicalcified membrane. In Cancer, fig. 3 and Platyonychus, fig. 1, the parts in- cluded in the facial area are much less distinct. In Scylla, fig. 9, this sternal plate lies opposed to the upper margin (surface) of the antennary sternum, in the form of a thin calcareous plate. Its relations to the surrounding parts are, however, the same as in Actceodes. In Lithodes, fig. 11, the antennulary sternum resembles in all respects the ophthalmic, and consists of a smooth, scarcely calci- fied membrane stretched between the antennules. In Palinurus, figs. 14 and 16, the antennulary sternum is enormously enlarged and projects forward in the form of a truncated pyramid, equivalent to the " nasal region" of Milne-Edwards. Owing to the unusually large size 5 6 ON THE CARAPAX AND STERNUM of the antennae, the antennules have their insertion at the anterior end of this plate instead of at the sides as would normally be the case. A narrow extension of the main (fold) plate separates the basal joint of the appendages. In Homarus this sternum is moderately developed and occupies its normal position. There is no indication among the Macro ura or the Brachyura, of the existence of any other parts of the typical somite in either of these two segments. Antennary and mandibulary somites. As re- gards the sterna of the third and fourth somites in Ohio- rodius and Scylla, I cannot do better than refer to Dana's admirable description (he. cit., pp. 24-28). This des- cription of Chlorodius will apply in every particular to Actceodes, figs. 4, 6 and 7. In Cancer and Platyonichus the facial region is too much fused to admit of any accur- ate distinction of the parts. In Palinurus the antennary sternum is greatly enlarged and forms the lower part of the nasal projection. At its upper termination it furnishes the basal portion of the antennulary sockets : from this point it spreads out rapidly and extends entirely across the ventral surface of the body forming the anterior, lower one-third of the boundary of each antennary socket. The openings of the green glands are near to its outer angle, on the suture separating it from themandibulary sternum. Its connections with the anterior half or cephalic portion of the carapax are very distinct and in the form of a beaded suture. The mandibular sternum is separated from the episternal pieces by a short suture, these latter in turn are separated from the epimerals by a suture passing backward and inward toward the median ventral line. In Lithodesy figs. 11 and 13, and Homarus, figs. 5 and 17, the epister- nals and epimerals of both antennary and mandibulary somites are present and consequently one is able to ON DECAPOD CRUSTACEA. 57 trace the connection of the two portions of the carapax with comparative ease. The episternals and epimerals of the antennary segment are calcified. The former appear on either side of the epistome or sternum as an oblong plate extending backward, downward and outward and also furnish the upper plate of the entrance to the "ill- chamber. The epimeral plate is folded inward close upon the episternum of either side and is only to be seen when the edges of the carapax are spread apart. The episterna and epimera of the mandibular segment are represented by slightly calcified membranes more or less folded upon themselves. These plates are related to the mandibular sternum in a manner similar to that stated for that of the corresponding plates of the preceding segment. In Squilla the antennary sternum is especially prominent and reaches backward and downward in the form of a half cylinder, the sides of which are formed by the large episternal plates. The carapax is almost entirely made up by the antennary tergum, and the antennary somite furnishes fur- ther, fully one-half of the length of the cephalo-thoracic region of the body of this crustacean. The statement that the terga of the thoracic somites are covered by the ceph- alo-thoracic shield is not strictly true. The first two terga (counting from behind forwards) are entire and free, the third is united by a membrane to the posterior edge of the cephalothorax. The remaining terga are incomplete and unite with the carapax in a line curving from the point of attachment of the third, outwards and forwards on either side of the median dorsal line of the body (fig. 21). Sternal plates, etc. Milne-Edwards considers the small calcareous plates found at the base of the thoracic appendages, which in the adult state are more or less fused with the sterna of the respective segments, to be the ho- mologues of the episternal pieces of the typical arthropod ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 8 58 ON THE CARAPAX AND STERNUM somite. From embryological evidence it appears very probable that these pieces originate as simple projections of the outer posterior angle of each sternal plate and that they are apparently cut off by the appearance of false su- tures at a later period of development. The figures illus- trating this point (figs. 18, 19, 22) hardly need any explanation beyond that given in the description of the plates. A comparison of figs. 18 and 22 is conclusive. BIBLIOGRAPHY. 1. Huxley, T. H. Anatomy of Invertebrated Animals (chapter on Crustacea). London, 1878. 2. Milne-Edwards. Observations surle Squelette Tegumentaire des Crustaces Decapodes et sur la Morphologie de ces Animaux. Ann. Sci. Naturelles Ser. 3e, T. XVI, pp. 221-291. Pis. 8-11. Paris, 1851. Consult also Legons sur l'Anat. et la Phys., etc., T. 10, p. 212. Paris, 1872. 3. Owen, R. Lectures on the Comparative Anatomy and Physiology of Inverte- brate Animals, p. 301. London, 1855. 4. Dana, James D. Homologies of the Carapax among Crustacea. U. S. exploring expedition, 1838-'42, Vol. XIII, pp. 23-28, 32-35. Atlas, pi. 11, fig. 9d and 16, fig. 9c. Philadelphia, 1852. Also On the markings of the carapax of Crabs. Amer. Journal of Science and Arts, 2d Ser., Vol. XI, p. 95. (Jan., '51.) EXPLANATION OF PLATES II AND III. REFERENCE LETTERS. a antennule n membranous space a' antenna o eye or orbit as antennular sternum os ophthalmic sternum a's antennal sternum pg processes for attachment of gastric a't antennal tergum muscles a'tp plates of antennal tergum r rostrum ap appendage s sternum e epimeral plate sp sternal piece e' epimeral groove t tergum / labrum tht thoracic tergum g plate covering green gland y suture between mandibular and g' plate between antennule and car- antennal sternum apax x suture between epimeral and tergal m mandibular skeleton plates of mandibular segment mem membrane z point of attachment of carapax to ms mandibular sternum body mt mandibular tergum mp anterior mandibular epimeral plate. Fig. 1. Ventral view of carapax of an immature Platyonichus ocellatus, caustic soda, acetic acid preparation; natural size. Fig. 2. Ventral view of the carapax of Etisus dentatus; natural size. ON DECAPOD CRUSTACEA. 59 Fig. 3. Carapax of Cancer borealis prepared in caustic soda, ventral view with the front slightly inclined forwards; natural size. Figs. 4, 6 and 7. Carapax of Actceodes species? prepared in caustic soda and acetic acid; viewed from above, below and in front, respectively. Fig. 5. Front view of the carapax of Homarus americanus with the appendages removed, fresh specimen, natural size. Fig. 8. Ventral view of the connection of the mandibular episternura with the mandibular epimeron in Scylla tranquebarica; natural size. Fig. 9. Carapax of Scylla tranquebarica from an alcoholic specimen; natural size. Fig. 10. Carapax of Chlorodius floridanus, alcoholic specimen ; enlarged . Figs. 11 and 13. Front and ventro-lateral views of the carapax of Lithodes maia alcoholic specimen; natural size. Fig. 12. Basal joints of right antenna of Homarus americanus showing the posi- tion of the green gland; natural size. Figs. 14, 16 and 20. Lateral, frontal and ventral views of the carapax of Palinu- rus prepared in caustic soda; natural size. Fig. 15. Ventral view of young Squilla, the thorax and abdomen of which have been removed by careful dissection ; z shows the point of attachment of the thorax ; enlarged ten diameters. Fig. 17. Lateral view of carapax of Homarus americanus, caustic soda prepara- tion; natural size. Fig. 18. Sternum of megalops of Cancer borealis, showing the episternal pieces as projecting angles of the sternal plates; enlarged ten diameters. Fig. 19. Sternum of zoea of Cancer; enlarged fifteen diameters. Fig. 21. Lateral view of a sagittal section of cephalo-thoraeic region of Squilla, caustic soda preparation; natural size. Fig. 22 Ventral view of sternum of Cancer borealis (prepared in caustic soda) showing the "episternal pieces" of Milne-Edwards; natural size. Fig. 23. Ventral view of a young Pinnixa; enlarged ten diameters. Annual Meeting, Monday, May 18, 1885. The annual meeting this evening at 7.30 o'clock. The President in the chair. Records of the last annual meeting read and approved. The reports of the Secretary, Treasurer, Auditor, Li- brarian, Curators and Committees were read and duly accepted and ordered to be placed upon file. Mr. T. F. Hunt, chairman of the committee on nomi- nations, reported the following list of officers, which was duly elected ; Messrs. Israel and Upham having been appointed to collect, assort and count the votes. 60 ANNUAL MEETING, MAY 18. PRESIDENT: HENRY WHEATLAND. VICE-PRESIDENTS : Abner C. Goodell, Jr. Frederick W. Putnam. SECRETARY: George M. Whipple. AUDITOR: Richard C. Manning. Daniel B. Hagar. Robert S. Rantoul. TREASURER: George D. Phippen. LIBRARIAN: William P. Upham. History— Henry F. Waters. Manuscripts— William P. Upham. Archaeology— Frederick W. Putnam. Numismatics— Matthew A. Stickney. Geology— Benjamin F. McDaniel. CURATORS : Botany— George D. Phippen. Zoology— Edward S. Morse. Horticulture- Music— Joshua Phippen, Jr. Painting cf Sculpture— -T. F. Hunt. Geo. R. Emmerton. Technology— Edwin C. Bolles. COMMITTEES : Finance .• The President, Chairman ex off. The Treasurer, ex off. Henry M. Brooks. David Pingree. Library .- Charles W. Palfray. Henry F. King. William Neilson. William d. Northend. Theodore M. Osborne. The Librarian, ex off. Edward S. At wood. Henry F. Waters. Publication t James A. Emmerton. B. F. McDaniel. Edwin C. Bolles. T. F. Hunt. Lecture .• Robert S. Rantoul. Frederick W. Putnam. Amos H. Johnson. Fielder Israel. A. L. Huntington. Field Meeting : The Secretary, Chairman ex off. George A. Perkins, Salem. G. D. Phippen, Salem. George Cogswell, Bradford. Frank R. Kimhall, Salem. Francis H. Appleton, Pcabody. Eben N. Walton, Salem. Nathaniel A. Horton, Salem. Winfield S. Nevins, Salem. E. S. Mouse, Salem. John II. Sears, Salem. THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 1,1 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR compiled from the several reports read at the mectin" and remarks of the members in relation thereto, presents the work of the Institute in the various departments since the last annual meeting. Members. — Changes occur in the list of our associates by the addition of new names and the withdrawal of some by resignation, removal from the county or vicinity, or by death. We have received notice of the decease of nine- teen, during the year, who have been enrolled on our list of members. Francis Gregory Sanborn, son of Eastman and Mary Call Lawrence (Gregory) Sanborn, born in Andover, Mass., Jan. 18, 1838, a graduate of Phillips Academy, Andover, in 1858 ; he early turned his attention to out- door studies, becoming especially proficient in entomology and conchology ; he had been connected with the Massa- chusetts Board of Agriculture, the Bussey Institution, the Geological Survey of Kentucky, the Smithsonian In- stitution, and had been a Curator of the Worcester Natural History Society ; died in Providence June 5, 1884. Ad- mitted a member January 15, 1866. James B. Batcheller, for many years a teacher in the public schools of Salem and Marblehead, and for eighteen years a member of the School Committee in his native town. He was son of Rev. David Batcheller of Worces- ter, a methodist clergyman, and Elizabeth C. Bowler, of Marblehead, in which town he was born June 25, 1814; a graduate of Wesleyan University in 1845 ; professor of mathematics in Burlington, N. J. ; died in Marblehead, July 1, 1884. Admitted a member Sept. 8, 1868. bZ THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. David Bralnerd Brooks, son of John and Harriet (Manning) Brooks, born in Salem, Aug. 7, 1824, died in Salem, July 9, 1884 ; bookseller and stationer in Salem and Boston. Admitted a member March 12, 1856. He began his business career in the bookstore of John P. Jewett, subsequently a partner, John P. Jewett & Co. William Saunders, a well-known and distinguished veterinary surgeon for many years in Salem ; his practice extending into Boston and the counties of Essex and Middlesex ; son of William and Elizabeth (Britchers) Saunders, born in Helma, Devonshire, England, Nov. 27, 1817, came to Salem with his father in 1830, died in Sa- lem, July 23, 1884. Elected to membership March 12, 1856. Alfred Amos Abbott, son of Hon. Amos and Esther Mackey (West) Abbott, born in Andover, Mass., May 30, 1820 ; a graduate of Union College in 1841 ; lawyer in Peabody and Salem ; for several years District Attorney and the clerk of the courts of Essex County from Sept. 27, 1870, to his decease. Died in Peabody, Oct. 27, 1884. Elected to membership Dec. 30, 1867. William H. Palmer, son of Asa and Mary (Fletcher) Palmer, born in New Hampshire, March 9, 1811 ; trader in Salem, Mass. ; died Oct. 29, 1884. Elected to mem- bership Feb. 4, 1863. Isaac J. Osbun, son of Franklin and Mary E. (Taylor) Osbun, born in Windsor, Richland county, Ohio, May 19, 1850; graduated at Granville College, Ohio, 1872 ; after keeping school one year he sailed for Europe and spent one year in the University of Tubingen and the next year at Heidelberg where he studied chemistry and physics under the famous Robert Wilhelm Bunsen. In THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. (J.; 1875 he returned to this country ; from 1876-83 was teacher in chemistry and physics in the Mass. State Nor- mal School in Salem; he then entered upon the duties of Professor of Chemistry and Physics in Denison University, Granville, Ohio, and continued his labors there until a few weeks previous to his death which occurred Dec. 8, 1884. Elected to membership July 2, 1877. Esther Clarke Mack, daughter of Elisha and Harriet (Clarke) Mack, born in Worthington, Mass., Sept. 25, 1821. The family returned to Salem in 1827. Died in Salem, Dec. 24, 1884. Admitted to membership Dec. 5, 1882. Edward B. Ames, son of Burpee and Hannah (Brown) Ames, born in Salem, March 4, 1815 ; a well known citi- zen, senior member of the firm of Ames and Melcher, painters in Salem, having been in business upwards of forty years; died January 15, 1885. Admitted to mem- bership March 29, 1854. Nathaniel B. Perkins, son of Joseph Perkins, born in Salem, Oct. 3, 1813 ; for many years cashier of the Mer- chants National Bank, Salem; died Feb. 8, 1885. Ad- mitted to membership Dec. 14, 1853. Aaron Goldthwaite, son of Aaron Goldthwaite, born in Salem, March 9, 1822 ; of the well-known firm of Goldthwaite & Day, carpenters and contractors ; died in Salem, Feb. 11, 1885. Admitted to membership Feb. 15, 1854. Lemuel B. Hatch, the well-known coal and wood dealer, for more than forty years on Derby street ; died March 1, 1885 ; he was the son of James and Opal (Bon- ney) Hatch; born in Hanson, Mass., Sept. 1, 1806. Admitted to membership March 1, 1869. 64 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. Elizabeth B. Perkins, daughter of Edward B. and Elizabeth P. (Barrett) Perkins, born in Salem, Jan. 1, 1850, died April 8, 1885. Admitted to membership March 21, 1881. George Leeds, son of Benjamin Bass and Sally (Bab- cock) Leeds ;born in Boston, Oct. 25, 1816 ; fitted for col- lege at Milton Academy, graduated at Amherst College, 1835, Andover Theological School, 1839 ; rector of Grace Church, Utica, N. Y. ; St. Peter's, Salem; St. Peter's, Philadelphia, and Grace Church, Baltimore ; D.D. Trinity College, 1861 ; died, in Philadelphia, of apoplexy, April 16, 1885. Admitted to membership Feb. 28, 1855. John Chapman Towne, son of Joseph and Lyclia (Chapman) Towne, born at Salem, June 16, 1834; in early life a printer in the office of the Salem Register, afterwards, for many years, teller in the Naumkeag Na- tional Bank, Salem; died April 23, 1885. Admitted to membership July 1, 1863. Leonard Withington, son of Joseph Weeks and Eliz- abeth (White) Withington, born in Dorchester, Mass., Aug. 9, 1789 ; a graduate of Yale College, 1814 ; ordained over the First Church in Newbury, Mass., Oct. 30, 1816, and continued the active pastor of that church 42 years, when he became senior Pastor; died Apr. 22, 1885. Original member. George Pickman Farrington, the oldest druggist in Salem, son of William and Mary (Ward) Farrington, born in Salem, Aug. 29, 1808; died April 29, 1885. Admitted to membership June 9, 1864. Charles Eugene Fabens, son of Charles Henry and Euphrasia (Fabens) Fabens, born in Cayenne, S. A., March 27, 1845 ; merchant in Salem and Boston, residing THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 65 in Salem, where he died Jan. 22, 1885. Admitted to membership Feb. 20, 1871. Field Meetings have been attended with more than usual interest. The first on Wednesday June 18, 1884, atTopsfield, in commemoration of a meeting held for the completion of the organization of the Essex County Natural History So- ciety, fifty years ago, in that town ; its location in the ge- ographical centre of the county, before the introduction of railroads, was considered a very suitable and convenient place for the holding of conventions and other gatherings, possessing a general county interest. The morning was passed at the residence of Mr. Thomas W. Peirce, whose extensive grounds, fine gardens and conservatories were opened to the visitors. The afternoon session in the Town Hall was largely attended ; the speakers were the Presi- dent and Messrs. E. S. Morse, John Robinson, B. F. Mc- Daniel, S. P. Fowler and J. J. H. Gregory. The progress made in Zoology, Botany, Geology and the kindred branches of science since 1834, especially with reference to the increasing attention devoted to these studies, in this county was fully discussed. Mr. Fowler, who was present at the meeting fifty years since, gave an account of the gathering and spoke of those who were present, all of whom, with a few exceptions, have passed away. Second Meeting at Annisquam, Gloucester, Wednes- day, July 16, 1884. The morning was spent at the sea- side Laboratory of Prof. Alpheus Hyatt in observing the work of the students, also in visiting the beaches and. other objects of interest. At the afternoon session remarks were offered by the president, Messrs. Kingsley and Hyatt of the Laboratory giving a full account of the methods of instruction. Mr. James S. Jewett, Hon. Jonas H. French ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII 66 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. and Hon. James Davis, mentioned interesting incidents in the History of Annisquam. Mr. A. C. Perkins of Brook- lyn, N. Y., and N. A. Horton of Salem, also addressed the meeting. Third, at Asbury Grove, Hamilton, Thursday, July 31, 1884, postponed from the preceding day on account of the weather. In the forenoon a botanical excursion was made to Pleasant Pond under the direction of Mr. Sears. At the meeting in the afternoon, the president and Messrs J. F. Almy, John H. Sears, George D. Phippen, F. W. Put- nam, B. F. McDanieland N. A. Horton were the speakers. Fourth^ at old Newbury on Thursday, August 28, 1884. In the morning the party went to Plum Island and on the return visited the ethnological collections of Mr. Alfred Osgood, also several of the old houses in Newbury and Newburyport. The afternoon session was held in the ves- try of the First Church. The President after a few intro- ductory remarks called upon Capt. Luther Dame who read a paper on the life and times of Sir William Pepperell, exhibiting several original manuscripts and old family relics ; Alfred Osgood spoke on ethnology ; Stephen H. Phillips took for his subject, the early settlers of Newbury ; Kev. B. F. McDaniel spoke on the mineralogy of Newbury ; Rev. Messrs. F. Israel of Salem, and George Osgood of Kensington, N. H., alluded to the Rev. Dr. Withington, for nearly seventy years, the worthy and beloved pastor of this church and this people ; Mr. D. B. Hagar made some closing remarks and offered a vote of thanks for fa- vors received. Two Geological Excursions, a sequel to the Field Meetings, have taken place under the direction of Rev. B. F. McDaniel, the curator of this department. Firsts on Monday, Oct. 13, 1884, to the famous locality THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 67 in Newbury oldtown popularly known as "the Devil's Den." For over forty years it has been visited by miner- alogists for the fine specimens that have made it famous all over the country, and still the supply is abundant. Other openings have been made near by, the most noted of which is the "Basin." Specimens of the following minerals, some of them very fine, were brought home. Noble serpentine, common serpentine, retinalite, wollastonite, chrysolite, massive garnet, nemalite, calcite, chalybite and dolomite. The noble serpentine and wollastonite are easily obtained, and are very fine at the "Den," while at the "Basin," the common serpentine and retinalite abound. Second, on Monday, Nov. 10, 1884, to the Quarry near Lynnfield Centre. A stop was made at Ship Rock in Pea- body, after which the drive was continued to Lynnfield. The Quarry was reached at half-past eleven o'clock. Ham- mers and drills were soon in use and good specimens of brucite and serpentine were found in abundance. An increased interest in the study of geology has been awak- ened, and the result will probably be an interesting ad- dition to the already large collection of Essex County Minerals in the Museum. Meetings. Regular meetings occur on the first and third Monday evenings of each month. At these the fol- lowing communications were read and lectures delivered : From E. A. jSilsbee, talk upon "Criticism of Poetry." Stephen H. Phillips, "Witchcraft not exceptional in Salem." Charles A. Benjamin, " On an adjacent Peninsula." A. G. Hobbs of Bridgeport, Conn., lecture "On the History of Locks." William G. Barton of Salem, essay on "Thoreau, Flagg and Burroughs." 68 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. Percival Lowell of Boston, an illustrated lecture "On Korea" (a native Korean was present on the stage, in national costume). Edward Atkinson of Boston, a familiar talk upon the subject "Lack of Gumption." John H. Sears, Flowering of plants, December, 1884. W. J. Hoffman of Washington, D. C, "Hugo Ried's account of the Indians of Los Angeles, California, with notes by W. J. Hoffman." William L. Welch, "Opening of Hatteras Inlet." Oliver Thayer, "Early recollections of the upper portion of Essex Street, Salem." Robert S. Rantoul, "Some material for a History of the Name and Family of Rentoul, Rintoul, Rantoul." E. JP. Crowell of Amherst, "The commission of the Captain of a Salem Privateer, in the Revolutionary war." In addition to the lectures and communications present- ed at the meetings the following lectures have been de- livered in the rooms of the Institute. Lectures. Mrs, Schumacher of Boston, an illustrated lecture "On the Madonna in Art," Tuesday, Nov. 11, 1884. C. D, Hendrickson, an illustrated lecture "On the won- derland of America, the Yellowstone National Park," Monday, Dec. 8, 1884. Edward S. Morse, six lectures on Japan and the Japa- nese, on Wednesdays, Dec. 17, 24, 31, 1884 and Jan. 7, 14, 21, 1885. Mrs. Abby Sage Richardson, three lectures : first "Rob- ert and Elizabeth (Barrett) Browning," Wednesday, Apr. 22, 1885 ; second, "Sir Walter Scott," Wednesday, Apr. 29 ; third, "The modern Spirit of Poetry," Wednesday, May 6. THE KETKOSPECT OF THE YEAR. 69 Library. — The additions to the Library for the year (May, 1884, to May, 1885) have been as follows : By Donation. Folios, 13 Quartos, 2G3 Octavos, 1,531 Duodecimos, , 543 Sexdecimos, 264 Octodecimos, Gq Total of bound volumes, 2 080 Pamphlets and serials, • 11635 Total of donations, U,:u~> By Exchange. Folios, 1 Quartos, 10 Octavos, 188 Duodecimos, 15 Total of bound volumes, 214 Pamphlets and serials, 2,483 Total of exchanges, 2,697 By Purchase. Folios, . 1 Quartos, . . - 5 Octavos 117 Duodecimos, 191 Sexdecimos, • 60 Octodecimos, 6 Total of bound volumes, - 380 Pamphlets, 7 Total of purchases, • 387 Total of donations, 14,315 Total of exchanges 2,697 Total of purchases, 387 Total of additions, . 17,399 Of the total number of pamphlets and serials, 5,072 were pamphlets, and 9,053 were serials. The donations to the Library for the year have been received from one hundred and seventy individuals and forty-six societies and governmental departments. The 70 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. exchanges from seven individuals and from one hundred and fifty-five societies and incorporate institutions, of which seventy-nine are foreign ; also from editors and pub- lishers. The annual examination of the Library has been made and it is found to be in as good order and condition as our limited resources permit. The accessions have been more numerous than for many years. Among what may be termed the customary dona- tions maybe classed the Congressional Record, documents, etc., from E. F. Stone representative U. S. Congress; congressional documents from the Department of the Inte- rior, and others from the various departments of the gov- ernment ; Mass. State documents from the General Court Representatives ; agricultural papers from the secretary of the Mass. Horticultural Society ; the transactions of vari- ous societies ; besides books and pamphlets in smaller or larger quantities from the members and others, a list of too great length to be read at this time. Among special donations may be mentioned : — From Geo. R. Lord, a portion of the library of the late Nathl. Lord, amounting to 470 vols., and 2,384 pamphlets; among the latter, religious periodicals hold a prominent place. From the library of the late William Sutton, 1,319 vols., and 1,558 pamphlets, a donation very valua- ble in historical works and state documents. A collection of pamphlets from the estate of Robert and Elizabeth R. Peele. A nearly complete file of the Salem Register and 1,039 numbers of religious magazines from Chas. M. Richardson. Harper's Magazine and other periodicals to the number of 289 from Jas. A. Chamberlain. From the estate of Mrs. Martha P. Walcott, 95 vols., and 665 pamphlets, including periodicals. 67 volumes of scientific works from Mrs. Wm. S. Cleveland. From Mrs. M. C. THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 71 Farley, 48 vols., chiefly state and government documents. A large number of religious works and pamphlets from Rev. Hugh Elder. Some very valuable school books from Miss Elizabeth Lander. From Sam'l Chamberlain, besides volumes, religious and educational periodicals. Thirty religious works from Capt. George Upton. From Dr. William Mack an addition to the musical library as well as to other departments. The Art Library is constantly receiving very valuable accessions of volumes and periodicals. Our most excellent and efficient Assistant Librarian, whose usefulness we all recognize, has especially called my attenti@n to the pressing necessity of more room. Al- most every department is receiving from time to time, additions of more or less magnitude, and all are crowded to overflowing ; there is scarcely a case where a proper arrangement of volumes or pamphlets can be made, on ac- count of the limited room. One deep shelf has three rows of books ; a case of newspapers has the space in the centre occupied with books piled up in bulk, and no access to them without removing the tier of papers in front ; one can easily imagine the labor of finding a specified book of that lot. The space reserved for the exchanges of foreign socie- ties has for some time been filled to repletion. A portion of our recent donations has been accommo- dated by putting up temporary shelves in the ante-room occupied by the historical museum. This, however, sep- arates them from other books of the same class in the general library. Others are piled in bulk on the gallery floor, preventing their circulation and making them nearly inaccessible for reference. The two cases at the rear of the lower hall have already double rows of directories on nearly every shelf. 72 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. From this statement of facts it can readily be seen how urgent is the need of greater accommodations and ad- ditional shelf-room. Respectfully submitted, Wm. P. Upham, Librarian. Donations or exchanges have beeu received from the following Adams, Miss Hannah C, Beverly, Adelaide, Royal Society of South Australia, Agassiz, Alexander, Cambridge, Albany, N. Y., State Library, Alnwick, Eng., Berwickshire Naturalists' Club, Altenburg, Naturforschende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes American Association for the Advancement of Science, American Ornithologists' Union, Amherst College Library, Anagnos, M., South Boston, Andover Theological Seminary, .... Andrews, William P., Archaeological Institute of America, Archer, Miss Rebecca, . . . Newspapers Auckland, N. Z., Auckland Institute, Baltimore, Md., Historical Society, ... Baltimore, Md., Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md., Johns Hopkins University, Library of Historical and Political Science, Baltimore, Md., Peabody Institute, Bamberg, Naturforschende Gesellschaft, . Bancroft, Rev. C. F. P., Andover, Batavia, K. Natuurkundige Vereeniging, . Bay ley, Miss Elizabeth S., .... Bay ley, Miss Harriet K., Boston, Belfast, Ireland, Naturalists' Field Club, . Bell, Charles H., Exeter, N. H., ... Berkeley, Cal., University of California, . Berlin, Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde, Berlin, Verein zur Beforderung des Gartenbaues Bern, Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Vols. 11 Pam. 1 1 5 1 2 4 1 1 1 49 1 17 1 2 27 1 52 5 THE RETROSPECT OF THE TEAR. Blake, Francis E., Boston, .... Bolles, Rev. E. C., D.D., .... Bonn, Naturhistorischer Verein, Boston, American Academy of Arts and Sciences Boston, Appalachian Mountain Club, Boston Board of Health, Boston, Bostonian Society, .... Boston, City of, Boston City Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts Historical Society, Boston, Massachusetts Horticultural Society, . Boston, Massachusetts Medical Society, Boston, Massachusetts State Board of Health, Lunacy and Charity, Boston, Massachusetts State Library, Boston, National Association of Wool Manufacturers, Boston, New England Historic, Genealogical Society, Boston Overseers of the Poor, Boston Public Library, Boston Scientific Society, Boston Society of Natural History, Boylston, E. D., Amherst, Bradlee, Rev. C. D., Boston, Bremen, Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Bristol, Eng., Naturalists' Society, Brooklyn, N. Y., Brooklyn Library, Brown, Henry A., Browne, Albert G., Newspapers Brunswick, Me., Bowdoin College Library, Bruxelles, Societe Beige de Microscopie, Bryant, James S., Hartford, Conn., Buenos Aires, Sociedad Cientifica Argentina, Butfalo, N. Y., Historical Society, Buffalo, N. Y., Young Men's Association, Caen, Academie cles Sciences, Arts et Belles Lettres Calcutta, Geological Survey of India, Cambridge, Harvard University Library, . Cambridge, Museum of Comparative Zoology, . Cambridge, Peabody Museum of American Archaeology and Ethnology, Canada Royal Society, e Cannon, H. W., Washington, D. C, . ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 10 Vols. l'.uu. 1 397 2 2 2 12 2 1 1 3 2 4 5 3 3 19 1 1 2 2 5 117 1 1 9 14 2 2 1 16 4 8 74 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. Carpenter, Rev. C. C, Mt. Vernon, N. H., Cassel, Verein fiir Naturkunde, .... Chamberlain, James A., ...... Chamberlain, Samuel, Champaign, 111., State Laboratory of Natural History, Chever, Miss S. A., Melrose, .... Chicago, 111., Historical Society, .... Chicago, 111., Public Library, Cincinnati, 0., Society of Natural History, Clarke, Rev. DeWitt S., Cleveland, Mrs. William S., Cogswell, George, Bradford, .... Cole, Mrs. N. D., Newspapers Collett, John, Indianapolis, Ind., .... Conant, W. P., Washington, D. C, . . Newspapers Coolidge, Henry J., Boston, Copenhague, Societe Botanique, .... Cordoba, AcadSmie Nacional de Ciencias, Courtenay, William A., Charleston, S. C, Cowley, Charles, Lowell, Cox, William R., Washington, D. C, Crowell, Rev. E. P., D.D., Amherst, Crunden, F. M., St. Louis, Mo., Currier, John M., Castle ton, Vt., Cushing, Thomas, Boston, Cutter, A. E. Charlestown, Danzig, Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Darmstadt, Verein fiir Erdkunde, Davenport, la., Academy of Natural Sciences, Davis, Charles H. S., Meriden, Conn., Davis, James, Gloucester, Davis, R. S., & Co., Pittsburgh, Pa., Dennett, W. S., Saco, Me., Denver, Colorado Scientific Society, Dewing, Miss Mary E., Donnell, E. J., New York,N. Y., .... Doolittle, Mi*s E., Troy, N. Y., .... Dresden, Naturwisseuschaftliche Gesellschaft, " Isis," Dublin, Royal Irish Academy, .... Dublin, Royal Society, Durkhcim, Pollichia, Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein de Rheinpfalz, Eaton, Mrs. C. F >l8. Pam. 1 1 289 12 335 1 1 1 1 67 1 2 2 1 II THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAlt. 75 Vols. Pam. Eddy, Robert H., Boston, ^ Edinburgh, Royal Society, ' 2 Elder, Rev. Hugh, 20 226 Ellery, Harrison, Chelsea, j Emden, Naturforschende Gesellschaft, .... 1 Emmerton, James A., .m 1 14 Erfurt, K. Akademie gemeinntitziger Wissenschaften, . 1 Erlangen, Physikalisch-medicinische Societiit, . . 1 Essex, Eng., Essex Field Club, 2 Falmouth, Eng., Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society, . 1 Farley, Misses, j Farley, Mrs. M. C, 48 Fewkes, J. Walter, Cambridge, 2 Folger, William C, Nantucket, 2 Folsam, A. A., Boston, Vols. Pam. Richmond, Virginia Historical Society, .... 2 Riga, Naturforscheiider Verein, ..... 1 Robinson, John, 1 Robinson, Mrs. John, 35 Sale, John, Chelsea, 1 Salem, Peabody Academy of Science, Newspapers, 5 380 Sampson, Davenport & Co., Boston, . . . . 9G San Francisco, California Academy of Sciences, . . 2 San Francisco, Cal., Mercantile Library Association, . 1 Sargent, Charles S., Brookline, 1 Sawyer, Samuel E., Gloucester, 1 Scudder, S. H., Cambridge, 1 S'Gravenhage, Nederlandsche Entomologische Vereen- iging, ......... 5 Shanghai, China Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, . I Sillars, Walter A., Dan vers, 26 Smith, George Plumer, Philadelphia, Pa., ... 5 2 Snell, Miss Annie E., .... Newspapers, Springfield, City Library Association, .... 1 Springfield, Mo., Drury College, 3 Stickney, George A. D., 8 10 St. John, New Brunswick Natural History Society, . 1 St. Louis, Mo., Academy of Science, .... 1 St. Louis, Mo., Historical Society, 1 St. Louis, Mo., Public School Library, .... 1 Stockholm, Entomologiska Foreningen, .... 3 Stockiu, A. C, Boston, 1 Stone, A. R., Maps, Stone, E. F., Washington, D. C, 9 147 Stone, Miss Mary H., 30 Stone, Robert, Newspapers, Story, Miss E. A., 1 St. Paul, Minnesota Historical Society, .... 1 1 St. Petersbourg, Academie Imperiale des Sciences, . 31 St. Petersburg, Imperial Botanical Garden, ... 2 St. Petersburg, Societas Entomologica Rossica, . . 1 Sutton, William, Estate of the late, .... 1319 1558 Sydney, Royal Society of New South Wales, ... 2 Tasmania Government Statistician, .... 1 Taunton, Eng., Somersetshire Archaeological and Natu- ral History Society, 1 Taunton Public Library, 2 Titus, Rev. Anson, Amesbury, 1 80 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. Tokio, Japan, Tokio Daigaku, Topeka, Kan., State Board of Agriculture Topeka, Kan., State Historical Society, Topeka, Kan., Washburn College, Toronto, Canadian Institute, Tuckermau, L. S., Unknown, .... Upham, William P., . . Upsal, Societe lloyale des Sciences Upton, George, Upton, Winslow, Providence, R. I, . Urbano, O., Central Ohio Scientific Association U. S. Bureau of Education, S. Chief of Engineers, S. Chief Signal Office, S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, S. Department of Agriculture, S. Department of the Interior, U. S. Department of State, U. S. Fish Commission, S. Geological 'Survey, . S. Life Saving Service, S. National Museum, S. Naval Observatory, S. Patent Office, . S. Postmaster General, S. Treasury Department, S. War Department, Vose, George L., Boston, . Wagner, E. C, Girardville, Pa., Walcott, Mrs. Martha P., Estate of the late, Waring, George E., Jr., Newport, 11. I., . Washington, D. C, Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C, Smithsonian Institution, Waters, J. Linton, Waters, Misses, Waters, Stanley, Waterville, Me., Colby University Watson, S. M., Portland, Me., . Weston, Charles H., Wheatland, Miss M. G., . Whipple, George M., . Whipple, S. K., Newbury port, . Maps, Vols. Pam. 1 8 1 30 2 1 2 66 3 1 95 2 5 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 81 Newspapers, Chart, Pam. 13 54 1 1 1 Vols. Whitcher, Mary, Shaker Village, N. H., . Whitney, Mrs. H. M., Lawrence, Whittier, Daniel B., Boston, Whittredge, Charles E., Wien, K. K., Zoologisch-botanische Gesellschaft, . . 1 Wien, Verein zur Verbreitung Naturwissenschaftlicher Kenntnisse, 1 Wiesbaden, Nassauischer Verein, 1 Wilder, Marshall P., Boston, 4 Willson, Rev. E. B., 21 Winchell, N. H., Minneapolis, Minn., .... 2 Winnipeg, Manitoba Historical and Scientific Society, Winsor, Justin, Cambridge, Winthrop, Robert C, Boston, Woods, Mrs. Kate T., 2 Worcester, American Antiquarian Society, ... 2 Wright, Harrison, Wilkes-Barre, Pa., .... 3 Wiirzburg, Physikalisch-Medicinische Gesellschaft, . 1 2 The following have been received from editors or publishers : — 420 2 6 34 1 171 American Journal of Science. Bay State Monthly. Gape Ann Bulletin. Chicago Journal of Commerce. Danvers Mirror. Essex Co. Statesman. Fireside Favorite. Gardener's Monthly and Horti- culturist. Groton Landmark. Ipswich Chronicle. Lawrence American. Lynn Bee. Manifesto, The. Marblehead Messenger. Musical Herald. Musical Record. Nation, The. Naturalists' Leisure Hour and Monthly Bulletin. Nature. Newton Transcript. New York Chamber of Com- merce Journal. Our Dumb Animals. Peabody Press. Quaritch's Catalogue. Sailors' Magazine and Seamen's Friend. Salem Evening News. Salem Evening Telegram. Salem Gazette. Salem Observer. Salem Register. Turner's Public Spirit. Voice, The. West Newbury Messenger. Zoologischer Anzeiger. Horticultural. The Trustees of the Essex Agricult- ural Society having accepted, for the second time, the invi- ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 11 82 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. tation of the authorities and citizens of Salem to hold their Annual Cattle Show and Fair at the "Willows" in Salem, Sept. 23 and 24, 1884, the Institute deemed it advisable to suspend its own horticultural exhibition and to unite cordially with the Trustees of the Agricultural Society in making their undertaking a success. An account of the Exhibition will be fouud in the Trans- actions of the Agricultural Society for the year 1884. Museum. The specimens in natural history, including those in archaeology, which have been received during the year have been placed on deposit with the Trustees of the Peabocly Academy of Science, in accordance with previous arrangements. Those of an historical character, or which possess an artistic interest, have been placed in the rooms, and have been received from the following contributors : The Peabody Academy of Science, Tennessee Historical Society, Miss Mary O. Pickering, Miss E. A. Story, Edwin N. Peabody, Dr. Wm. Mack, Miss C. Roberts of Philadelphia, Mr. Nathan Pierce, Miss Lizzie C. Ward of Boston (this donation is a crayon portrait of her brother, Gen. Fred Ward of Salem, who was killed in China in 1861, having risen to a high rank in the Chinese army; the portrait is neatly framed and now hangs in the western ante-room of Plummer Hall;) William R. Cloutman, E. S. Bowditch, R. S. Rantoul, Geo. M. Whip- ple, Geo. L. Ames, W. A. Keazar, Miss M. A. Francisco, E. N. Larra- bee, T. F. Hunt, B. D. Hill and Amos Henfield. The art exhibition opened on Thursday, May 15, 1884, and closed on the 24th inst., the eighth under the auspices of the Institute. These exhibitions of Essex County work, vary in interest with each passing year. The collection was smaller than that of the preceding, and the paintings of Benson, Barry and Whitney and a few others, who contributed then, were missed from the screens ; however, the exhibition was quite attractive and many of the sea views were fine and well executed. THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. s:\ The following is the list of contributors : Miss Mary Allen. John P. Benson. Mrs. C. A. Benjamin. Miss Martha 0. Barrett. Miss M. C. Bolles. Mrs. M. A. Bovie. Miss M. M. Brooks. Miss Anna N. Benjamin. Bates &Brigham. Miss M. J. Butler. Miss Harriet E. Carlton, Cam- bridge. Miss Lizzie Chever. Miss C. M. Colcord, Swamp- scott. Miss Ida Caller. Miss A. L. Chadwick. Miss E. W. Chadwick. Joseph A. Davis. Miss Ellen M. Dole. " Grace G. Dalton. " Edith Dalton. " M. E. Dockham. Arthur W. Dow, Ipswich. Kilby W. Elwell, Gloucester. W. B. Eaton. Miss Lizzie J. Emery. " A. Endicott. " E. W. Fiske. " C. S. Fiske. " Elizabeth B. Gardner. " Bessie W. Gardner. " May Gardner. " Carrie Goldthwaite. " Grace D. Glidden, Wen- ham. Sidney P. Guild, Lynn. Mrs. George Harrington. H. B. Harrington. Miss Anna Hyde. " Jennie Hyde. Miss A. L. Hobbs, Haverhill. " M.L. Hill. " LucyB. Hood. " L. D. Harris. G. W. Harvey. Mrs. S. K. Hart. Miss Edith Harlow. Arthur Harlow. E. D. Harlow. Miss Mabel W. Haskell. " Anna B. Holden, Provi- dence, R. I. Mrs. H. F. Jacobs. Miss I. S. Jackson. Frank R. Kimball. Miss S. S. Kimball. " Mary L. King. " Louisa Lander. Mrs. John H. Langmaid. E. C. Larrabee. Warren Marston, Gloucester. Mrs. H. N. Mudge, Marblehead. Ernest Machado. Miss McMullen. Miss T. R. Nason. " Martha W. Nichols. " Northend. Mrs. T. M. Osborne. Miss H. F. Osborne. " E. T. Oliver. " Bessie S. Osgood. " Edith P. Pickering. " Abbie G. Pingree. " M. E. Phippen. " Helen Philbrick. " Anna B. Perkins. " L. Perkins. James Powers. Miss Lottie Perkins. " Minnie Pond. " A. L. Pierson. 84 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. Miss Elizabeth A. Pinnock. " A. P. Pitman. " A. M. Quimby. C. C. Redmond. Beverly Rantoul. Miss Rantoul. " Carrie L. Read. " Lizzie L. Read. Mrs. J. H. Roberts. Miss M. E. Roberts. " B. P. Smith. " M. T. Smith. " M. Simonds. Mrs. N. G. Simonds. Arthur L. Sauders. Miss S. E. Smith. Mrs. Joseph Symonds. Miss A. C. Symonds. " S. Sweetser. " M. K. Stevens. Mrs. G. L. Streeter. Miss Delia Sheldon. Mrs. S. E. Thayer. Miss A. S. Tukey. Miss I. F. Upton. Miss L. L. A. Very. " Gertrude M. Very. Mrs. S. E. Varney. Miss E. White. Charles H. Woodbury, Lynn. Mrs. K. T. Woods. Henry Whipple. Excursion. — On Wednesday, May 21, 1884, a party of fifty members and friends left Salem on an excursion to Mauch Chunk, Luray Cave, the Natural Bridge in Virginia and Washington. Vice President F. W. Putnam was with the party, and while at the Natural Bridge gave a lecture on the geology of that vicinity, stating his theory of the formation of the bridge. There are two ways by which ravines are cut. First, like that of Niagara and the canons of Colorado and its tributaries. Secondly, like that of caves. The limestone of this region is probably lower silurian and the strata are tilted at many angles. Beginning at the Lace Water Falls, a mile above the bridge, the strata are vertical. They here begin to incline more and more towards the horizontal, which position is reached at the bridge. The limestone water, percolating through the fissures between the strata, acts both chemically and mechanically upon them, working out a deeper channel, and at the same time depositing incrusting matter as it seeks the level of drainage. This ravine was once a vast cave, the bridge being the only remaining relic of the THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 85 roof. This has stood because its limestone is more crys- talline than that above and below it. It is flinty and is probably corniferous. Stalactites and stalagmites are formed in the old cham- bers of the caves by the percolation of water through the fissures in the rocks, while the degradation and channeling are going on in the new chambers. In the case of the Natural Bridge, this action went on faster than the build- ing process, hence the roof became too thin to sustain its weight and fell in, leaving the fragment forming the bridge to tell the story. The professor then told the company of the formation of caves in general, many of which he has explored, making particular mention of the Mammoth cave and of peculiar formations found in it. Rev. B. F. McDaniel explained the formation of tufa and the varieties of incrusting minerals in caves. Col. H. C. Parsons, the proprietor, told of the caves in the neighborhood. Several of them have been opened, but not thoroughly explored. Until they can be prop- erly opened up, he deems them unsafe for amateur ex- plorers. This estate of Mr. Parsons, of some 2,000 acres, com- prises a horse-shoe range of lofty, wooded hills, enclosing the basin on whose slopes lie the hotels and the owner's residence. The Horse Shoe opens towards the east and commands a grand and beautiful view of the Blue Ridge, forest-covered and mist-crowned, rising 4,300 feet above the sea. A little to the left the glint of broken granite alone shows where the river burst through, and at the right the crest lowers so that the Peaks of Otter may overlook. 86 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. The Groveland Flower Mission, thirty-eight in number, ladies and gentlemen, came to Salem June 24 by joint invitation of the Peabody Academy of Science and the Essex Institute. They were entertained by the two societies and visited the various points of interest in and about Salem. Financial. — The following is the Treasurer's Report of the receipts and expenditures of the past year (condensed for printing) : RECEIPTS. Balance of last year's account $0 94 Income of General aecount, Assessments of members $811 00 Publications 196 33 Use of Hall, Excursions, etc., 218 35 Bank Dividend, 20 00 Return State tax, 8 91 Salem Athenaeum, portion of expense, 206 40 1,460 99 Income of Historical Fund, 12 00 " " Nat. Hist. Soc. Fund, 36 00 " " Davis Fund, 392 68 " " Ditmore Fund, 180 40 " " Manuscript Fund, 26 96 " " Ladies' Fair Fund, 60 00 " " Derby Fund 17 30 " Howes Fund, 1,430 00 11 " Story Fund, 563 00 2,718 34 Bequest of Robert Peele and sister 2,000 00 Income from the same, 135 00 2,135 00 Balance due the Treasurer, 117 52 $6,432 79 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 87 EXPENDITURES. Paid on General Account. Salaries, 1,882 00 Publications, 807 07 Fuel and Gas, 233 53 Binding, Printing, Stationery, etc., 119 37 Repairs, expressage, etc., 171 38 Fire Insurance prem., 122 50 Salem Athenasum, as per agreement, 350 00 Paid on Historical account, 53 25 " " Nat. Hist, account, 53 25 " " Ditmore annuity, 110 00 Paid Legatee— Augustus Story's Estate, . . . . 563 00 Interest Davis fund, funded in Savings Bank, ... 12 08 Interest Manuscript fund, funded in Savings Bank, . . 26 96 Interest Derby fund, funded in Savings Bank, ... 17 30 Deposit Salem Savings Bank, part of Robert Peele and sister's legacy, 1,500 00 3,68 10G 50 673 1,556 91 Paid note at Salem National Bank and Interest, . . . 410 50 410 50 $6,432 79 The invested funds are now, $47,389 54 Examined and approved by the Auditor, May 18, 1885. The secretary in concluding his report says, " In addi- tion to the accumulations of former years which it has been impossible to arrange on the shelves for want of room, there have been added since the last annual meet- ing, many books and a great collection of pamphlets, to say nothing of the large amount of printed matter, such as circulars, notices, etc. The subject of increased accommodations is, it is true, an old story, but as donations continue to flow into the building the necessity of more shelf-room forces itself on the attention of the officers of the Institute and those who frequent the library. The subject is again brought to the attention of the directors in the hope that before another year shall have passed, some decided action in this direction will be taken." Bulletin Essex [nst BULLETIN ESSEX INSTITUTE Vol. 17. Salem: July, Aug., Sept., 1885. Nos. 7-9. INDIAN GAMES. BY ANDREW McPARLAND DAVIS. "There are," says Father Brebeuf in his account of what was worthy of note among the Hurons in lf>;$6,1 "three kinds of games particularly in vogue with this peo- ple ; cross, platter, and straw. The first two are, they say, supreme for the health. Does not that excite our pity? Lo, a poor sick person, whose body is hot with fever, whose soul foresees the end of his days, and a mis- erable sorcerer orders for him as the only cooling remedy, a game of cross. Sometimes it is the invalid himself who may perhaps have dreamed that he will die unless the country engages in a game of cross for his health. Then, if he has ever so little credit, you will see those who can best play at cross arrayed, village against village, in a beautiful field, and to increase the excitement, they will wager with each other their beaver skins and their neck- laces of porcelain beads." " Sometimes also one of their medicine men will say that the whole country is ill and that a game of cross is 1 Relations des Je^uites, Quebec, 1858, p. 113. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIL 12 (89) 90 INDIAN GAMES. needed for its cure. It is not necessary to say more. The news incontinently spreads everywhere. The chiefs in each village give orders that all the youths shall do their duty in this respect, otherwise some great calamity will overtake the country." LACROSSE. In 1667, Nicolas Perrot, then acting as agent of the French government, was received near Saut Sainte Marie with stately courtesy and formal ceremony by the Miamis, to whom he was deputed. A few days after his arrival, the chief of that nation gave him, as an entertainment, a game of lacrosse.2 w More than two thousand persons assembled in a great plain each with his cross. A wooden ball about the size of a tennis ball was tossed in the air. From that moment there was a constant movement of all these crosses which made a noise like that of arms which one hears during a battle. Half the savages tried to send the ball to the northwest the length of the field, the others wished to make it go to the southeast. The con- test which lasted for a half hour was doubtful. " In 1763, an army of confederate nations, inspired by the subtle influence of Pontiac's master mind, formed the purpose of seizing the scattered forts held by the English along the northwestern frontier. On the fourth day of June of that year, the garrison at Fort Michilimackinac, unconscious of their impending fate, thoughtlessly lolled at the foot of the palisade and whiled away the day in watching the swaying fortunes of a game of ball which was being played by some Indians in front of the stock- ade. Alexander Henry, who was on the spot at the time, 2 Histoire de l'Am&ique Septentrionale par M. de Bacqueville de la Potherie, Paris, 1722, Vol. II, 124 et seq. INDIAN GAMES. 91 says that the game played by these Indians was "Baggati- way, called by the Canadians lejeu de la Crosse."* Parkman4 concludes a vivid description of the surprise and massacre of the garrison at Michilimackinac, based upon authentic facts, as follows: "Rushing and striking, tripping their adversaries, or hurling them to the ground, they pursued the animating contest amid the laughter and applause of the spectators. Suddenly, from the midst of the multitude, the ball soared into the air and, descending 7 ' £3 in a wide curve, fell near the pickets of the fort. This was no chance stroke. It was part of a preconcerted scheme to insure the surprise and destruction of the gar- rison. As if in pursuit of the ball, the players turned and came rushing, a maddened and tumultuous throng, towards the gate. In a moment they had reached it. The amazed English had no time to think or act. The shrill cries of the ball-players were changed to the ferocious war-whoop. The warriors snatched from the squaws the hatchets which the latter, with this design, had concealed beneath their blankets. Some of the Indians assailed the spectators without, while others rushed into the fort, and all was carnage and confusion." Thus we see that the favorite game of ball of the North American Indians, known to-day, as it was in 1636, by the name of " lacrosse," was potent among them as a reme- dial exercise or superstitious rite to cure diseases and avert disaster ; that it formed part of stately ceremonials which were intended to entertain and amuse distinguished guests ; and that it was made use of as a stratagem of war, a Travels and Adventures in Canada, etc., by Alexander Henry, New York, 1809, p. 78; Travels through the Interior parts of North America, by Jonathan Carver London, 1778, p. 19. The Book of the Indians, by Samuel G. Drake, Boston, 1841, Book V, Ch. Ill, p. 52. * The Conspiracy of Pontiac, by Francis Parkman, Boston, 1870. Vol. I, p. 339. 92 INDIAN GAMES. by means of which to lull the suspicions of the enemy and to gain access to their, forts. The descriptions of lacrosse which have been transmitted to us, would often prove unintelligible to one who had never seen the game played. The writers of the accounts which have come down to us from the early part of the seventeenth century were men whose lives were spent among the scenes which they described and they had but little time, and few opportunities for careful writing. The individual records though somewhat confused enable us easily to identify the game, and a comparison of the different accounts shows how thoroughly the main features of the game have been preserved. Lacrosse is played to-day as follows : The number of players on the opposing sides should be equal. Regular stations are assigned in the rules for playing the game, for twelve on each side. Goals, each consisting of two upright posts or staffs, generally about six feet apart and of equal height, are planted at each end of the field. The length of the field and its bounds are determined by the character of the ground and the skill of the players. The effort of each side is to preveut the ball from passing through the goal assigned to its protection, and equally to try to drive it through the opposite goal. Under no cir- cumstances can the ball be touched during the game, while within the bounds, by the hands of the players. Each player has a racket, the length of which, though op- tional, is ordinarily from four to five feet. One end of this racket or bat is curved like a shepherd's crook, and from the curved end a thong is carried across to a point on the handle about midway its length. In the space thus enclosed between the thong and the handle, which at its broadest part should not exceed a foot in width, a flat network is interposed. This forms the bat. It is with INDIAN GAMES. 93 this that the player picks up and throws the ball used in the game, which should be about eight or nine inches in circumference. The ball is placed in the centre of the field by the umpire, and when the game is called, the op- posing players strive to get possession of it with their rackets. The play consists in running with it and throw- ing it, with the design of driving it between the adversary's goal posts ; and in defensive action, the purpose of which is to prevent the opponents from accomplishing similar de- signs on their part. As the wind or the sunlight may favor one side or the other on any field, provision is gen- erally made for a change of goals during the match. The stations of the players and the minor rules of the game are unimportant in this connection. The oldest attempt at a detailed description of the game is given by Nicolas Perrot who from 1662 to 1699 spent the greater part of his time as coureur de bois, trader, or government agent, among the Indians of the far West. It is of him that Abbe Ferland says, " Courageous man, honest writer and good observer, Perrot lived for a lono- time among the Indians of the West who were very much attached to him." His accounts of the manners and cus- toms of the North American Indians have been liberally used by subsequent writers and as the part treating of games is not only very full but also covers a very early period of history, it is doubly interesting for purposes of comparison with games of a later day. He5 says, "The savages have many kinds of games in which they delight. Their natural fondness for them is so great that they will neglect food and drink,- not only to join in a game but even to look at one. There is among them a certain game E Memoire surles Moeurs, Coustumes et Relligion des Sauvages de l'Amerique Septentrionale, par Nicolas Perrot, Leipzig et Paris, 1864, p. 43, et seq. 94 INDIAN GAMES. of cross which is very similar to our tennis. Their cus- tom in playing it is to match tribe against tribe, and if the numbers are not equal they render them so by with- drawing some of the men from the stronger side. You see them all armed with a cross, that is to say a stick which has a large portion at the bottom, laced like a racket. The ball with which they play is of wood and of nearly the shape of a turkey's egg. The goals of the game are fixed in an open field. These goals face to the east and to the west, to the north and to the south." Then follows a somewhat confused description of the method and the rules of the contest from which we can infer that after a side had won two goals they changed sides of the field with their opponents, and that two out of three, or three out of five goals decided the game. Reading Perrot's description in connection with that given by de la Potherie of the game played before Perrot by the Miamis, helps us to remove the confusion of the account. Abbe Ferland6 describes the game. He was a diligent student of all sources of authority upon these subjects and was probably familiar with the modern game. His account of the Indian game follows that of Perrot so closely as to show that it was his model. It is, however, clear and distinct in its details, free from the confusion which attends Perrot's account and might al- most serve for a description of the game as played by the Indians to-day. Perrot was a frontier-man and failed when he undertook to describe anything that required careful and exact use of language. We can only interpret him intelligently by combining his descriptions with those of other writers and applying our own knowledge of the game as we see it to-day. He is, however, more intelligible cCours d'Hi-stoire du Canada, par J. B. A. Ferland, Quebec, 1861, Vol. I, p. 134. INDIAN GAMES. 95 when he gets on more general ground, and after having disposed of the technicalities of the game, he proceeds : "Men, women, boys and girls are received on the sides which they make up, and they wager between themselves more or less according to their means." M These games ordinarily begin after the melting of the ice and they last even to seed time. In the afternoon one sees all the players bedecked7 and painted. Each party has its leader who addresses them, announcing to his players the hour fixed for opening the game. The players assemble in a crowd in the middle of the field and one of the leaders of the two sides, having the ball in his hands casts it into the air. Each one then tries to throw it to- wards the side where he ought to send it. If it falls to the earth, the player tries to draw it to him with his cross. If it is sent outside the crowd, then the most active play- ers, by closely pursuing it, distinguish themselves. You hear the noise which they make striking against each other and warding off blows, in their strife to send the ball in the desired direction. When one of them holds the ball between his feet, it is for him, in his unwilling- ness to let it go, to avoid the blows which his adversaries incessantly shower down upon his feet. Should he hap- pen to be wounded at this juncture, he alone is responsible for it. It has happened that some have had their legs broken, others their arms and some have been killed. It is not uncommon to see among them those who are crip- pled for life and who could only be at such a game by an 7 1 translate apiffez, " bedecked," assuming from the context that the author meant to write " attifez." We have, elsewhere, accounts which show that ball- players, even though compelled to play with scant clothing, still covered them- selves with their ornaments. J. M. Stanley in his Portraits of North American Indians, Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, Washington, 1862, Vol. II, p. 13, says that the " Creek" ball-players first appear on the ground in costume. " Dur- ing the play they divest themselves of all their ornaments which are usually dis- played on these occasions for the purpose of betting on the result of the play. " 96 INDIAN GAMES. act of sheer obstinacy. When accidents of this kind happen, the unfortunate withdraws quietly from the game if he can do so. If his injury will not permit him, his relations carry him to the cabin and the game continues until it is finished as if nothing had happened." " When the sides are equal the players will occupy an entire afternoon without either side gaining any advan- tage ; at other times one of the two will gain the two games that they need to win. In this game you would say to see them run that they looked like two parties who wanted to fight. This exercise contributes much to render the savages alert and prepared to avoid blows from the tomahawk of an enemy, when they find them- selves in a combat. Without being told in advance that it was a game, one might truly believe that they fought in open country. Whatever accident the game may cause, they attribute it to the chance of the game and have no ill will towards each other. The suffering is for the wounded, who bear it contentedly as if nothing had hap- pened, thus making it appear that they have a great deal of courage and are men." " The side that wins takes whatever has been put up on the game and whatever ther% is of profit, and that without any dispute on the part of the others when it is a question of paying, no matter what the kind of game. Neverthe- less, if some person who is not in the game, or who has not bet anything, should throw the ball to the advan- tage of one side or the other, one of those whom the throw would not help would attack him, demanding if this is his affair and why he has mixed himself with it. They often come to quarrels about this and if some of the chiefs did not reconcile them, there would be blood shed and perhaps some killed." Originally, the game was open to any number of com- INDIAN GAMES. 97 petitors. According to the Relation of 1636, "Village was pitted against village." " Tribe was matched against tribe," says Perrot. The number engaged in the game described by La Potherie8 was estimated by him at two thousand. LaHontan9 says that "the savages commonly played it in large companies of three or four hundred at a time," while Charlevoix10 says the number of players was variable and adds " for instance if they are eighty," thus showing about the number he would expect to find in a game. When Morgan11 speaks of six or eight on a side, he must allude to a later period, probably after the game was modified by the whites who had adopted it among their amusements.12 Our earliest accounts of the game as played by the In- dians in the south are about one hundred years later than the corresponding records in the north. Adair13 says the 8 Vol. II, p. 126. 8 Memoires de L'Amerique Septentrionale, ou la Suite des Voyages de Mr. Le Baron de LaHontan, Amsterdam, 1705, Vol. n, p. 113. "Histoire de la Nouvelle France. Journal d'un Voyage, etc., par le P. de Char- levoix, Paris, 1744, Vol. in, p. 319. 11 League of the Iroquois, hy Lewis H. Morgan, Rochester, 1851, p. 294. 12 The game is also mentioned in An Account of the Remarkable Occurrences in the Life and Travels of Col. James Smith during his Captivity with the Indians in the years 1755-1759. Cincinnati, 1870, p. 78. It is described by Col. William L. Stone in his Life of Brant, Albany, 18(55, Vol. II, p. 448. In one game of which he speaks, the ball was started by a young and beautiful squaw who was elaborately dressed for the occasion. Notwithstanding the extent and value of Col. Stone's contributions to the literature on the subject of the North American Indians, he makes the erroneous statement that " The Six Nations had adopted from the Whites the popular game of ball or cricket." See p. 445, same volume, c.f. The Memoir upon the late War in North America, 1755-1760, by M. Pouchot, translated and edited by Franklin B. Hough, Vol. II, p. 195. A game of ball is also described in Historical Collections of Georgia, by the Rev. George White, 3d edition, New York, 1855, p. 670, which took place in Walker County, Georgia, between Chatooga and Chicamauga. The ball was thrown up at the centre. The bats were described as curiously carved spoons. If the ball touched the ground the play stoppedand it was thrown up again. Rev. J. Owen Dorsey in a paper entitled "Omaha Soci- ology," printed in the Third Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology, etc., 1881-1882, Washington, 1884, §230, p. 336, describes the game amongst the Omahas. 13The History of the American Indians, particularly those Nations adjoining to the Mississippi, etc., by James Adair, London, 1775, p. 399. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII 13 98 INDIAN GAMES. gamesters are equal in number and speaks of "the crowd of players" preventing the one who "catches the ball from throwing it off with a long direction." Bossu14 says, "they are forty on each side," while Bartram15 says, "the inhab- itants of one town play against another in consequence of a challenge." From this it would seem that among those Indians, as at the North, the number of players was gov- erned only by the circumstances under which the game was played. The ball, originally of wood,16 was replaced by one made of deer skin. Adair gives the following description of its manufacture : "The ball is made of a piece of scraped deer- skin, moistened, and stuffed hard with deer's hair, and strongly sewed with deer's sinews."17 According to Morgan the racket has undergone a similar change, from a curved wooden head to the curved stick with open network, but we have seen in the earliest de- scription at our command, that in the days of Perrot the cross was "laced like a racket."18 The game was played not only by the Indians of our Coast, but Powers19 found it also among the Californi an In- dians. He describes a game of tennis played by the Porno Indians in Kussian Kiver Valley, of which he had heard nothing anions the northern tribes. "A ball is rounded out of an oak knot as large as those used by school boys, and it is propelled by a racket which is constructed of a 14 Travels through that Part of North America formerly called Louisiana, by Mr. Bossu, Captain in the French Marines. Translated from the French by John Rein- hold Forster, London, 1771, Vol. I, p. 304. "Travels through North and South Carolina, etc., by William Bartram, Philadel- phia, 1791, p. 508. " La Potherie, Vol. II, p. 126; Perrot, p. 44. " p. 400. 18 League of the Iroquois, p. 298; Perrot p. 44. ^Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. ill, p. 151. Tribes of Cali- fornia by Stephen Powers; The same game is described among the Meewocs in The Native Races of the Pacific States by H. H. Bancroft, Vol. I, p. 393. INDIAN GAMES. 99 long slender stick, bent double and bound together, leav- ing a circular hoop at the extremity, across which is woven a coarse meshwork of strings. Such an implement is not strong enough for batting the ball, neither do they bat it, but simply shove or thrust it along the ground." Paul Kane20 describes a game played among the Chi- nooks. He says "They also take great delight in a game with a ball which is played by them in the same manner as the Cree, Chippewa and Sioux Indians. Two poles are erected about a mile apart, and the company is divided into two bands armed with sticks, having a small ring or hoop at the end with which the ball is picked up and thrown to a great distance, each party striving to get the ball past their own goal. They are sometimes a hundred on a side, and their play is kept up with great noise and excitement. At this play they bet heavily as it is gener- ally played between tribes or villages." Domenech21 writing about the Indians of the interior, calls the game "cricket," and says the players were cos- tumed as follows : "Short drawers, or rather a belt, the body being first daubed over with a layer of bright colors ; from the belt (which is short enough to leave the thighs free) hangs a long tail, tied up at the extremity with long horse hair ; round their necks is a necklace, to which is attached a floating mane, dyed red, as is the tail, and fall- ing in the way of a dress fringe over the chest and shoulders. * * In the northwest, in the costume indispensable to the players, feathers are sometimes substituted for horse hair." He adds "that some tribes play with two sticks" and that it is played in "winter on the ice." "The ball is made of wood or brick covered with kid-skin leather, sometimes of 20Wanderings of an Artist among the Indians of North America by Paul Kane, p. 190; H. H. Bancroft's Native Races, Vol. I, p. 244. 21 Seven Years' Residence in the Great Deserts of North America by tlie Abbe Em. Domenech, Vol. II, pp. 192, 193. 100 INDIAN GAMES. leather curiously interwoven." Schoolcraft describes the game as played in the winter on the ice.22 It will be observed that the widest difference prevails in the estimate of the distance apart at which the goals are set. Henry, in his account of the game at Michilimackinac says "they are at a considerable distance from each other, as a mile or more." Charlevoix places the goals in a game with eighty players at "half a league apart" meaning prob- ably half a mile. LaHontan estimates the distance between the goals at "five or six hundred paces." Adair,23 who is an intelligent writer, and who was thoroughly conversant with the habits and customs of the Cherokees, Choctaws, and Chicasaws estimates the length of the field at "five hundred yards," while Romans24 in describing the goals uses this phrase "they fix two poles across each other at about a hundred and fifty feet apart." Bossu25 speaks as if in the game which he saw played there was but a single goal. He says " They agree upon a mark or aim about sixty yards off, and distinguished by two great poles, be- tween which the ball is to pass." The goals among the northern Indians were single posts at the ends of the field. It is among the southern Indians that we first hear of two posts being raised to form a sort of gate through or over which the ball must pass. Adair says, "they fix two bending poles into the ground, three yards apart below, but slanting a considerable way out- 32 Schoolcraft's North American Indians, Vol. n, p. 78; See also Ball-play among the Dacotas, in Philander Prescott's paper, Ibid, Vol. IV, p. 64. "Henry, p. 78; Charlevoix Vol. Ill, p. 319; Kane's Wanderings, p. 189; LaHon- tan, Vol. ii, p. 113; Adair, p. 400. 24A concise Natural History of East and West Florida, by Capt. Bernard Ro- mans, New York, 1776, p. 79. 25Vol. I, p. 304; Similarly, Pickett (History of Alabama, Vol. I, p. 92) describes a game among the Creeks in which there was but one goal, consisting of two poles erected in the centre of the field between which the ball must pass to count one. He cites "Bartram," and the " Narrative of a Mission to the Creek Nation by Col. Marinus Willett," as his authorities. Neither of them sustains him on this point. INDIAN GAMES. 101 wards. The party that happens to throw the ball over these counts one ; but if it be thrown underneath, it is cast back and played for as usual." The ball is to be thrown "through the lower part" of the two poles which are fixed across each other at about one hundred and fifty feet apart, according to Romans. In Bossu's account it is "between" the two great poles which distinguish the mark or aim, that "the ball is to pass." On the other hand, Bartram, describing what he saw in North Carolina, speaks of the ball "being hurled into the air, midway between the two high pillars which are the goals, and the party who bears off the ball to their pillar wins the game." In some parts of the south each player had two rackets between which the ball was caught. For this purpose they were necessarily shorter than the cross of the north- ern Indians. Adair says, "The ball sticks are about two feet long, the lower end somewhat resembling the palm of a hand, and which are worked with deer-skin thongs. Be- tween these they catch the ball, and throw it a great dis- tance."26 That this was not universal throughout the south would appear from Bossu's account who says, "Every one has a battledoor in his hand about two feet and a half long, made very nearly in the form of ours, of walnut, or chestnut wood, and covered with roe-skins." Bartram also says that each person has "a racquet or hurl, which is an imple- ment of a very curious construction somewhat resembling a ladle or little hoop net, with a handle near three feet in length, the hoop and handle of wood and the netting of thongs of raw-hide or tendons of an animal." Catlin27 saw the game played by the Choctaws on their 28Adair, p. 400; A Narrative of the Military Adventures of Colonel Marinus Wil- lett, p. 109. 97Lettersand Notes on the Manners, Customs and Condition of the North Amer- ican Indians, by George Catlin, Vol. n, p. 123 et seq. 102 INDIAN GAMES. Western Keservation. They used two rackets. In this game the old men acted as judges. The game was ordinarily started by tossing the ball into the air in the centre of the field. This act is represented by Perrot as having been performed by one of the leaders in the game, but it is more in accord with the spirit in which the game was played, that it should have been done by some outsider. Bossu says, "An old man stands in the middle of the place appropriated to the play, and throws up into the air a ball of roe-skins rolled about each other," while Powers28 says that among the Californian Indians this act was performed by a squaw. The judges started the ball among the Choctaws.29 Notwithstanding the differ- ences in the forms of the goals, their distance apart and the methods of play disclosed in all these descriptions, the game can only be regarded as the same. The historians who have preserved for us the accounts of the ancient southern games from which quotations have been made, are all Englishmen except Bossu, and he entered the coun- try not by the way of Quebec but by way of New Orleans. It is not strange, therefore, that we do not find in use amongst them the name which the early French fathers and traders invariably applied to the game. The descrip- tion, however, given by these writers, of the racket used in the south, corresponds so closely with the crook from which the game took the name by which it is known, that we must accept the game as a modified form of lacrosse. From Maine to Florida, from the Atlantic to the Pacific, we trace a knowledge of it. We have found it in use among the confederate nations of the north and of the south and among scattered tribes throughout the country. In the majority of instances the natural instincts of those ^Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. Ill, p. 151. wCatlin, Vol. n, p.lbj. INDIAN GAMES. 103 who participated in the strife were stimulated by local pride. The reputation of their tribe or their village rested upon the result. Ardent as the spirit of the contest must necessarily have been under such circumstances, among a people where courage and physique counted for so much, their intense passion for gambling intervened to fan into fiercer flames the spirits ot the contesting players and to inspire them to more earnest efforts. Stakes, often of the utmost consequence to the players and their back- ers, were wagered upon the games. A reputation for courage, for skill and for endurance, was the most valua- ble possession ot the Indian. The maintenance of this was to a certain extent involved in each game that he played. Oftentimes in addition to this, all of his own pos- sessions and the property of his friends and neighbors in the form of skins and beads were staked upon the result of the contest. In games where so much was involved, we need not be surprised to learn from Perrot that limbs were occasionally broken and that sometimes players were even killed. In the notes to Perrot's Memoir it is stated that some anonymous annotator has written across the margin of Perrot's manuscript at this point :30 " False, nei- ther arms nor legs are broken, nor are players ever killed." We scarcely need the corroboratory statements of La Po- therie31 that " these games are ordinarily followed by bro- ken heads, arms and legs, and often people are killed at them ;" and also of LaHontan,32 that "they tear their skins and break their legs" at them, to satisfy us that Perrot rather than his critic is to be believed. If no such state- ments had been made, we should infer that so violent a game, on which stakes of such vital importance were placed, could not be played by a people like the Indians, except with such results. »° Perrot, Note I, Ch. x, p. 187. " Vol. ii, pp. 126-127. » Vol. n, p. 113. 104 INDIAN GAMES. Notwithstanding the violence of the game and the deep interest which the players and spectators took in it, the testimony of historians is uniform to the effect that ac- cidental injuries received during its progress produced no ill will. We have seen that Perrot states that if any- one attempted to hold the ball with his feet, he took his chance of injury, and that those who were injured retired quietly from the field. Adair says, "It is a very unusual thing to see them act spitefully, not even in this severe and tempting exercise." Bossu bears testimony to the same effect, in the following words : "The players are never displeased ; some old men, who assist at the play, become mediators, and determine that the play is only intended as a recreation, and not as an opportunity of quarrelling." Where the game was played by appointment in response to a challenge, the men and women assembled in their best ornaments, and danced and sang during the day and night previous to that of the appointed day. The players supplicated the Great Spirit for success. Female relations chanted to him all the previous night and the men fasted from the previous night till the game was over.33 The players wore but little in the way of covering. Ro- mans speaks of them as being "almost naked, painted and ornamented with feathers ;" and Bossu says they were "na- ked, painted with various colours, having a tyger tail fast- ened behind, and feathers on their heads and arms." It is not astonishing that a game which called for such vigorous exercise34 and which taxed the strength, agility and endurance of the players to such a degree, should be described by writers in terms which showed that they « Adair, p. 401; Bossu, Vol. I, p. 304; and Willett's Narrative p. 109. 84 Ferland, Vol. I, p. 134, and Major C. Swan in a Report concerning the Creeks in 1791, Schoolcraft, Vol. v, p. 277, assert that the Whites excel the Indians at this gam©. INDIAN GAMES. 105 looked upon it rather in the light of a manly contest than as an amusement. Nevertheless the young people and the women often took part in it. Perrot tells us so, and both Romans and Bossu say that after the men were through, the women usually played a game, the bets on which were generally high. Powers35represents the squaws among the Californian Indians as joining the game. Dexterity in the game lay in the skilful use of the rack- et ; in rapid running ; in waylaying an adversary when he was in possession of the ball ; in avoiding members of the opposing side when the player himself was running with the ball for the goal, and in adroitly passing the ball to one of the same side when surrounded by opponents. To give full scope to skill in the use of the racket, great stress was laid upon the rule that the ball was not to be touched by the hand. Perrot says, " if it falls to the earth he tries to draw it to him with his cross." Charlevoix says, "Their business is to strike the ball to the post of the adverse party without letting it fall to the ground and without touching it with the hand." Adair says, " They are not allowed to catch it with their hands." The early writers were struck with the fact that the char- acter of the exercise in this game was fitted to develop the young warriors for the war path, and they commented on the practice that they thus acquired in rapid running and in avoiding blows from an instrument in the hands of an adversary. When we review the various features of the game which its chroniclers have thought worthy of record, we can but conclude that it was rather a contest of grave importance to the players than a mere pastime, nor can we fail to ac- cept the concurrent testimony as to the widespread terri- 35 Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. Ill, p. 151. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 14 106 INDIAN GAMES. tory in which it was domesticated, as additional evidence of the extent of the intercourse which prevailed among the native tribes of this country. PLATTER OR DICE. The second in the list of games given by Father Bre- beuf is that which he calls "platter." Writers who des- cribe the habits of the Indians at the north have much to say concerning this game. According to Lescarbot, Jac- ques Cartier saw it played, and recorded his observations.36 Sagard Theodat 37 devotes considerable space to it. Both Father Brebeuf, in his Relation in 1636, and Father Lalemant, in his Relation in 1639, give long accounts of the game, the causes for its being played, the excesses in gambling to which it leads, and the methods which pre- vail in its practice. In Perrot's38 work there is a good de- scription of the game, although not so full as his account of lacrosse, from which we have already quoted. La Potherie and LaHontan barely mention it. Lafitau39 in his searching analysis of the manuscripts deposited at Que- bec, while seeking for traces of his theory that a resem- blance existed between the habits of the Indians and those of the ancient dwellers in eastern Europe, found an un- usual quantity of material bearing on this particular topic, which he has reproduced in his book. Charlevoix40, in a letter dated June 8, 1721, says, "As I was returning through a quarter of the Huron village, I perceived a num- ber of these Indians, who seemed much heated at play. I 38 Histoire de la Nouvelle France par Marc Lescarbot, Nouvelle Edition, Paris 1866, Vol. Ill, p. 754. 87 Histoire du Canada, etc., par Gabriel Sagard Tbeodat; Nouvelle Edition, Paris, 1866, Vol. I, pp. 243-244. 38 p. 50. 39 Majurs des Sauvages Ameriquains, etc., par le P. Lafitau, Paris, 1724, Vol. II, p. 339. «° Vol. Ill, pp. 260-1. INDIAN GAMES. 107 approached them and found that the game they were play- ing at was what they called the game of platter. This is the game to which the Indians are addicted above all others. They sometimes lose their rest and in some de- gree their very senses at it. They stake all they are worth, and several of them have been known to continue at it till they have stript themselves stark naked and lost all their movables in their cabin. Some have been known to stake their liberty for a certain time. This circumstance proves beyond all doubt how passionately fond they are of it, there being no people in the world more jealous of their liberty than our Indians." In the description which Charlevoix then gives, he has relied partly upon personal observations and also to some extent, upon accounts which were at that time in manu- script in Quebec and which were easily accessible to him. He was himself an intelligent observer and a cul- tivated man. His history and his letters, although not free from the looseness of expression which pervades con- temporaneous accounts show on the whole the disci- pline of an educated mind. We learn from him and from the authorities heretofore enumerated that two players only from each side could participate in this game at any given time during its progress. The necessary imple- ments were a bowl and a number of dice fashioned some- what like apricot seeds, and colored differently upon the upper and lower sides. Generally, one side was white and the other black. The number of these dice was gen- erally six. There was no fixed rule as to the materials of which they were made ; sometimes they were of bone ; sometimes the stones of fruits were used. The impor- tant point was that the centre of gravity of each die should be so placed, that when it was thrown into the air, or when the bowl in which it was placed, was vio- 108 INDIAN GAMES. lently twirled, there would be an even chance as to which of its two sides the die would settle upon when it lodged ; and in the game as it was played in early times that the whole number of dice used should be uniform in the col- oring of the sides, each die having the different sides of different colors. The dice were placed in the bowl which was generally of wood, between the two players who were to cast them in behalf of their respective sides. These casters or throwers were selected by each side and the prevailing motives in their choice were generally based upon some superstitious belief in their luck. Per- haps this one had dreamed that he would win. Perhaps that one was believed to possess some magic power, or some secret ointment which when applied to the dice would cause them to turn up favorably for his side.41 The spectators were generally arranged in seats along the sides of the cabin42, placed in tiers so that each person could have a view of the players. They were in more senses than one deeply interested in the game. When- the cast was to be made the player would strike the bowl upon the ground so as to make the dice jump into the air43 and would then twirl the bowl rapidly around. During this process and until it stopped its revolutions and the dice finally settled, the players addressed the dice and beat themselves on their breasts.44 The spectators during the same period filled the air with shouts and invoked aid from their own protecting powers, while in the same breath they poured forth imprecations on those of their adversaries. The number of points affected the length of the game and was entirely optional. If six dice were used *i Relations des Jesuites, Relation en PAunee, 1G36, p. 113. «2 Ibid, Relation en PAnnee, 1639, p. 95. *3 Sagard Theodat, Vol. I, p. 213. 44 Shea's Hennepin, p. 300. INDIAN GAMES. 109 and all came up of the same color, the throw counted five.45 If five of them were of the same color it counted one. Any lower number failed to count. If the caster was unsuccessful he gave place to another, but so long as he continued to win his side would retain him in that position.46 The game was often ushered in with singing. Like la- crosse it was prescribed as a remedy for sickness or in consequence of dreams, and the sufferer in whose behalf the game was played was borne to the cabin in which it was to take place. Preliminary fasting and continence were observed, and every effort made that superstition could suggest to discover who would be the lucky thrower and who could aid the caster by his presence at the con- test. Old men, unable to walk thither, were brought up on the shoulders of the young men that their presence might be propitious to the chances of the game.47 The excitement which attended one of these games of chance was intense, especially when the game reached a critical point and some particular throw was likely to terminate it. Charlevoix says the games often lasted for five or six days48 and oftentimes the spectators concerned in the game, "are in such an agitation as to be transported out of themselves to such a degree that they quarrel and fight, which never happens to the Hurons, except on these occa- sions or when they are drunk." Perhaps rum was responsible also for these quarrels ; for in the early accounts we are told that losses were phil- osophically accepted. Father Brebeuf tells of a party 45 Among the DelaAvares it required eight counts of five to win. History of the Mission of the United Bi-ethren among the Indians, etc., G. H. Loskiel. Translated by C. I. Latrobe. Part I, Ch. viii, p. 10G. 46 Charlevoix, Vol. in, p. 261. 4Ubid, p. 262. 48 Loskiel (p. 106) saw a game between two Iroquois towns which lasted eight days. Sacrifices for luck were offered by the sides each night. 110 INDIAN GAMES. who had lost their leggings at one of these ^ames and who returned to their village in three feet of snow as cheerful in appearance as if they had won. There seems to have been no limit to which they would not go in their stakes while under the excitement of the game. Clothing, wife, family and sometimes the personal liberty of the player himself rested in the hazard of the die.49 The women often played the game by themselves, though apparently with less formality than characterized the great matches. The latter frequently assumed the same local characteristics that we have seen in the game of lacrosse, and we hear of village being pitted against village as a frequent feature of the game.50 Morgan51 describes a game played by the Iroquois with buttons or dice made of elk-horn, rounded and pol- ished and blackened on one side. The players spread a blanket on the ground ; and the dice were tossed with the hand in the air and permitted to fall on the blanket. The counts were determined as in the game of platter by the color of the sides of the dice which were exposed when they settled. The number of the dice was eight. In Per rot's52 description of the game of platter he al- ludes to a game, played with eight dice, on a blanket in precisely this way, but he adds that it was practised by women and girls. La Potherie55 says that the women sometimes play at platter, but ordinarily they cast the fruit stones with the hand as one throws dice. Under the name of " hubbub " this game has also been *° Charlevoix, Vol. in, p. 261. Le Grand Voyage du Pays des Hurons, par Ga- briel Siigard Theodat, Paris, 1632, Nouvelle Edition, Paris, 1S65, p. S5; Relations de Jcsuites, Relation de la Nouvelle France, en l'Annee 1639, pp. 95-96; Lafltau, Vol. II, p. 341. •■" Perrot, p. 43; Uistoire du Canada, par F. X. Garneau, Vol. I, p. 115. " League of the Iroquois, p. 302. 6a i>Crrot, p. 50. o:i La Potherie, Vol. Ill, p. 23. INDIAN GAMES. Ill described by observers among the Abenakis. Ogilby54 says: "Hubbub is five small Bones in a small Tray; the Bones be like a Die, but something flatter, black on the one side and white on the other, which they place on the Ground, against which violently thumping the Platter, the Bones mount, changing Colour with the windy whisking of their Hands to and fro ; which action in that sport they much use, smiting themselves on the Breasts and Thighs, crying out Hub Hub Hub ; they may be heard playing at this game a quarter of a mile off. The Bones being all black or white make a double Game ; if three of one colour, and two of another, then they afford but a single game ; four of a colour and one differing is nothing. So long as the Man wins he keeps the Tray, but if he lose the next Man takes it." There is but little said about this game in the south by writers. It evidentlv had no such hold there as amomr the Hurons and the tribes along the Lakes. Lawson55 saw it played in North Carolina with persimmon stones as dice. While this fixes the fact that the game had a home among the southern Indians, the way in which it has been slighted by the majority of writers who treat of that sec- tion shows that it was not a favorite game there. To what shall we ascribe this ? Its hold upon the north- ern Indians shows that it was peculiarly adapted to the temperament of the natives, and we should naturally ex- pect to find it as much in use among the tribes of the south as with those of the north. An explanation for this may possibly be found in the difference of the cli- mate. The game was especially adapted for the winter, and while its practice was evidently not exclusively con- 64 America, being an Accurate Description of the New World, etc. Collected and Translated by John Ogilby. London, 1670. Book n, Ch. n, p. 155. 56 History of North Carolina by John Lawson, London, 1718, p. 176. 112 INDIAN GAMES. fined to that season, it is possible that its greater hold upon the affections of the Indians of the north, arose from their being obliged to resort to in-door amusements during the protracted winters in that region. From this necessity the southern Indians being in a measure exempt, they continued their out-door games as usual and never became so thoroughly infatuated with this game. Informal contests were often held between players, in which the use of the bowl or platter was dispensed with. The dice were held in the hand and then tossed in the air. They were allowed to fall upon some prepared surface, generally a deerskin spread for the purpose. The same rules as to the color of the surfaces of the dice when they settled in their places governed the count. This form of the game is sometimes described as a separate game. Boucher56 calls it Paquessen.bl The women of Oregon played it with marked beaver teeth.58 Among the Twa- nas it was played with beaver or muskrat teeth.69 Pow- ers60 says that among the Nishinams, a tribe living on the slopes of the Sierra Nevada between the Yuba and Cos- umnes rivers, rt a game of dice is played by men or women, two, three or four together. The dice, four in number, consist of two acorns split lengthwise into halves, with the outsides scraped and painted red or black. They are shak- en in the hand and thrown into a wide flat basket, woven in ornamental patterns. One paint and three whites, or 6CTrue and Genuine Description of New France, etc., by Pierre Boucher, Paris, 1044. Translated under title '-Canada in the Seventeenth Century," Montreal, 1883, p. 57. 57 Played by women and girls. Sagard Theodat, Histoire du Canada, Vol. I, p. 244. ^Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. I, p. 206, George Gibfcs; H. H. Bancroft's Native Races, Vol. I, p. 244; The Northwest Coast by James G. Swan, p. 158. 6U Bulletin, U. S. Geological Survey, Vol. m, No. 1, April 5, 1877. Rev. M. Eels. 80 Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. ill, p, 332. INDIAN GAMES. 113 vice versa, score nothing ; two of each score one ; four alike score four. The thrower keeps on throwing until he makes a blank throw, when another takes the dice. When all the players have stood their turn, the one who has scored the most takes the stakes." The women of the Yokuts,61 a Californian tribe which lived in the San Joaquin valley near Tulare Lake, had a similar game. Each die was half a large acorn or walnut shell filled with pitch and powdered charcoal and inlaid with bits of bright colored abaloni shell. Four squaws played and a fifth kept tally with fifteen sticks. There were eight dice and they scooped them up with their hands and dashed them into the basket, counting one when two or five flat surfaces turned up. Schoolcraft62 says "one of the principal amusements of a sedentary character is that of various games, success in which depends on luck in numbers. These games, to which both the prairie and forest tribes are addicted, assume the fascination and intensity of gambling ; and the most valued articles are often staked upon the luck of a throw. For this purpose the prairie tribes commonly use the stones of the wild plum or some analogous fruit, upon which various devices indicating their arithmetical value are burned in, or engraved and colored, so as at a glance to reveal the character of the pieces." Among the Dacota tribes this is known by a term which is translated the "game of plum stones." He gives illustrations of the devices on five sets of stones, numbering eight each. "To play this game a little orifice is made in the ground and a skin put in it ; often it is also played on a robe."03 The women and the young men play this game. The bowl is lifted with one si Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. ill, p. 377. e2 Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. II, pp. 71, 72. 63 Domenech, Vol. n, p. 191; First Annual Report of Bureau of Ethnology, Smithsonian, 1881, p. 195. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 15 114 INDIAN GAMES. hand and rudely pushed down to its place. The plum stones fly over several times. The stake is first put up by all who wish to play. A dozen can play at once if desirable. Schoolcraft64 describes still another form of the game which he found among the Chippewas, in which thirteen pieces or dice were used. Nine of them were of bone and were fashioned in figures typifying fish, serpents, etc. One side of each was painted red and had dots burned in with a hot iron. The brass pieces were circular having one side convex and the other concave. The convex side was bright, the concave dark or dull. The red pieces were the winning pieces and each had an arithmetical value. Any number of players might play. A wooden bowl, curiously carved and ornamented, was used. This form of the game may have been modified by contact with the whites. It seems to be the most complex65 form in which the game appears. The fact still remains however, that in some form or other we find the game in use across the entire breadth of the continent.66 STRAW OR INDIAN CARDS. The third game mentioned by Father Brebeuf was that which was called straw. We have seen that the first of these games called for strength, agility and endurance. It was as free from elements of chance as any human contest e* Vol. II, p. 72. 66 See also a simpler form of the game described by Philander Prescott among the Dacotas.— Schoolcraft, Vol. iv, p. 64. The tendency of the modern Indians to elaborate the game maybe traced in the description of "Plnmstone shooting" given in " Omaha Sociology" by Rev. J. Owen Dorsey. Third Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Wash- ington, 1884, p. 335. 06 Col. James Smith describes the game among the Wyandots. An Account of the Remarkable Occurrences in the Life and Travels of Col. James Smith, during his Captivity with the Indians in the Years 1755-1759. Cincinnati, 1870, p. '46. Tanner also describes it. He calls it Beg-ga-sah or dice. Tanner's Narrative, New York, 1830, p. 114. INDIAN f J AMES. 11 T> can be. The victory belonged to the side which counted amongst its numbers those players who were the fleetest runners, the most skilful throwers and the most adroit dodg- ers. The second was purely a game of chance. If hon- estly played no other element entered into its composition. The third which we are now about to consider was much more complicated in its rules than either of theothers. It closely resembled in some respects several of our modern gambling games. The French found it very difficult to comprehend and hence the accounts of it which they have given are often confused and perplexing. Boucher67 says, "Our French people have not yet been able to learn to play it well ; it is full of spirit and these straws are to the Indians what cards are to us." Lafitau68 after quoting from Boucher says, "Baron de la Hontan also made out of it a game purely of the mind and of calculation, in which he who best knows how to add and subtract, to multiply and divide with these straws will surely win. To do this, use and practice are necessary, for these savages are noth- ing less than good calculators." " Sieur Perrot, who was a celebrated traveller, and that European whom the savages of New France have most honored, left a description of this game in his manuscript Memorial. I would gladly have inserted it here but it is so obscure that it is nearly unintelligible." Charlevoix ad- mits that he could understand nothing of the game, ex- cept as played by two persons in its simplest form and adds that he was told that " there was as much of art as of chance in the game and that the Indians are great cheats at it. "69 67 p. 57. es vol. II, p. 351. *«9 Charlevoix, Vol. in, p. 319; Father Tailh an who edited Perrot says he has not been any more successful than his predecessors and the game of straws re- mains to him au unsolved enigma. Perrot, Notes to Ch. x, p. 188. 116 INDIAN GAMES. Where Lafitau and Charlevoix, aided by opportunities to investigate the game itself, have failed, it would seem to be useless for us to attempt. Perrot has indeed succeeded in making his account hopelessly involved. There is however much information to be derived from it and the obscure points are after all unimportant unless one should actually wish to reproduce the game in practice. In that event there are many points connected with the counts which would prove troublesome. To play the game, a number of straws or reeds uniform in size and of equal length were required. They were generally from six to ten inches long. The number used in the game was arbitrary. Lawson puts it at fifty-one. Charlevoix at two hundred and one. The only essential points were that the numbers should be odd and that there should be enough of them so that when the pile was divid- ed into two parts, a glance would not reveal which of the two divisions contained the odd number of straws. In its simplest form, the game consisted, in separating the heap of straws into two parts, one of which each player took, and he whose pile contained the odd number of straws was the winner. Before the division was made the straws were subjected to a manipulation, somewhat after the man- ner of shuffling cards. They were then placed upon the deer-skin or upon whatever other article was selected as a surface on which to play. The player who was to make the division into two heaps, with many contortions of the body and throwing about of the arms, and with constant utter- ances to propitiate his good luck, would make a division of the straws with a pointed bone or some similar instru- ment, himself taking one of the divisions while his adver- sary took the other. They would then rapidly separate the straws into parcels numbering ten each and determine from the fractional remainders, who had the odd number. INDIAN GAMES. 117 The speed with which this process of counting was car- ried on was always a source of wonder to the lookers-on, and the fact that the counting was done by tens is almost invariably mentioned. Between two people betting simply on the odd number no further rules were necessary. To determine which had the heap containing the odd number, there was no need to foot up the total number of tens. It was to be settled by what was left over after the last pile of complete tens was set aside. The number itself might be either one, three, five, seven or nine. In the more compli- cated form of the game, this led to giving different values to these numbers, the nine being always supreme and the one on which the highest bets were wagered. It was gen- erally understood that the holder of this number swept the board taking all bets on other numbers as well as those on the nine. It was easy to bet beads against beads and skins against skins, in a simple game of odd or even, but when the element of different values for different combinations was introduced, some medium of exchange was needed to relieve the complications. Stones of fruit were employed just as chips or counters are used in modern gambling games, and a regular bank was practically instituted. Each player took a certain number of these counters, as the equivalent of the value of the merchandise which he proposed to hazard on the game, whether it was a gun, a blauket, or some other article. Here we have all the machinery of a regular gambling game at cards, but the resemblance does not stop here. The players put up their bets precisely as they now do in a game of faro, selecting their favorite number and fixing the amount, measured in the standard of the game, which they wished to hazard. " By the side of the straws which are on the ground are found the {grains) counters," says Perrot, " which the players have bet on the game." In another place, the 118 INDIAN GAMES. method of indicating the bets is stated as follows: "he (meaning apparently the one who has bet) is also obliged to make two other heaps. In one he will place five, in the other seven straws, with as many {grains) counters as he pleases." These phrases may fairly be interpreted to mean that a record of the bets, somewhat of the same style as that kept with counters upon a faro table, was constantly before the players. Complicated rules determined when the players won or lost ; when the bets were to be doubled and when they were to abide the chance of another count. The loser at the game, even after all that he had with him was gone, was sometimes permitted to continue the game on his promise to pay. If ill luck still pursued him the winner could refuse him credit and decline to play for stakes that he could not see. The game often lasted for several days, one after an- other of the sides relieving his comrades at the play until one of the two sides had lost everything, it being, says Perrot,70 "a maxim of the savages not to quit play until one side or the other had lost everything." Those who had bet at the game had the right to substitute any person whom they pleased to play for them. "Should any dis- pute arise on this point," says Perrot, "between the winners and the losers, the disputants backed by their re- spective sides would probably come to blows, blood would be shed and the whole thing would be very difficult to settle." Cheating often took place at this game. Its ex- posure was considered praiseworthy and its practice de- nounced. If doubts were expressed as to the accuracy of a count, the matter was peacefully adjusted by a re-count by two of the spectators. " This game of straw," says Perrot, from whose ac- 1>. 4«J. INDIAN GAMES. 119 count we have made the foregoing digest, M is ordinarily held in the cabins of the chiefs, which are large, and are, so to speak, the Academy of the Savages." He concludes his account with the statement that the women never play it.71 The authority on this game whom Ogilby quotes slides over the difficulties of the description with the state- ment that " many other whimsies be in this game which would be too long to commit to paper." Abbe Ferland72 epitomizes the results of his investigation of this game as follows : " Memory, calculation and quickness of eye- sight were necessary for success." Like the game of dice or platter it was essentially a house game, and like platter it is rarely mentioned by writers who describe the habits of Indians in the south. Lawson describes it, but in slightly modified form, as fol- lows : " Indian Cards. Their chiefest game is a sort of Arithmetick, which is managed by a parcel of small split reeds, the thickness of a small Bent ; these are made very nicely, so that they part, and are tractable in their hands. They are fifty-one in number, their length about seven inches ; when they play, they throw part of them to their antagonist; the art is, to discover, upon sight, how many you have, and what you throw to him that plays with you. Some are so expert at their numbers, that they will tell ten times together, what they throw out of their hands. Although the whole play is carried on with the quickest motion it is possible to use, yet some are so expert at this Game, as to win great Indian Estates by this Play. A good sett of these reeds, fit to play withal are valued and sold for a dressed doe-skin." A. W. Chase73 speaks of " native games of cards ™ See also Shea's Hennepin , p. 300. ?2 vol. I, p. 134. "Overland Monthly, Vol. II, p. 433. Dorsey found a survival of the game in use among the Omahas. He called it "stick counting." Third Annual Report, Bureau of Ethnology, p. 3o8. 120 INDIAN GAMES. among the Coquelles and Makneatanas, the pasteboards being bundles of sticks." He furnishes no description of the games, but uses the same phrase which was applied by Lawson in North Carolina and by Boucher in Canada. Frank H. Gushing74 speaks of a game of " Cane-cards " among the Zuni which he says "would grace the most civilized society with a refined source of amusement." He was not able fully to comprehend it. In the list of games, there is none of which we have any detailed account, which compares with straws as played by the northern tribes, in elaborateness of con- struction. The unfortunate confusion which prevails throughout Perrot's description of the method of counting, and the way in which the point was shirked by all other writers on the subject, prevents any attempt at analysis. So far as we can see, the rules were arbitrary and not based upon any calculations of the laws of chance. If some other detailed account of the game should be discov- ered it would be interesting to follow up this question and ascertain how far the different combinations which affected the counts were based upon a theory of probabili- ties and how far they were arbitrary. It will of course be noticed that the game described by Lawson was relieved from much of this complication. The dexterity required to make a throw of such a nature that the player could tell exactly the number of reeds with which he had parted, was of course remarkable and naturally called forth expressions of surprise. But there were apparently no other combinations resting upon the throw than the simple guess at the number thrown. Trav- ellers in California have described the game in still sim- pler form in which we see hints of the more complex 74 The Century, Vol. xxvTl, p. 38. My Adventures in Zuni. INDIAN GAMES. 121 game. Here the " sticks" were thrown in the air and an immediate guess was made whether the number thrown was odd or even. An umpire kept the account with other sticks and on this count the bets were adjusted.75 Wherever we find it and whatever the form in use, whether simple or complicated, like games of lacrosse and platter the occasion of its play was but an excuse for in- dulgence in the inveterate spirit of gambling which every- where prevailed. CHUNKEE OR HOOP AND POLE. Among the Indians at the south, observers noted and described a game of great antiquity, of which we have no record during historical times among those of the north, unless we should classify the game of javelin described by Morgan76 as a modified form of the same game. The gen- eral name by which this game was known was chunkee. When Iberville arrived at the mouth of the Mississippi he despatched a party to explore the river. The officer who kept the "Journal de la fregate, le Marin" was one of that party and he recorded the fact that the Bayagoulas and Mougoulachas passed the greater part of their time in playing in this place with great sticks which they throw after a little stone, which is nearly round and like a bul- let.77 Father Gravier descended the river in 1700 and at the village of Houmas he saw a "fine level square where from morning to night there are young men who exercise 7BKotzebue, A Voyage of Discovery, etc. London, 1821. Vol. I, p. 282 and Vol. in, p. U, note. W. H. Emory, U. S. and Mexican Boundary Survey, Vol. I, p. Ill, says: ''The Yumas played a game with sticks like jackstraws." Stanley, Smith- sonian Miscellaneous Collections, Vol. n, p. 55, gives among his "Portraits of North American Indians," a picture of a game which he describes as •• played ex- clusively by women. They hold in their hands twelve sticks about six inches in length which they drop upon a rock. The sticks that fall across each other are counted lor game." 76 League of the Iroquois, p. 300. "Margry, Decouvertes, etc., Vol. i, p. 261. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 16 122 INDIAN GAMES. themselves in running after a flat stone which they throw in the air from one end of the square to the other, and which they try to have fall on two cylinders that they roll where they think the stone will fall."78 Adair gives the following description of the same game : "The warriors have another favorite game, called *chungke\ which, with propriety of language may be called 'Running hard labour.' They have near their state house79 a square piece of ground well cleaned, and fine sand is carefully strewed over it, when requisite, to promote a swifter motion to what they throw along the surface. Only one or two on a side play at this ancient game. They have a stone about two fingers broad at the edge and two spans round ; each party has a pole of about eight feet long, smooth, and tapering at each end, the points flat. They set off abreast of each other at six yards from the end of the playground ; then one of them hurls the stone on its edge, in as direct a line as he can, a considerable distance toward the middle of the other end of the square. When they have run a few yards, each darts his pole anointed with bears' oil, with a proper force, as near as he can guess in proportion to the motion of the stone, that the end may lie close to the stone. "When this is the case, the person counts two of the game, and, in pro- portion to the nearness of the poles to the mark, one is counted, unless by measuring, both are found to be at an equal distance from the stone. In this manner, the play- ers will keep running most part of the day, at half speed, under the violent heat of the sun, staking their silver or- naments, their nose-, finger- and ear-rings ; their breast-, arm- and wrist-plates, and even all their wearing apparel, except that which barely covers their middle. All the 7» Shea's Early Voyages, Albany, 1861, p. 143. ''•' Consult E. G. Squier.— Aboriginal Monuments of N. Y., Smithsonian Contri- butions to Knowledge, Vol. II, pp. 135-6 and note p. 136. INDIAN GAMES. 123 American Indians are much addicted to this game, which to us appears to be a task of stupid drudgery ; it seems, however, to be of early origin, when their forefathers used diversions as simple as their manners. The hurling stones they use at present were from time immemorial rubbed smooth on the rocks and with prodigious labor ; and they are kept with the strictest religious care, from one genera- tion to another, and are exempted from being buried with the dead. They belong to the town where they are used, and are carefully preserved."80 Lieut. Timberlake81 describes the game as he saw it played among the Cherokees where it was known by the name of "Nettecawaw." "Each player has a pole about ten feet long, with several marks or divisions. One of them bowls a round stone with one flat side, and the other convex, on which the players all dart their poles after it, and the nearest counts according to the vicinity of the bowl to the marks on his pole. " Romans saw it among the Choctaws. He says, "The manner of playing the game is thus : they make an alley of about two hundred feet in length, where a very smooth clayey ground is laid, which when dry is very hard : they play two together having each a straight pole about fifteen feet long ; one holds a stone which is in the shape of a truck, which he throws before him over this alley, and the instant of its departure, they set off and run ; in running they cast their poles after the stone ; he that did not throw it endeavors to hit it ; the other strives to strike the pole of his antagonist in its flight so as to prevent the pole of his opponent hitting the stone. If the first should strike the stone he counts one for it, and if the other by the 80 See also Historical Collections, Louisiana and Florida. B. F. French [Vol. n,], second series, p. 74. New York, 1875. 81 Memoirs of Lieut. Henry Timberlake, etc., London, 17(55, p. 77. 124 INDIAN GAMES. dexterity of his cast should prevent the pole of his oppo- nent hitting the stone, he counts one, but should both miss their aim the throw is renewed." Le Page du Pratz82 describes the game as practised among the Natchez. He calls it "Ze Jeu de la Per die which would be better named de la crosse" Dumont who was stationed at Natchez and also on the Yazoo, describes the game and speaks of it as "La Crosse."83 Adair is correct when he speaks of the antiquity of this game. When he dwells upon the fact that these stones are handed down from generation to generation, as the prop- erty of the village, he brings these tribes close to the mound dwellers. Squier,84 speaking of discoidal stones, found in the mounds, says, "It is known that among the Indian tribes of the Ohio and along the Gulf, such stones were in common use in certain favorite games." Lucien Carr85 describes and pictures a chunkee stone from Ely Mound, Va. Lewis and Clarke86 describe the game as played among the Mandans. This tribe had a wooden platform prepared on the ground between two of their lodges. Along this platform the stone ring was rolled and the sticks were slid along the floor in pursuit of it. Catlin87 describes the game as played by the same tribe. They had a carefully prepared pavement of clay on which they played. The "Tchunkee" sticks were marked with bits of leather and the counts of the game were affected by the position of the leather on or near which the ring lodged. B2 Histoive de la Louisiane, Paris, 1758, Vol. ill, p. 2. 83 Memoires Historiques sur la Louisiane, Paris, 1753, Vol. I, p. 202. 84 Ancient Monuments of the Mississippi Valley, p. 223. 8610th Annual Report Peabody Museum, p. 93. See also Schoolcraft's Indian tribes, Vol. i, p. 83. BCLewis and Clarke's Expedition, Phila., 1814, Vol. I, p. 143. 87 Vol. I, p. 132 et seq. Dorsey describes two forms of the game in use among theOmahas: "shooting at the rolling wheel "and "stick and ring." Third An- nual Report, Bureau of Ethnology, pp. 335-336. cf. Travels in the Interior of America, in the years 1809, 1S10 and 1S11, by John Bradbury, p. 126. INDIAN GAMES. 125 The Mojaves are accustomed to play a similar game which has been described under the name "Hoop and Pole".88 A similar game was played by the Navajoes.89 The Yumas played a game with two poles fifteen feet long and a ring a few inches in diameter.90 Kane91 says that the Chualpays at Fort Colville on the Columbia "have a game which they call 'AMcollocJc,' which requires consid- erable skill. A smooth, level piece of ground is chosen, and a slight barrier of a couple of sticks placed length- wise is laid at each end of the chosen spot, being irom forty to fifty feet apart and only a few inches high. The two players, stripped naked, are armed with a very slight spear, about three feet long, and finely pointed with bone ; one of them takes a ring made of bone or some heavy wood and wound with cord. The ring is about three inches in diameter, on the inner circumference of which are fastened six beads of different colors, at equal dis- tances, to each of which a separate value is attached. The ring is then rolled along the ground to one of the barriers and is followed at the distance of two or three yards by the players, and as the ring strikes the barrier and is falling on its side, the spears are thrown, so that the ring may fall on them. If any one of the spears should be covered by the ring, the owner counts according to the colored bead on it. But it generally happens from the dexterity of the players that the ring covers both spears and each counts according to the color of the beads above his Spear. They then play towards the other 88 Lieut. A. W. Whipple in Pac. R. R. Rep., Vol. in, p. 114 ; Harper's Mag., Vol. XVII, p. 463; Domenech, Vol. n, p. 197; H. H. Bancroft's Native Races, Vol. I, p. 393, p. 517 and note 133. The Martial Experiences of the California Volunteers by Edward Carlsen, Overland, Vol. vn, No. 41, 2nd Series, p. 494. 89 Major E. A. Backus in Schoolcraft, Vol. IV, p. 214. 90W. H. Emory, U. S. and Mexican Boundary Survey, Vol. I, p. 111. S1 Kane's Wanderings, p. 310; H. H. Bancroft's Native Races, Vol. I, p. 2S0. 126 INDIAN GAMES. barrier, and so on until one party has obtained the number agreed upon for the game." In his "Life among the Apaches,"92 Colonel Crernony describes the hoop and pole game as played by the Ap- aches. With them the pole is marked with divisions throughout its whole length and these divisions are stained different colors. The object of the game is to make the hoop fall upon the pole as near the butt as possible, grad- uated values being applied to the different divisions of the pole. The women are not permitted to approach within a hundred yards while the game is going on.93 Those who have described this game in the various forms in which it has been presented dwell upon the fact that it taxed the strength, activity and skill of the play- ers. In this respect it rivalled lacrosse. In geographi- cal range the territory in which it was domesticated was nearly the same. There are many, doubtless, who would decline to rec- ognize the discoidal stones of the mounds as chunkee stones, but it can not be denied that the " nettecawaw" of the Cherokees94, the "hoop and pole" of the Mojaves and Apaches95, the second form of " spear and ring" de- scribed by Domenech,96 the " alkoMock" of the Chualpays97 and the chunkee of Romans and Adair are the same game. 02 Life among the Apaches, by John C. Crernony, p. 302. 93 The Hawaiians were accustomed to hurl a piece of hard lava along narrow trenches prepared for the purpose. The stone which was called Maika closely resembled a chunkee stone. It is described as being in the shape of a small wheel or roller, three inches in diameter and an inch and a half thick, very smooth and highly polished. This game appears to have been limited to a contest of skill in rolling or hurling the stone itself. The additional interest which was given by hurling the spears at it while in motion was wanting. Narrative of the U. S. Exploring Expedition by Charles Wilkes, London, 1845, Vol. iv, p. 55. '•'♦Timberlake, p. 77. °' Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., Vol. in, p. 114; Crernony, p. 302; Harper's Mag., Vol. xvn, p. 4G3. 90 Domenech, Vol. II, p. 197. °7 Kane's Wanderings, p. 310. INDIAN GAMES. 127 The change from the discoidal stone to the ring ; the different materials of which the ring is made, whether of stone,98 of bone," of wood,100 or of cord ;101 whether wound with cord102 or plain; the" different lengths of the spears varying from three feet103 to ten feet104 and even reaching fifteen feet in length among the Mojaves ;105 the different markings of the spear106 and the ring ;107 the different ways of preparing the ground, whether tamping with clay,108 or flooring with timber,109 or simply removing the vegetation,110 — all these minor differences are of little consequence. The striking fact remains that this great number of tribes, so widely separated, all played a game in which the prin- cipal requirements were, that a small circular disk should be rolled rapidly along a prepared surface and that pre- pared wooden implements, similar to spears, should be launched at the disk while in motion or just at the time wnen it stopped. Like lacrosse, it was made use of as an opportunity for gambling, but owing to the restriction of the ground on which it could be played, the number of players were limited, and to that extent the interest in the contests and the excitement attendant upon them were proportionally reduced. OTHER ATHLETIC GAMES. In addition to the games of lacrosse, platter or dice, straws and chunkee, there were other games, some of an athletic nature, some purely of chance, which observers have described, some of which, are mentioned only in »8 Lewis and Clarke, Vol.i, p. 143; Catlin, Vol. I, p. 132. 89 Kane's Wanderings, p. 310. 10° Cremony, p. 302. ^ Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., Vol. in, p. 114. ^Kane's Wanderings, p. 310. 103 Ibid. 10* Tiraberlake, p. 77; Cremony, p. 302. l°o Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., Vol. ill, p. 114. 1Q6 Cremony, p. 302; Domenech, Vol. n, p. 197; Timberlake, p. 77. i" Kane's Wanderings, p. 310. 10s Catlin, Vol. I, p. 132. i°9 Lewis and Clarke, Vol. I, p. 143. «° Domenech, Vol. n, p. 197. 128 INDIAN GAMES. limited areas, while others, like the games above men- tioned, were played by Indians scattered over a wide ter- ritory and apparently having but little in common. Some of these games were but modified forms of those which have been already described. Such, for instance, is a game of ball which is described by Lafitau111 and by Charle- voix.112 This closely resembled lacrosse in its general methods of play, but as no rackets were used, it was less dangerous and less exciting. Goals were erected at each end of the field, separated by five hundred paces accord- ing to Lafitau. The players were divided into sides. The ball was tossed into the air in the centre of the field. When it came down the players of each side strove to catch it. He who was successful ran in the direction of the jroal which he wished to reach. The plavers of the opposide side pursued him and did what they could to prevent him from accomplishing his object. When it was evident that the runner could gain no more ground, he would pass the ball, if possible, to some player upon the same side and his success in accomplishing this was de- pendent largely upon his skill. The game is probably not so old as lacrosse, for the ball is described as being larger and softer than the one used in lacrosse, thus indi- cating that it belonged to the period when the stuffed deer-skin ball was used in that game. Both Dumont and Le Page du Pratz describe this game with this difference,113 that the ball, according to their descriptions, was incessantly tossed in the air. Romans says that this game was played among the Avomen ; and Lafitau, who describes it separately, adds that in this form it was only played by girls. He also says that the Abena- kis indulged in a similar game, using an inflated bladder 111 Lafitau, Vol. II, p. 353. 112 Cliailevoix, Vol. Hi, p. 319. "3 Dumont, Vol. I, p. 201; LePage, Vol. I, p. 378. INDIAN GAMES. 129 for a ball ; and that the Florida Indians fixed a willow cage upon a pole in such a way that it could revolve and tried to hit it with a ball so as to make it turn several times.114 Joutel in his historical journal describes a curious game as follows : " Taking a short stick, very smooth and greased that it may be the harder to hold it fast, one of the elders throws it as far as he can. The young men run after it, snatch it from each other, and at last, he who remains possessed of it has the first lot."115 Football is found at the north. Ogilby11G says : " Their goals are a mile long placed on the sands, which are as even as a board ; their ball is no bigger than a hand ball, which sometimes they mount in the air with their naked feet, sometimes it is swayed by the multitude, sometimes also it is two days before they get a goal, then they mark the ground they win, and begin there the next day. Before they come to this sport they paint themselves, even as when they go to war." At the south it was " likewise a favorite manly diversion with them."117 Certain forms of ball-play which were neither lacrosse nor chunkee, but which resembled these games were found in different localities. Such for instance is the game which Catlin118 saw played by the Sioux women. Two balls were connected with a string a foot and a half long. Each woman was armed with a stick. They were divided into equal sides. Goals were erected and the play was in some respects like lacrosse. Stakes were wagered on the game. This game is also described by Domenech,119 who says the women wore a special costume which left the limbs free and that 114 Lafitau, Vol. n, p. 358. 115 French's Historical Collections of Louisiana, Vol. I, p. 188; Sauford's His- tory of the United States before the Revolution, p. clxxxii. 116 Ogilby, Book n, Chap, n, p. 156. See also Smith's Narrative, p. 77. "7 Bartram, p. 509. "8 Vol.il, p. 116. "9 Vol.il, p. 196. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN VOL. XVII 17 130 INDIAN GAMES. the game was "unbecoming and indecent." Powers120 found a game among the Nishinams, on the western slope of the Sierra Nevada, not far from Sacramento, which in some respects also resembled lacrosse. He says " The 'Ti'-Jcel ' is the only really robust and athletic game they use, and is played by a large company of men and boys. The piece121 is made of raw-hide or nowadays of strong cloth, and is shaped like a small dumb-bell. It is laid in the centre of a wide, level space of ground, in a furrow, hollowed out a few inches in depth. Two parallel lines are drawn equidistant from it, a few paces apart, and along these lines the opposing parties, equal in strength, range themselves. Each player is equipped with a slight, strong staff, from four to six feet long. The two cham- pions of the party take their stations on opposite sides of the piece, which is thrown into the air, caught on the staff of one of the others, and hurled by him in the direction of his antagonist's goal. With this send-off there ensues a wild chase and a hustle, pell-mell, higgledy-piggledy, each party striving to bowl the piece over the other's goal. These goals are several hundred yards apart. In an article in the Overland Monthly, 122 A. W. Chase describes a game in vogue among the Oregon Indians which he says was identical with hockey, as follows : "Sides being chosen, each endeavors to drive a hard ball of pine wood around a stake and in different directions ; stripped to the buff, they display great activity and strength, whack- ing away at each other's shins, if they are in the way, with a refreshing disregard of bruises. The squaws assist in the performance by beating drums and keeping up a monoto- nous chant." 120 Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. in, p. 333. i-1 Tiie equivalent in the game, of the ball in lacrosse. *22 Vol. n, p. 433. See also Smith's Narrative, p. 77 INDIAN GAMES. 131 In the first of the two games of "spear and ring," de- scribed by Domenech, 123 the players are divided into sides. The stone ring, about three inches in diameter, is fixed upright on the chosen ground, and players two at a time, one from each side, endeavor to throw their spears through the ring. The spears are marked along their length with little shields or bits of leather, and the count is affected by the number of these that pass through the ring. He also mentions a game124 among the Natchez in which the ring was a " huge stone" and the spear a "stick of the shape of a bat." If we classify Domenech's first game of "spear and ring " among those which resemble chunkee, rather than as a form of chunkee itself, we shall probably be com- pelled to pursue the same course with Morgan's game of "javelin" to which we have already alluded.125 In this game the players divided into sides. Each player had an agreed number of javelins. The ring, which was either a hoop or made solid like a wheel by winding with splints, was about eight inches in diameter. The players on one side were arranged in a line and the hoop was rolled before them. They hurled their javelins. The count of the game was kept by a forfeiture of javelins. Such as hit the mark were safe, but the javelins which did not hit were passed to the players of the other side who then had an opportunity to throw them at the hoop from the same spot. If these players were successful the javelins were forfeited and laid out of the play. If, however, they in turn failed the javelins were returned to their original owners. The hoop was then rolled by the other side and the process continued until one of the sides had forfeited all their javelins. 12s Vol. II, pp. 197-8. 124 He does not give his authority for this game. He has evidently copied in his book from other writers, but seldom indicates whether his descriptions are based upon personal observation or quoted. 125 League of the Iroquois, p. 300. 132 INDIAN GAMES. OTHER GAMES OF CHANCE. There was diversity in the forms of the games of simple chance as well as in the athletic games, and besides those which have been already described, the Indians on the Pa- cific Coast had a great variety of games, or forms of the same game, in which, in addition to the element of chance in- volved in determining the numbers or positions of certain sticks or counters, there was also an opportunity for the player who was manipulating them to deceive by dexter- ous sleight of hand. The simplest form in which this is found is guessing in which hand a small stone or bone is held. It would hardly seem that this artless effort could be transformed into an amusing and exciting game ; yet it has attracted the attention of all travellers, and scarcely any writer, who treats of the habits of the Pacific coast In- dian, fails to give a full account of this simple game. Lewis and Clarke,126 when writing about the Indians near the mouth of the Columbia, say : "The games are of two kinds. In the first, one of the company assumes the office of banker and plays against the rest. He takes a small stone, about the size of a bean, which he shifts from one hand to another with great dexterity, repeating at the same time a song adapted to the game and which serves to divert the attention of the company, till having agreed on the stakes, he holds out his hands, and the antagonist wins or loses as he succeeds or fails at guessing in which hand the stone is. After the banker has lost his money or whenever he is tired, the stone is transferred to another, who in turn challenges the rest of the company.127 In the »G Lewis and Clarke, Vol. II, 140; and also II, 04. 127 See also, Adventures on the Columbia River, by Ross Cox, p. 158; The Ore- gon Territory, by John Dunn, p. 93 ; Four Years in British Columbia, by Command- er R. C Mayne, p. 275; it was played by the Comanches in Texas with a bullet, Robert S. Neighbors in Schoolcraft, Vol. n, p. 133; by the T wan as with one or two bones, Bulletin U. S. Geol. Survey, Vol. ill, No. 1, p. 89, Rev. M. Eels. INDIAN GAMES. 133 account given by George Gibbs128 the count of the game among the tribes of western Washington and northwest- ern Oregon, was kept by means of sticks. Each side took five or ten small sticks, one of which was passed to the winner on each guess, and the game was ended when the pile of one side was exhausted. According to him, "The backers of the party manipulating keep up a con- stant drumming with sticks on their paddles which lie before them, singing an incantation to attract good fortune." Powers describes another form into which the game devel- oped among the Indians of central California. It is "played with a bit of wood or a pebble which is shaken in the hand, and then the hand closed upon it. The oppo- nent guesses which finger (a thumb is a finger with them) it is under and scores one if he hits, or the other scores if he misses. They keep tally with eight counters."129 Schwatka, in his recent exploration of the Yukon found this game among the Chilkats. It was called la-hell. Two bones were used. One was the king and one the queen. His packers gambled in guessing at the bones every after- noon and evening after reaching camp.130 The simplicity of the game was modified by the intro- duction of similar articles in each hand, the question to be decided being in which hand one of them having a speci- fied mark should be found. Kane131 thus describes such a game among the Chinooks : "Their games are few. The one most generally played amongst them consists in hold- ing in each hand a small stick, the thickness of a goose quill, and about an inch and one-half in length, one plain, the other distinguished by a little thread wound round 128 Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. I, p. 206. 129 Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. in, pp. 332-3. 130 Along Alaska's Great River. By Frederic Schwatka, p. 71. 131 Kane's Wanderings, p. 1?9. • 134 INDIAN GAMES. it, the opposite party being required to guess in which hand the marked stick is to be found. A Chinook will play at this simple game for days and nights together, until he has gambled away everything he possesses, even to his wife."152 Among the Utahs this form of the game was common : "A row of players consisting of five or six or a dozen men is arranged on either side of the tent facing each other. Before each man is placed a bundle of small twigs or sticks each six or eight inches in length and pointed at one end. Every tete-a-tete couple is provided with two cylindrical bone dice carefully fashioned and highly polished which measure about two inches in length and half an inch in di- ameter, one being white and the other black, or sometimes ornamented with a black band." At the rear, musicians were seated who during the game beat upon rude drums.133 In this game it will be noticed that the players paired off and apparently each man played for himself. Still another element is introduced in another form of the game, which increases the opportunity afforded the one who manipulates the bones for dexterity. This form of the game is repeatedly alluded to by Powers. While relat- ing the habits and customs of the Grualala, whose homes were near Fort Ross, he describes what he calls the gam- bling game of "wi and tep" and says that one description with slight variations will answer for nearly all the tribes of central and southern California. After describing the mak- ing up of the pool of stakes, he adds : "They gamble with four cylinders of bone about two inches long, two of which are plain, and two marked with rings and strings tied round the middle. The game is conducted by four old and ex- 132 See also, Overland, Vol. IX, p. 163, Powers; H. H. Bancroft's Native Races, Vol. I, p. 244; Clay balls are sometimes used, Ibid, Vol. I, p. 353; The Northwest Coast, James G. Swan, p. 158; Montana as it is, Granville Stuart, p. 71. 183 Edwin R. Barker in the American Naturalist, June, 1S77, Vol. xi, p. 551. INDIAN GAMES. 135 periencedmen, frequently grey heads, two for each party, squatting on their knees on opposite sides of the fire. They have before them a quantity of fine dry grass, and with their hands in rapid and juggling motions before and be- hind them, they roll up each piece of bone in a little ball and the opposite party presently guess in which hand is the marked bone. Generally only one guesses at a time, which he does with the word Hep' (marked one), and *wi' (plain one). If he guesses right for both players, they simply toss the bones over to him and his partner, and nothing is scored on either side. If he guesses right for one and wrong for the other, the one for whom he guessed right is rout', but his partner rolls up the bones for an- other trial, and the guesser forfeits to them one of his twelve counters. If he guesses wrong for both, they still keep on and he forfeits two counters. There are only twelve counters and when they have been all won over to one side or the other, the game is ended."134 Sometimes the same game was played without going through the for- mality of wrapping the pieces in grass, simply shaking them in the hands as a preliminary for the guessing.135 A slightly different method prevails among the Indians of Washington and northwestern Oregon. Ten disks of hard wood, each about the diameter of a Mexican dollar and somewhat thicker, are used. "One of these is marked and called the chief. A smooth mat is spread on the ground, at the ends of which the opposing players are seated, their friends on either side, who are provided with the requisites for a noise as in the other case. The party holding the disks has a bundle of the fibres of the cedar 154 Powers in Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. in, pp. 90-152; 189-332. 135 Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. ill, 332 ; Alexander Ross's Adventures, pp. 308, 309. 136 INDIAN GAMES. bark, in which he envelops them, and after rolling them about, tears the bundle into two* parts, his opponent guess- ing in which bundle the chief lies."136 The same game is described by Kane, except that the counters, instead of be- ing wrapped in one bundle which is afterward torn in two, are originally wrapped in two bundles.137 Still another complication of the guessing game was de- scribed by Mayne.138 Blankets were spread upon the ground on which sawdust was spread about an inch thick. In this was placed the counter, a piece of bone or iron about the size of a half a crown, and one of the players shuffled it about, the others in turn guessing where it was. The game of "moccasin" was but a modification of this game. As described by Philander Prescott three mocca- sins were used in this game by the Dacotas. The bone or stick was slipped from one to another of the moccasins by the manipulators, and the others had to guess in which moccasin it was to be found. Simple as this description seems, the men would divide into sides, playing against each other, and accompanying the game with singing.139 Among the Zunis, the guessing game was exalted to the nature of a sacred festival. Frank H. Cushing140 gives the following account of its practice. "One morning the two chief priests of the bow climbed to the top of the houses, and just at sunrise called out a 'prayer message' from the mount-environed gods. Eight players went into a kli- wi-tain to fast, and four days later issued forth, bearing four large wooden tubes, a ball of stone, and a bundle of thirty-six counting straws. With great ceremony, many iso Contributions to North American Ethnology, Gibbs, Vol. I, p. 20G. 137Kane's Wanderings, p. 189; Swan's Northwest Coast, p. 157; Eels in Bulletin U. S. G. Surv., Vol. in, No. 1. »n Mayne's British Columbia, p. 275. 13» Schoolcraft, Vol. iv, p. (54; Domenech, Vol. n, p. 192. l*»The Century, Vol. XXVI, p. 37. INDIAN GAMES. 137 prayers and incantations, the tubes were deposited on two mock mountains of sand, either side of the 'grand plaza.' A crowd began to gather. Larger and noisier it grew, until it became a surging, clamorous, black mass. Grad- ually two piles of fabrics, — vessels, silver ornaments, neck- laces, embroideries, and symbols representing horses, cattle and sheep — grew to large proportions. Women gathered on the roofs around, wildly stretching forth arti- cles for betting, until one of the presiding priests called out a brief message. The crowd became silent. A booth was raised, under which two of the players retired ; and when it was removed the four tubes were standing on the mound of sand. A song and dance began. One by one three of the four opposing players were summoned to guess under which tube the ball was hidden. At each guess the cries of the opposing party became deafening, and the mock struggles approached the violence of com- bat. The last guesser found the ball ; and as he victo- riously carried the latter and the tubes across to his own mound, his side scored ten. The process was repeated. The second guesser found the ball ; his side scored fifteen setting the others back five. The counts numbered one hundred ; but so complicated were the winnings and los- ings on both sides, with each guess of either, that hour after hour the game went on, and night closed in. Fires were built in the plaza, cigarettes were lighted, but still the game continued. Noisier and noisier grew the dan- cers ; more and more insulting and defiant their songs and epithets to the opposing crowd, until they fairly gnashed their teeth at one another, but no blows. Day dawned upon the still uncertain contest ; nor was it until the sun again touched the western horizon, that the hoarse, still defiant voices died away, and the victorious party bore off their 'mountains of gifts from the gods. ' " ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII. 18 138 INDIAN GAMES. The picturesque description of Cushing brings before our eyes the guessing game in its highest form of de- velopment. Among the tribes of the East, if it had a home at all, it was practised in such an inobtrusive way as not to attract the attention of writers who have described their habits and customs. The nearest approach to it which we can find is a guessing game described by Henne- pin, as follows : "They take kernels of Indian corn or something of the kind, then they put some in one hand, and ask how many there are. The one who guesses wins." Mackenzie141 fell in with some Indians near the Pacific coast who travelled with him a short distance. They carried with them the implements for gambling. Their game was different from the guessing games which have been heretofore described. "There were two players and each had a bundle of about fifty small sticks neatly pol- ished, of the size of a quill, and five inches long. A cer- tain number of their sticks had red lines round them and as many of these as one of the players might find con- venient were curiously rolled up in dried grass, and ac- cording to the judgment of his antagonist respecting their number and marks he lost or won." The same game was seen at Queen Charlotte Islands by Francis Poole.142 He says there were in this game from "forty to fifty round pins or pieces of wood, five inches long by one-eighth of an inch thick, painted in black and blue rings and beautifully polished." These pins were divided into two heaps under cover of bark fibre and the opposite player guessed odd or even for one of the piles. CONTESTS OF SKILL. Lewis and Clarke143 describe a game among the Ore- gon Indians which can neither be called an athletic game 141 Alexander Mackenzie's Voyages in 1789 and 1793. London, 1S01, p. 311. 142 Queen Charlotte Islands, a narrative, etc., p. 325. "3 Vol. n, p. 140. INDIAN GAMES. 139 nor a game of chance, but which seems to have been a simple contest of skill. "Two pins are placed on the floor, about the distance of a foot from each other, and a small hole made behind them. The players then go about ten feet from the hole, into which they try to roll a small piece, resembling the men used at draughts ; if they succeed in putting it into the hole, they win the stake ; if the piece rolls between the pins, but does not go into the hole, nothing is won or lost ; but the wager is wholly lost if the chequer rolls outside the pins." Morgan144 describes a winter contest of skill among the Iroquois, which he calls snow-snake. The so-called snakes were made of hickory. They were from five to seven feet in length, a quarter of an inch in thickness, tapering from an inch in width at the head to about half an inch at the tail. The head was round, turned up slightly and weighted with lead. This implement was shot along the snow crust, by hand, with great speed, and a point in the game was gained by the snake which ran the greatest distance. When there were a number of players divided into sides, if there* were two, three or more snakes of the same side which were in advance of the snakes of the other side, all such counted. Such contests usually took place between tribes and aroused a great degree of spirit and the usual amount of betting. In sim- pler form, Sagard Theodat describes this kind of amuse- ment. OTHER AMUSEMENTS OF WOMEN AND CHILDREN. Under the name of " Fuseaux" La Potherie145 describes a similar winter game of the children. He further says the women only played at platter or dice. The children 144 League of the Iroquois, p. 303. 145 Vol. in, p. 24. 140 INDIAN GAMES. played at lacrosse, seldom at platter. We have seen that the women in some parts of the country joined in the la- crosse games. Sometimes they played it by themselves and sometimes they played other ball games which closely re- semble that game. Romans describes a woman's game in which they tossed up a ball which was to be caught before it reached the ground ; but in the meantime the one who tossed it had to pick up a small stick from the ground. The women of the Natchez146, according to Le Page du Pratz, played with three pieces of cane, each eight or nine inches long, flat on one side and convex on the other with engravings on the convex side. Two were held in the open palm of the left hand and the third was dropped round side down upon the ends of the two, so that all would fall to the ground. If two convex surfaces came up the player won. He also says, and in this Romans concurs, that the women were very reluctant to be seen while playing. Among the Natchez, the young girls played ball with a deer-skin ball stuffed with Spanish moss. Other than that they seemed to him to have no games.147 The young Choctaws, according to Romans, engaged in wrestling, run- ning, heaving and lifting great weights and playing ball. Hennepin says, "the children play with bows and with two sticks, one large and one small. They hold the little one in the left, and the larger one in the right hand, then with the larger one they make the smaller one fly up in the air, and another runs after it, and throws it at the one who sprang it. They also make a ball of flags or corn leaves, which they throw in the air and catch on the end of a pointed stick." m« La Tage du Pratz, Vol. m, p. 2; Domenech, Vol. n, p. 192. i*7 Le Page du Pratz, Vol. m, p. 2. INDIAN GAMES. 141 Powers148 describes a game among the children of the Nishinams which consisted in tossing bunches of clover from one to another, and another in which the boys placed themselves upon three bases and tossed a ball across from one to the other. Points were won as in base ball by run- ning bases, if possible, without being put out by the one who at the time had the ball. The Choctaw149 boys made use of a cane stalk, eight or nine feet in length, from which the obstructions at the joints had been removed, much as boys use what is called a putty blower. The Zufii children are said to play checkers with fragments of pot- tery on flat stones.150 Running matches, swimming, wrestling, the simple ball-games which are hinted at rather than described, practice in archery and hurling the spear or javelin, fur- nished the Indian youth with such amusements as could be derived outside the contests in which his elders partic- ipated. Most of these latter were so simple as to be easily understood by the very young, and we can readily comprehend how deeply the vice of gambling must have been instilled in their minds, when they saw it inaugu- rated with such solemn ceremonials and participated in with such furor by their elders. Our information concerning the habits of the Indians comes from a variety of sources. Some of it is of very recent date, especially that which deals with the Indians of the Pacific coast. The early Relations of the French Fathers were faithful, and, as a rule, intelligent records of events which the priests themselves witnessed. The accounts of the French and Indian traders and travellers 148 Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. ill p. 331. 119 Romans, p. 79; Bossu, Vol. I, p. 306. «°The Century, Vol. xxvi, p. 28, Cushing. 142 INDIAN GAMES. are neither as accurate nor as reliable as those contained in the Relations. Some of these authors faithfully re- corded what they saw ; others wrote to make books. They differ widely in value as authorities and must be judged upon their individual merits. Much of our information concerning the manners and customs of the natives of the Pacific coast is derived from the publications of our national government. The re- ports which are collated in these documents are from a great number of observers and are not uniform in character, but many of them have great value. As a whole, the work was well done and in a scientific manner. The narration of the different games tells its own story. Lacrosse is found throughout the country ; platter or dice is distributed over an area of equal extent; chun- kee was a southern and western game ; straws a north- ern game with traces of its existence in the west ; the guessing game was apparently a western game. Every- where, gambling prevailed to the most shocking extent. There are writers who seek to reduce the impressions of the extravagance indulged in by the Indians at these games. The concurrence of testimony is to the effect that there was no limit to which they Avould not go. Their last blanket or bead, the clothing on their backs, their wives and children, their own liberty were sometimes hazarded ; and if the chances of the game went against them the penalty was paid with unflinching firmness. The delivery of the wagered wives, Lescarbot tells us, was not always accomplished with ease, but the attempt would be faithfully made and probably wTas often successful. Self-contained as these people ordinarily were, it is not a matter of surprise that the weaker among them should have been led to these lengths of extravagance, under the high INDIAN GAMES. 143 pressure of excitement which was deliberately maintained during the progress of their games.151 From one end of the land to the other these scenes were ushered in with ceremonies calculated to increase their importance and to awaken the interest of the spectators. The methods used were the same among the confederations of the north and of the south ; among the wandering tribes of the interior ; among the dwellers in the Pueblos ; and among the slothful natives of the Pacific coast. The scene described by Cushing, where, at the sum- mons of the " prayer-message," the Zimis gathered upon the house-tops and swarmed in the Plaza, to hazard their property, amid prayers and incantations, upon a guess under which tube the ball was concealed, is widely dif- ferent from that depicted by the Jesuit Fathers in Canada, where the swarthy Hurons assembled in the Council House at the call of the medicine man and in the presence of the sick man, wagered their beads and skins, upon the 151 The following extracts will illustrate these points : They will bet all they have, even to their wives. It is true, however, that the delivery of the wagered women is not easy. They mock the winners and point their fingers at them (Lescarbot, Vol. ill, p. 754); all that they possess, so that if unfortunate, as some- times has happened, they return home as naked as your hand (Lalemant Relation, 1639); their goods, their wives, their children (Feriand Vol. I, p. 134); some have been known to stake their liberty for a time (Charlevoix, Vol. in, 319) ; have been known to stake their liberty upon the issue of these games, offering themselves to their opponents in case they get beaten (Catlin, Vol. I, p. 132); I have known sev- eral of them to gamble their liberty away (Lawson, p. 176); a Canadian Indian lost his wife and family to a Frenchman (Sagard Theodat, Histoire du Canada Vol. I, p. 243); they wager their wives (A. Colquhon Grant, Journal Royal Geog. Soc, London,Vol. xxvn, p. 299); their wives and children (Irving's Astoria, Vol. ii, p. 91); their liberty (Parker's Journal of an Exploring Tour, pp. 249-50); Dome- nech has never known men to bet their wives (Vol. ii, p. 191); women betas well as men (Romans, p. 79; Am. Naturalist, Vol. XI, No. 6, 551); Philander Prescott (Schoolcraft, Vol. IV, p. 64) ; Cushing (Century, Vol. xxvi, p. 28); the liberty of a woman wagered by herself (Lalemant, Relation 1639); women are never seen to bet (Le Page du Pratz, Vol. in, p. 2; Mayne Br. Col., p. 276); rash gambling some- times followed by suicide (Romans p. 79; Brebeuf, Relation 1636). 144 INDIAN GAMES. cast of the dice. It differs equally from the scene which travellers have brought before our eyes, of the Chinooks, beating upon their paddles and moaning forth their mo- notonous chants, while gathered in a ring about the player, who with dexterous passes and strange contor- tions manipulated the stone and thus added zest to the guess which was to determine the ownership of the prop- erty staked upon the game. The resemblances in these scenes are, however, far more striking than the differ- ences. Climate and topography determine the one. Race characteristics are to be found in the other. BULLETIN ESSEX IUSTITUTB. Vol. 17. Salem: Oct., Nov., Dec, 1885. Nos. 10-12. ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS OF ARROW- RELEASE. BY EDWARD S. MORSE. When 1 began collecting data illustrating the various methods of releasing the arrow from the bow as prac- ticed by different races, I was animated only by the idlest curiosity. It soon became evident, however, that some importance might attach to preserving the methods of handling a weapon which is rapidly being displaced in all parts of the world by the musket and rifle. While tribes still survive who rely entirely on this most ancient of weapons, using, even to the present day, stone-tipped arrows, there are other tribes using the rifle where the bow still survives. There are, however, entire tribes and nations who have but recently, or within late historic times, abandoned the bow and arrow, its survival being seen only as a plaything for children. It was not till I had accumulated quite a collection of sketches and other memoranda illustrating the methods of arrow-release, not only of existing but of ancient races, as shown by frescos and rock sculpture, that I realized that even so trivial an art as that of releasing the arrow ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII 19 (1^5) 146 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS might possibly lead to interesting results in tracing the affinities of past races. I am led to publish the data thus far collected, incom- plete as they are, with the intention of using the paper in the form of a circular to send abroad, with the hope of securing further material for a more extended memoir on the subject. My interest in the matter was first aroused by having a Japanese friend shoot with me. Being familiar with the usual rules of shooting as practiced for centuries by the English archers, and not being aware of more than one way of properly handling so simple and primitive a weapon as the bow and arrow, it was somewhat surprising to find that the Japanese practice was in every respect to- tally unlike ours. To illustrate : in the English practice, the bow must be grasped with the firmness of a smith's vice ; in the Japanese practice, on the contrary, it is held as lightly as possible ; in both cases, however, it is held vertically, but in the English method the arrow rests on the left of the bow, while in the Japanese method it is placed on the right. In the English practice a guard of leather must be worn on the inner and lower portion of the arm to receive the impact of the string ; in the Japanese practice no arm-guard is required, as by a curious fling or twirl of the bow hand, coincident with the release of the arrow, the bow (which is nearly circular in section) re- volves in the hand, so that the string brings up on the outside of the arm where the impact is so light that no protection is needed. In the English method the bow is grasped in the middle, and consequently the arrow is dis- charged from a point equidistant from its two ends, while the Japanese archer grasps the bow near its lower third and discharges the arrow from this point. This al- together unique method, so far as I am aware, probably arose from the custom of the archers in feudal times OF ARROW-RELEASE. 147 shooting in a kneeling posture from behind thick wooden shields which rested on the ground. "While all these feat- ures above mentioned are quite unlike in the two peo- ples, these dissimilarities extend to the method of drawing the arrow and releasing it. In the English method the string is drawn with the tips of the first three fingers, the arrow being lightly held between the first and second fin- gers, the release being effected by simply straightening the fingers and at the same time drawing the hand back from the string ; in the Japanese method of release the string is drawn back by the bent thumb, the forefinger aiding in holding the thumb down on the string, the arrow being held in the crotch at the junction of the thumb and finger. These marked and important points of difference be- tween the two nations in the use of a weapon so simple and having the same parts, — namely, an elastic stick, a simple cord, a slender barbed shaft, — and used by the two hands, naturally led me to inquire further into the use of the bow in various parts of the world, and to my amaze- ment I found not only a number of totally distinct meth- ods of arrow-release with modifications, or sub-varieties, but that all these methods had been in vogue from early historic times. Even the simple act of bracing or string- ing the bow varies quite as profoundly with different races. The simplest form of release is that which children the world over naturally adopt in first using the bow and arrow, and that is grasping the arrow between the end of the straightened thumb and the first and second joints of the bent forefinger. I say naturally, because I have noticed that American as well as Indian and Japanese children in- variably grasp the arrow in this way in the act of shooting. With a light or weak bow, such a release is the simplest 148 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS and best ; and in this release it makes but little difference upon which side of the bow the arrow rests, provided the bow is held vertically. This release, however, prevents the drawing of a stiff bow unless one possesses enormous Figs. 1 and 2. Primary release. strength in the fingers. Figs. 1 and 2 illustrate this re- lease. Arrows used in this release are usually knobbed at the nock, or proximal end of the arrow, for conven- Fig. 3. Knobbed arrow from Oregon. ience of holding ; and an arrow of this form indicates a release of this or of a similar nature (Fig. 3). The Ainos of Yezo practice this simple release. Their bow is short and highly strung when in use, and an arm- OF ARROW-RELEASE. 149 guard is not required, as the recoil of the string, from the high tension of the bow, is arrested before striking the arm. Some of the old English archers also avoided the use of the arm-guard by using highly strung bows. It is recorded that the Demerara Indians of South America practice this form of release ; and from a photo- graph of a Ute Indian in my possession I should infer- that that tribe also practiced this release. Col. James Stevenson informs me that when the Navajos shoot at prairie dogs they use this release, so that the arrow will not penetrate the ground if it misses its mark ; and Mr. Daniel S. Hastings informs me that the Chippewa Indians sometimes practice this release. I am indebted to Dr. S. J. Mixter for a photograph which he made for me, of an old Micmac Indian in the act of releasing the arrow in the primary way. The man is one of the oldest Micmacs in the Cascapedia settlement on the north shore of the Bay of Chaleur and he informed Dr. Mixter that he often used the bow when a boy, and prac- ticed the release as represented. He also said that the other tribes in that part of Canada in the use of the bow drew the arrow in the same way. A member of the Pe- nobscot tribe at Moosehead Lake gave me the primary release as that practiced by the tribe, and seemed incred- ulous when I told him that there were other methods of drawing the arrow. This primitive method of releasing the arrow I shall designate as the Primary release. The next form of release to be considered is one which is a direct outgrowth from the primary release. This re- lease consists in grasping the arrow with the straightened thumb and bent forefinger, while the ends of the second and third fingers are brought to bear on the string to as- 150 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS sist in drawing. Figs. 4 and 5 illustrate the attitude of the hand in this release. Mr. Paul Mamegowena, an Ottawa Indian, informs me that his tribe practice this release, and he illustrated the method to me. Through the courtesy of Mr. Frank Hamilton Cushing I was enabled to make inquiries of a number of Zuni chiefs in regard to their Figs. 4 and 5. Secondary release. method, and the release practiced by them differed in no respect from that of the Ottawas. Mr. Daniel S. Hastings, formerly civil engineer on the Northern Pacific Kailroad writes to me as follows regarding the Chippewa Indians of northern Wisconsin : " I have watched the Indians so as to find out their manner of draw- ing back the bow-string and releasing the arrow, and I find they all agree in one respect : they all grasp the arrow OF ARROW-RELEASE. 151 between the thumb and forefinger. Some of them use the thumb and forefinger alone, while others use the second, and still others add the second and third fingers to as- sist in pulling the string back, and let the string slip off the ends of the second and third fingers at the same instant the arrow is released from between the thumb and fore- finger." This release, though clearly distinct from the primary release, is an advance upon it in the added as- sistance of one or two fingers in pulling back the string ; and the description given by Mr. Hastings is confirmatory of the natural relations existing between the two releases. For this reason it will be designated as the Secondary re- lease. Mr. La Flesche, an intelligent Omaha, showed me a release practiced by his people which differs sufficiently from the secondary release to warrant its recognition as a separate form. In this release the forefinger, instead of being bent, is nearly straight with its tip, as well as the tips of the second and third fingers, pressing or pulling on the string, the thumb, as in the primary and secondary release, active in assisting in pinching the arrow and pulling it back. This release I shall call the Tertiary release. (See Figs. 6 and 7.) Lieut. A. W. Vogdes, U. S. A., has informed me that the Sioux, Arapahoes, and Cheyenne practice the tertiary release ; and Col. James Stephenson has noticed this re- lease practiced not only by the two latter tribes but by the Assiniboins, Comanches, Crows, Blackfeet, and Navajos. Mr. La Flesche and Lieut. Vogdes informed me that the tribes using this release held the bow nearly hori- zontally. In holding the bow horizontally the release-hand is held with the palm uppermost, the arrow, of course, resting on the bow. In the Zuni and Ottawa practice, the bow 152 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS being held vertically or nearly so, the arrow is placed at the left of the bow. It is possible that originally the bow was held horizontally, but necessities arising, as in shoot- ing in a forest, or shooting side by side with others closely appressed, the bow was required to be held vertically. In thus turning the bow-hand in the only way it could be turned conveniently, the arrow would be brought to the left of the bow vertical. As will be shown further on, the position of the arrow Figs. 6 and 7. Tertiary release. either to the right or to the left of the bow vertical is de- termined in most cases by the method of release. In the primary and secondary releases, however, it makes but little difference on which side the arrow is placed ; and some tribes, using the bow vertical, place the arrow to the right, and this is probably a quicker way of adjusting the arrow when shooting rapidly. Col. James Stevenson informs me that Navajo Indians practice three methods of release, namely, the primary release already OF ARROW-RELEASE. 15:> alluded to, the tertiary release, and a variety of the Med- iteranean release, which will be described further on. During the recent visit of the Siamese embassy to this country, I obtained from its members through the cour- tesy of Mr. Wilberforce Wyke, interpreter, some inter- esting facts concerning the use of the bow in Siam. It was curious to find that the Siamese practiced the tertiary release ; with this difference, however, that one finger only is used on the string instead of two. Mr. Nai Tuan illus- trated the method to me, and explained that little use was made of the bow and arrow, its practice being confined to the shooting of small birds and fishes. Major Snayh of the embassy told me that poisoned ar- rows were also used, in which case the bow was held hori- zontally, and the bow-hand grasped not only the bow, but a grooved board in which the arrow rested. In the last century, it was customary for the Turkish archer to use a grooved piece of horn which was held in the bow-hand directed towards the string. In this grooved piece the arrow ran, and by this contrivance the bow could be drawn much further back, even to the extent of bringing the head of the arrow four or five inches within the bow. Ac- cording to Wilkinson, the ancient Egyptians were familiar with this curious adjunct to the bow. E. H. Man, Esq., in his work on the Andaman Island- ers,1 p. 141, says that the inhabitants of Great Andaman " place the arrow in position between the thumb and top joint of the forefinger, and draw the string to the mouth with the middle and third finger." As Mr. Man in this description does not speak of the forefinger as bent and 1 On the Aboriginal Inhabitants of the Audaman Islands. By Edward Horace Man. Reprinted from the Journal of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII 20 154 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS pressed against the arrow, the release practiced by these people must be the tertiary release. We have thus far considered three methods of release, of which the thumb and bent forefinger appressed forms the simplest and probably one of the earliest forms ; and this we have called the primary release. The secondary release differs only in the application of the tips of the second finger, or second and third fingers, to the string, and must be regarded as a development of the primary release, though forming a distinct method. The third re- lease differs in the position of the forefinger, which, instead of being bent and pressed against the arrow, is nearly straight, its tip, as well as the tips of the second and some- times that of the third finger, engaging the string. This constitutes the tertiary release. We come now to consider a release which by document- ary evidence has been in vogue among the northern Med- iterranean nations for centuries, and among the southern Mediterranean nations for tens of centuries. It is the oldest release of which we have any knowledge. It is practiced to-day by all modern English, French, and American archers, and is the release practiced by Euro- pean archers of the Middle Ages. This release consists in drawing the string back with the tips of the first, second, and third fingers, the balls of the fingers clinging to the string, with the terminal joints of the fingers slightly flexed. The arrow is lightly held between the first and second fingers, the thumb straight and inactive. Since this release has been practiced by the Mediterra- nean nations from early historic times, it may with pro- priety be called the Mediterranean release. The following figures (Figs. 8 and 9) illustrate this form of release. In the practice of this release, the attrition of the string on the fingers is so severe that a leather glove or leather OF ARROW-RELEASE. 155 finger-tips are worn, though some archers are enabled by long service to shoot with their fingers unprotected. Roger Ascham, in his " Toxophilus," written in 1544, says : w A shootinge glove is chiefly e for to save a man's fingers from hurtinge, that he may be able to beare the sharpe stringe to the uttermoste of his strengthe. And when a man shooteth, the might of his shoote lyeth on the foremost finger, and on the ringman ; for the middle Figs. 8 and 9. Mediterranean release. finger which is longest, like a lubber, starteth back, and beareth no weight of the stringe in a manner at all ; therefore the two fingers must have thicker leather, and that must have thickest of all whereon a man lowseth most, and for sure lowsinge the foremost finger is most apt, because it holdeth best, and for that purpose nature hath, as a man would say, yocked it with the thoumbe.', Hansard, in his " Book of Archery," states that the Flem- ings use the first and second fingers only, a method adopted by some English bowmen. This Fleming variety of the 156 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS Mediterranean release, as we shall soon see, was probably the usual form in the Middle Ages. Among the many curious matters of interest concerning archery, which may be found in Hansard's book, is the description of a quaint black-letter volume which the author dug out in the Royal Library of Paris. This volume was written at the close of the thirteenth or beginning of the fourteenth century. It is entitled " The Book of King Modus," and is a treatise on the use of the bow in hunting. Among other matters is a chapter of " Instructions in the Art of Archery ;" and in regard to the release, it says that "you draw the arrow with three fingers, holding the nock between the forefinger and the next thereto." Associated with this release is the necessity of placing the arrow on the left of the bow held vertically. This position is necessitated by the fact, that as the string is pulled back the friction of the fingers which clutch the arrow tends to swing the arrow to the right ; at the same time the friction of the fingers on the string causes the string to rotate somewhat to the right, and this tends to displace the arrow. In a release of this nature, the arrow must be to the left of the bow vertical ; and carved figures, manuscript draw- ings, and sculpture, in which the arrow is represented otherwise in connection with the Mediterranean release, must be incorrect. This release is unquestionably an advance on the others thus far described, as it enables the drawing of a stiffer bow, and is exceedingly delicate and smooth at the instant of loosing the arrow. Mr. John Murdock, who accompanied the United States Signal Survey Expedition to the northwest coast of Alaska, has kindly furnished me the information that the Eskimo of Point Barrow practice the Mediterranean release, using, however, only the first and second fingers in drawing the string. I am also indebted to Mr. Mur- Otf ARROW-RELEASE. 157 dock for calling my attention to two other references concerning the practice of archery among these Arctic people. Mr. Ludwig Kumlien, naturalist of the Howgate Polar Expedition, says of the Cumberland Sound Eskimo, "In shooting this weapon the string is placed on the first joint of the first and middle fingers of the right hand." * The Krause brothers state that the natives of East Cape, Siberia, do not hold the arrow between the thumb and first finger, but between the first and middle fingers.2 Neither of these descriptions is complete, and yet both indicate unmistakably the Mediterranean release. It was somewhat surprising to find this release among the tribes of Eskimo, for I had supposed that the arrow-re- lease of this people would be either in the form of the primary or secondary release. As a confirmation of this unlooked-for method of shooting among the west-coast Fig. 10. Point Barrow Eskimo arrow, half size, a, end view. Eskimo at least, Mr. Murdock called my attention to the shape of the nock end of their arrow, which was greatly flattened at right angles to the nock, so that it offered greater convenience for grasping between the fin- gers. It is possible also that this peculiar flattening may have something to do with the flight of the arrow. This flattening of the arrow I have never observed before ; and an arrow of this shape must indicate unmistakably the method of release employed, for in no other form of release with which I am familiar could the arrow be dis- charged. Fig. 10 gives the appearance of this arrow. 1 Bulletin of the U. S. National Museum, No. 15, p. 37. 2 Deutsche geographische Blatter, Vol. i, p. 33. 158 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS If Mr. Man's information be correct, then the tribes inhabiting the Little Andaman practice the Mediterranean release. In his work on the Andaman Islanders before alluded to, the author says (p. 141) that the Jar'awa, or the tribes which inhabit the Little Andaman and southern portions of the Great Andaman, "adopt the plan usual among ourselves of holding the nock of the arrow inside the string by means of the middle joints of the fore and Figs. 11 and 12. Mongolian release. middle fingers, and drawing the string with the same joints." While the four releases thus far described may be con- sidered successive modifications of each other, though I do not mean to imply that they are so necessarily, the release which we are about to examine is an entirely in- dependent form, having no relation to the others. In this release the string is drawn by the flexed thumb bent over OF ARROW-RELEASE. 159 the string, the end of the forefinger assisting in holding the thumb in this position. Figs. 11 and 12 illustrate this release. The arrow is held at the junction of the thumb and forefinger, the base of the finger pressing the arrow against the bow. For this reason the arrow is always placed to the right of the bow vertical. This release is characteristic of the Asiatic races, such as the Manchu, Chinese, Korean, Japanese, Turk, and doubt- less other cognate peoples. The Persians also practice this release, which they probably acquired from their prox- imity to, and association (friendly and otherwise) with, Asiatic people of past times. As this release is practiced almost exclusively by Mon- golian nations, it may be called the Mongolian release. In this release the thumb is protected by a guard of some kind. With the Manchu, Chinese, and Turk, as well as with the Persian, this guard consists of a thick ring, which is worn near the base of the thumb. The thick edge of the ring is brought to bear upon the string as it is drawn back, and at the same time the string is quickly released by straightening the thumb. The ring may be made of any hard material, such as horn, bone, ivory, quartz, agate, or jade. These rings are often very expensive. I was shown one in Canton that was valued at three hundred dollars. Fig. 13 Chinese thumb-ring of jade, illustrates an ordinary horn ring such in section. ^ ^ Cailtonege use> Fig. 14 shows a Chinese thumb-ring in section, made of jade. This ring, being used with bows having thicker strings, is correspondingly larger. The Korean thumb-ring is quite unlike that used by the Chinese, as will be seen Fig. 13. Chinese thumb-rini Fig. 14. 1G0 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS by Fig. 15. The ring is thin, and from its shape is evi- dently used to protect the ball of the thumb. The string is not engaged by the edge of the ring, as in the Chinese Fig. 15. Korean thumb-ring. method, but rests upon the side of the ring.1 The Japanese archer, instead of using a thumb-ring, is provided with a Fig. 16. Japanese archer's glove (portion only shown). glove consisting of thumb and two fingers. The wrist of the glove is firmly bound to the wrist by a long band, 1 1 was told by a Korean ambassador in Tokio, that in archery the Koreans are taught to draw the arrow with either hand, but considered the left hand most effi- cient. In illustrating the method ol release he drew the arrow with his left hand. The bow is firmly grasped, and an arm-guard is worn. OF ARROW-RELEASE. 161 which is fastened to one flap, passes through a hole in the opposite flap, thus enabling it to be pulled up like a noose, and then is wound tightly about the wrist several times. The thumb of the glove is much thickened, and is very hard and stiff (Fig. 16). Its operation is like that of the Korean thumb-ring. In the Korean and Japanese practice the first and second fingers assist in holding the thumb bent on the string, while in the Manchu release only the first finger is so Fig. 17. Manchu. used, the other three fingers being inactive and closed. There are doubtless other modifications of this release ; the essential features however remain the same. A young Japanese from the north of Japan, in illustrating to me his method of release, drew the string back with the thumb and interlocked forefinger as already described, and assisted the drawing back of the string with the tips of the second and third fingers, as shown in the secondary release. The accompanying figure illustrates the attitude of the shaft hand of a Manchu as seen from above, which I sketched from a Manchu soldier at Canton. (Fig. 17.) The ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII 21 162 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS Persians and Turks use the thumb-ring in the same way. Fig. 18, representing the Persian thumb-ring, is copied from a drawing given in Meyrick's " Ancient Armour." Han- sard, referring to another author, says that "one of the early Turkish Sultans occupied his leisure in manufacturing these rings," distributing them as presents among his favor- ite pashas ; and adds also that the carnelian thumb-rings may be easily procured in the Bazaars of Constantinople. Some notes in regard to Persian archery may be found in "Hansard's Book of Archery," p. 136. The " Archers' Register " published a number of notes from a manuscript copy of " Anecdotes of Turkish Archery procured from Constantinople by Sir Robert Ainslie, and translated by his interpreter, at the request of Sir Joseph Banks, Baronet, 1797," from which we quote : — " The bow, instead of being drawn with three fingers on the string, according to our mode, was drawn by the right thumb, with the arrow placed on the string im- mediately above it. A thumb-piece, or guard of bone, answering the purpose of our Hips,' was worn. It covered the ball of the thumb, one end being made as a ring and passed over the joint. A pro- jecting tongue in the inside prevented the string slippin thumb formed by the bent joint. ined with leather. A curious contrivance, consist- rig. 18. Persian thumb-ring. g off the guard into the angle of the The inside of the guard was ing of a horn-groove several inches in length, fixed on a foundation of wood attached to a leather strap and buckle, was fastened on the bow-hand. The groove pro- jected inwards. The arrow was laid in this groove, which rested on the thumb, and was rather higher on the outside, as the arrow was shot on the right side of the bow, on the contrary side to what it is in England." OF ARROW-RELEASE. 103 There are doubtless other forms of release, but those already given probably comprise the principal and most efficient ones. At Singapore I was enabled to secure, through the kind- ness of D. F. A. Hervey, Esq., of Malacca, a Malay release of the Temiang tribe, originally from Sumatra. The bow was held in an horizontal position (a hole being made in the centre of the bow through which the arrow passed), the three fingers bent over the string, and the arrow held between the first and second fingers, the thumb straight- Fig. 19. Temiang release. ened, and the little finger partially straightened and bear- ing against the string as in the figure (Fig. 19). This was a weak release, and was used only in the shooting of small game and fish. An entirely different form of release is used by this people in shooting fire at the spirit of sick- ness. The bow is perforated as in the bow above men- tioned ; the arrow has a shoulder near the distal end which prevents it passing through the hole, and the nock is fas- tened to the string. A ball of inflammable material is loosely placed on the end of the arrow, and when the arrow is released it is suddenly checked by its shoulder striking 164 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS the bow and the fire-ball is projected into the air by its momentum. The release in this act is shown in Fig. 20. The first finger passes above the string and under the ar- row, the thumb being straightened and the arrow grasped between the thumb and finger. This is a most awkward and inefficient release ; and as the descriptions of this and the previous Malay release were given me by an old man, who was at the time being questioned by Mr. Hervey in the interest of philology, it is possible that the releases may have been incorrectly described. The releases thus far given comprise those forms which have been studied from life. It now remains for us to examine the releases of ancient Fig. 20. Temiang release when shooting at spirit of sickness. peoples which are made known to us through illuminated manuscripts, frescos, rock sculpture, and other graphic methods. From the conventional way in which many of these are depicted, great difficulty is encountered in prop- erly interpreting the exact method of release intended. In many cases, especially in certain forms of the ancient Egyptian, as shown in the frescos, and early Grecian, as represented on their decorative vases, it is well nigh im- possible to recognize any mode in which the arrow could be drawn. In some cases the release might be intended OF ARROW-RELEASE. 165 to represent either of two or three kinds. That many re- leases are represented incorrectly there can be no doubt. In figures of Egyptian archers, the hand is depicted as daintily pulling the arrow in a way that could not possibly accomplish the drawing of a stiff bow ; and that the Egyptian archer used a stiff bow is seen in the vigorous manner in which he is represented as bracing it with knee pressed against its middle, while tying the cord above. It will be best, however, to give a description of those releases that can be clearly interpreted, beginning with the Assyrian. I had a brief opportunity of studying the won- derful collection of Assyrian slabs at the British Museum, and also the Assyrian collections at the Louvre. In the various scenes of war and hunting so graphically depicted, the most perfect representations of archers in the act of drawing the bow are given. At the outset I met with a very curious and unaccount- able discrepancy in the form of release employed, and that was when the archer was represented with his right side, or shaft hand, toward the observer, the hand was with few exceptions in the attitude of the primary or secondary release ; whereas if the archer was represented with his left side, or bow hand, toward the observer, the release with few exceptions represented the Mediterranean re- lease. Or, in other words, as one faces the sculptured slab the archers, who are represented as shooting towards the right, show with few exceptions either the primary or secondary release, while those shooting towards the left are with few exceptions practicing the Mediterranean release ! If in every case the Assyrians were represented on the left, as one faces the tablet, fighting the enemy on the right, then one might assume that the enemy was prac- ticing a different release. In an Egyptian fresco, for ex- 166 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS ample, where Rameses II. is depicted in his chariot fighting the Arabs, the enemy is represented as practicing a differ- ent release. While in many cases the Assyrians are on the left of the picture, in other cases they are on the right, and shooting towards the left. It is therefore diffi- cult to decide which release was practiced by them ; and all the more so, since, with very few exceptions, the re- leases are perfect representations of forms practiced to- day, which have already been described. I have suspected that in one or two cases the Mongolian release might have been intended, though in no case is the thumb-ring repre- sented, though other details of arm-guards, bracelets, etc., are shown with great minuteness. Taking the releases as they are represented in the sculpt- Fig. 21. Assyrian. ures without regard to the discrepancies above noted, it is an extremely interesting fact that all the earlier Assy- rian archers, that is, of the time of Assurnazirpal, or 884 B. C, the release represented is the primary one, as shown in Fig. 21 ; while in the archers of the reign of Assurbar- nipal, or 650 B. C, the secondary release is shown, or a variety of it, in which the tips of all three fingers are on the string, as shown in Fig. 22. Between these two epochs the sculptures ranging from 745-705 B. C, notably a slab representing the campaign of Sennacherib showing assault on the Kouyunjik Palace, both the primary and secondary releases are represented. If any reliance can OF ARROW-RELEASE. 167 be placed on the accuracy of these figures, an interesting relation is shown in the development of the secondary from the primary release, as urged in the first part of this paper. Possibly a proof that the primary release is in- Fig. 22. Assyrian. tended is shown in the fact that the arrows are represent- ed with the nock end bulbous. On tablets in the British Museum of this intermediate age, or during the reign of Tiglath Pileser, is the first rep- resentation of an archer with the right side towards the Fig. 23. Assyrian. observer practicing the Mediterranean release : and on slabs of the date of 650 B. C, one showing Assurbarni- pal's second war against Elam, and another one represent- ing the siege of the city of Al-aramu, a number of archers with their right towards the observer are practicing the Mediterranean release (Fig. 23). In the Mediterranean release, which, as I have before remarked, is represented, 168 ANCIENT AND MODEKN METHODS with few exceptions, by all the archers having the bow- hand towards the observer, there are two varieties shown * one in which three fingers are on the string, and another Fig. 24. Assyrian. with only two fingers drawing the bow, as shown in the accompanying figures (Figs. 24, 25). The Mediterra- nean release occurs in Assyrian sculpture as early as 884 25. Assyrian. B. C, as shown on a marble slab in the British Museum representing the siege of a city by Assurnazirpal (Fig. 26). A curious form is shown in Fig. 27, showing Assur- Fig. 26. Assyrian. barnipal in a chariot, shooting lions. The string below is concealed by the archer's arm. The secondary release is probably intended. OF ARROW-RELEASE, 109 In regard to the bow-hand, the thumb is sometimes rep- resented as straight and guiding the arrow, and in other cases as braced inside of the bow. In this connection it may be interesting to note that in the earliest Assyrian bows the ends of the bows are straight and blunt, the nocks being a simple groove and the string being tied Fig. 27. Assyrian. whenever the bow is braced, as in certain modern Indian and Aino practice. Other bows are shown at this period with a nock somewhat oblique, and it is possible that the string might have been looped and slipped into the notch, as in the modern English bow. In the later slabs, that is 650 B.C., the ends of the bow are shown abruptly bent, the bent portion in some cases In the bracing u 4 Fig. 28. Fig. 29. being carved to represent a bird's head, of this bow the string has a permanent loop, and the assist- ance of a second person is required to slip this loop over the point of the nock while the archer is employed in bending the bow, which is done by drawing the ends of the bow towards him, the knee at the same time being pressed in the middle of the bow. (Figs. 28, 29, 30.) In ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII 22 170 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS the earlier reign, the arrows are shown with larger nocks and the barbs, long and narrow, with their outer edges gen- erally parallel to the shaft. The nock end of the arrow is bulbous, as before remarked; and if this is correctly represented it would settle the question as to the primary release being the one intended. In the later slabs, the arrow has shorter barbs, with the feathers tapering forward towards the point, and the nock end of the arrow is not bulbous . A more careful study than I was able to give to these sculptures may probably modify the general statements here made concerning the variations in time of the bow and arrow. Concerning the practice of archery among the ancient Egyptians, Wilkinson in his classical work mentions only two forms of release. He says their mode of drawing the bow was either with the thumb and forefinger or with the first and second fingers.1 Rawlinson makes the same state- ment.2 These two forms as defined by these authors would be the primary and Mediterranean releases. If the representations of the drawings and frescos in ancient Egyptian tombs, as given by Rosallini, Lepsius, and others, are to be relied on, then the ancient Egyptians practiced at least three, and possibly four, definite and distinct methods of release. That many of the releases depicted in these old sculpt- ures and frescos are conventional simply, there can be no doubt ; indeed, some of the releases are plainly impossible, notably that form which shows the archer daintily draw- ing back a stiff bow with the extreme tips of the first two fingers and thumb. Again, the figure of Rameses II. (see 1 Manners and Customs of the Ancient Egyptians, 2nd series, Vol. I., p. 207. 2 History of Ancient Egypt, Vol. I., p. 474. OF ARROW-RELEASE, 171 Wilkinson, Vol. L, p. 307), which shows the bow vertical while the shaft-hand is inverted, that is, with palm upper- most, is an equally impossible attitude. Other releases identify themselves clearly with forms already described, and with slight latitude in the interpretation of the con- ventional forms we may identify these as belonging to known types. The earliest releases are those depicted on the tombs of Beni Hassan of the time of Usurtasen I., which according Fig. 31. Early Egyptian. to the conservative chronology of Professor Lepsius dates 2380 B.C. Here the Mediterranean release is unmistak- ably shown. The following figure (Fig. 31) from these tombs, copied from Rosallini's great work, indicates this form of release in the clearest manner. In these figures it is interesting to observe that the arrow is drawn to the ear, and also that the archers are represented as shooting with the left as well as with the right hand. Making a stride of over a thousandyears and coming down to the time of Seti I. ( 1259 B.C.), we have represented a release as well as a mode of drawing the arrow above and 172 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS behind the ear, which recalls in the action of the arm cer- tain forms of the Mongolian release. (Fig. 32.) It is true the attitude of the hand might be interpreted as rep- resenting the thumb and bent forefinger as shown in the Fig. 32. Egyptian. Seti I. primary release, but the free and vigorous drawing of the bow as shown in the figure could not possibly be accom- plished in the primary form with a bow of any strength. Furthermore, the attitude assumed by the Manchu and Fig. 33. Egyptian. Rameses II. Japanese archer in the Mongolian release vividly recalls this picture of Seti. Egyptologists state that Seti I. was occupied early in his reign with wars in the east and in re- sisting the incursions of Asiatic tribes ; and we venture to OF ARROW-RELEASE. 173 offer the suggestion that during these wars he might have acquired the more vigorous release as practiced by the Asiatics.1 Whatever may be the method depicted in the drawing of Seti, it is quite unlike the releases of the time of Usurtasen, and equally unlike the figures of Kameses II., which are so often portrayed. In Figs. 33, 34, copied from Rosallini, the thumb and the forefinger partially bent may be intended to represent the primary release, as in no other way could be inter- preted the bent forefinger and straightened thumb holding Fig. 34. Egyptian. Rameses II. the tip of the arrow, with three other fingers free from the string. In the British Museum are casts of a hunting scene, and also of battle scenes of the time of Rameses II., in which the shaft-hand of the archer is in an inverted position. This form of release associated with a vertical bow is an impos- sible one. Either the hand is wrongly drawn, or the atti- tude of the bow is incorrectly given. The only explanation of this discrepancy is the assumption that the bow was 1 It would be extremely interesting to know whether any object answering the purpose of a thumb-ring has ever been found among the relics of ancient Egypt. 174 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS Fig. 35. Egyptian. Fig. 36. Egyptian. really held in an horizontal position, and the release prac- a ticed was the one I have designated as the tertiary release. . The Egyptian artist, igno- rant of perspective drawing and utterly unable to represent a bow foreshortened, has drawn the bow in a vertical position. As a further proof of this, we find that the tribes of North American In- dians and the Siamese who practice the terti- ary release usually hold the bow in an horizontal position. An examina- tion of the accompany- ing figures will make this clear. Fig. 35 is copied from the cast re- ferred to in the British Museum ; Fig. 36, from Wilkinson, Vol. i. , p. 307; Fig. 37, from Wilkinson, Vol. i., p. 309. Reginald Stuart Poole, Esq., of the British Museum, has kindly sent me an out- line of the nock end of straight and Fig. 37. Egyptian. the ancient Egyptian arrow which shows a OF ARROW-RELEASE. 175 cylindrical shaft. Figs. 38, 39, 40, and 41 are copied from Rosallini. Fig. 38 is probably intended for the pri- mary, Fig. 39 the tertiary probably, and Figs. 40 and 41 the Mediterranean form. Turning now to the practice of archery among the an- cient Grecians, we should expect to find among these peo- Fig. 38. Egyptian. pie, at least, the most distinct and truthful delineations of the attitude of the hand in shooting. Hansard, in his "Book of Archery," p. 428, says of the ancient Greek archers, "Like the modernTurks, Persians, Tartars, and many other Orientals, they drew the bow-string with their thumb, the arrow being retained in place by the forefinger. Many sculptures extant in public and private collections, es- pecially those splendid casts from the Island of Egina now in the British Philosophical and Literary Institution, represent several archers drawing the bow-string as I have described." A study of a number of ancient Grecian releases as shown in rock sculpture and on decorated vases reveals only one release that might possibly be intended to repre- sent the Mongolian method, and this is shown on a Greek 176 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS vase (black figures on red) figured in Auserlesene Vaser- bilder. With this exception the releases thus far examined are as various, and many of them quite as enigmatical, as those seen among the ancient Egyptians. I puzzled for a long time over these sculptures from the temple of Fig. 40. Egyptian. Athena to which Mr. Hansard refers, and was forced to come to the conclusion that, despite their acknowledged ac- curacy, the release was an impossible one. It was not till sometime after that I learned that the figures had been care- fully restored by Thovaldsen, and the restored parts com- \ Egyptian, prised the hands and arms, as well as the extremities of most of the figures. With this information I had occasion to hunt up a history of these figures, and found the follow- ing in a work by Eugene Plon entitled "Thovaldsen his Life and Works," republished in this country by Roberts Broth- ers. The figures were restored by Thovaldsen in 1816. Among the restored parts were the hands of the archers. " The statues were in Parian marble, and he used so much OF ARROW-RELEASE. 177 care in matching the tints of the new pieces as almost to deceive a practiced eye. He was frequently asked by vis- itors to the Atelier which were the restored parts. fI can- not say,' he would reply laughing ; 'I neglected to mark them, and I no longer remember. Find them out for yourself if you can'" (p. 56). Of these restorations, however, it is possible that Mr. Hansard was not aware, though if he had ever attempted drawing a bow in the manner represented in these figures, he would have seen the absurdity as well as the impossibility of the attitude ; and, furthermore, had he been at all familiar with the Mongolian release he would have seen that there was really no approach to the form as employed by the Man- chu, Korean, Japanese, or Turk. The following figure (Fig. 42) is sketched from the set of casts in the Mu- seum of Fine Arts in Boston. An examination of these Fig. 42. Thovaldsen's restoration of hand. figures will show that the angle made by the shaft-hand in relation to the bow-hand is also inaccurate. A release that might at first sight suggest the Mongolian form is shown in the accompanying figure (Fig. 43) representing an Amazon archer, which is painted on a Greek vase of the 4th cen- tury B.C. The forefinger seems to be holding the end of the thumb, but the thumb is not hooked over the string as it ought to be. If the hand be correctly drawn it repre- sents quite well the tertiary release ; and this supposition is borne out by two sculptures, one from the Temple of Apollo Epicurius at Phigalia (Fig. 44), and another from ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII 23 178 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS Lycia, Asia Minor. (Fig. 45.) In these two examples the hand seems to be in the attitude of drawing the bow, with the fingers partially bent on the string, and the thumb Fig. 43. Amazon archer. assisting in holding the arrow ; and this is the form ot the tertiary release. The earliest Greek release that I have seen is represented Fig. 44. Phigalia. on a block of stone sent to this country by the Assos Ex- hibition, and now the property of the Boston Museum of Fine Arts. It is supposed to date about 2200 B.C. Fig. 45. Lycia, Asia Minor. In this figure the hand is vigorously grasping the string, with the first and second fingers abruptly bent, the third and fourth fingers apparently having been broken away. (Fig. 46.) OF ARROW- RELEASE. 179 If this release really represent a permanent form of shooting, then this form should have been designated the primary release ; but, so far as 1 have learned, it seems to be a temporary mode resorted to only under special con- ditions. In testing the stiffness of a bow, for example, the string is grasped in this manner. An instance of this is seen on one of the Assyrian slabs, where the king is represented as trying a bow. I was informed by a Zufii chief that when shooting in a great hurry the string was vigorously clutched by three or four fingers, the arrow being held against the first finger by the thumb. The Ainos on the west coast of Yezo also informed me & Fig. 46. Asso8. that when shooting in great haste the string was clutched in precisely this manner. In the use of a bow of any strength, the attrition of the string on the fingers must be very severe ; and only a hand as tough, and as thoroughly calloused as the paw of an animal, conld endure the fric- tion of the string in such a release. For convenience of reference this form may be referred to provisionally as the Archaic release. In abas-relief in marble representing Herakles drawing a bow, a figure of which is given in Rayet's Monuments de VArt Antique, it is rather curious that the hand is rep- resented as clutching the string in the vigorous maimer just described. The date of this work is put down as the fourth or fifth century B. C. Doubts have been expressed ISO ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS as to the genuineness of this work. Dr. Alfred Emerson has expressed his belief in the "American Journal of Archaeology," Vol. I., p. 153, that the work is a modern fraud. In the following number of the Journal Mr. Furtwangler defends the work, but would place it not earlier than the first century B. C. He says it is not ar- Fig. 47. Grecian. chaic, but archaistic. Whether the work be genuine or spurious I am not competent to judge. I may venture to say, however, that the attitude of the shaft-hand is very inaccurate. However absurd the drawing of the hand often is in these early Greek releases, the artists have rarely failed to adjust the arrow correctly in relation to Fig. 48. Grecian. the bend of the bow and the angle made by the string in tension. In this bas-relief of Herakles, however, the at- titude of shooting is one of which no artist capable of mak- ing so robust and correct a body and pose would be guilty, and it certainly lends some weight to the supposition of Dr. Emerson as to the possible character of the work. OF AHROW-RELEASE. 181 The accompanying figures are interesting as showing the conventional and even grotesque ways in which the arrow release is often represented on early Grecian vases. Figs. 47 and 48 are copied from Weiner Vorlage Blatter, Series D, Taf. IX, XII. Fig. 47 shows the hand reversed, with the thumb below instead of above. It is possible to shoot an arrow in this way but hardly probable that so awkward and unnatural an attitude would be taken. This release is intended to represent the tertiary release. Fig. 48 as drawn is an impossible release, though this release also may be intended to represent the tertiary release, the thumb being straight, and the arrow being held between \ Fig. 49. Grecian. Fig. 50. Grecian. the thumb and forefinger, while the second finger, and in Fig. 48 the second, third, and fourth fingers are on the string. In Monuments Inedits., Vol. i., Plate Li., is figured the famous Chalcidian or Achilles vase, supposed to have been made in the early part of the sixth century B. C. Here the archer is shown left-handed. Assuming the drawing to be correct, the release represents the archaic form (Fig. 49). Another release figured in the same volume, Plate xx., may be intended to represent the tertiary release (see Fig. 50). On Plate l., Vol. n., of the same work is fig- 182 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS ured a Grecian vase of the fourth century B. C, on which are depicted two releases which are probably the tertiary form (Fig 51). On Plate xvm. of the same volume is figured an archaic Etruscan vase on which a curious de- [Fig. 51. Grecian. lineation of an archer is given. The bow-hand is so well drawn that one is almost inclined to imagine that some mechanical device for releasing the arrow is intended by the curious representation of the shaft-hand (Fig. 52). Three other curious releases are shown in Figs. 53, 54 and Fig. 52. Etruscan. 55, the latter copied from a Greek vase (black figures on red) supposed to be of the sixth century B. C. All these, though incorrectly represented, are probably intended for the tertiary release. Fig. 56 is copied from a figure given in Auserlesene Vaserbilder, representing a Greek vase of OF ARROW-RELEASE. 183 the sixth century B. C. In this the archer's hand most certainly suggests the Mongolian release. It is true the thumb is not bent on the string, but it is bent with the second and presumably the tirst finger pressing against it. Concerning ancient Persian releases, only two have fallen Tig. 53. Grecian. Fig 54. Grecian (bas-relief). under my notice. One is preserved on a silver cup of the Sassanid Dynasty, fifth century B. C. This is figured in Monuments Inedits., Vol. in., Plate 51. In this figure the bow is a typical Manchu. The release is unquestion- ably a variety of the Mongolian release, the second and Fig. 55. Grecian. Fig. 56. Grecian. third fingers aiding the thumb, while the index finger is straight and inactive. The hand has attached to it a curious gear of leather, apparently held by a band about the wrist. Whether this suggests a finger- and thumb- 184 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS guard similar to that used by the Japanese it is difficult to determine. (Fig. 57.) In the Journal of the Eoyal Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. vii., Part I., p. 258, 1883, is a communication from Major General A. Cunningham, entitled "Relics from Ancient Persia in Gold, Silver, and Copper." These ob- jects were found on the northern bank of the Oxus. Judg- ing from the coins, the author regards the deposit as having been made not later than 180 or 200 years B. C. Among the relics was a stone cylinder, upon which were represented two Persian soldiers capturing two Scythians. The rep- resentations of the hands are too imperfect for one to judge with any precision of the character of the release in- Fig. 67. Persian. tended. The attitude of the hand in every case, however, suggests the Mongolian release. The bow is short, and of a form similar to the Manchu bow of to-day. It is in- teresting to notice that the Scythians are represented as shooting left-handed, and in this connection to recall the advice which Plato gives in regard to archery, — that both hands should be taught to draw the bow, adding that the Scythians draw the bow with either hand. In regard to Chinese archery in ancient times, the clas- sics of China abound in allusions to archery, and there can be no doubt that the release as practiced to-day is identical with the release practiced three thousand years OF ARROW-RELEASE. 185 ago. The Analects of Confucius, the Doctrine of the Mean, and other ancient writings bear ample testimony to the high esteem in which this manly art was held. In the Shi King, or book of ancient Chinese poetry (translation of Legge) , the following allusions refer to the use of the thumb-ring, which was also called a thimble, and also updn chi, or finger regulator. " With archer's thimble at his girdle hung." And again, — " Each right thumb wore the metal guard." Concerning Japanese archery methods in past times, Fig. 58. Japanese. what little evidence we have on the subject points to a Mongolian form of release. The archers have always formed a favorite study for the Japanese artist, and many details of the bow and arrow and attitudes of the archer may be got from old paintings and drawings. The rep- resentations of the hand in shooting, though often drawn conventionally, are easily interpreted as releasing the ar- row after the Mongolian method. Fig. 58 is copied from a vigorous drawing, showing the attitude of the shaft- hand in the attitude of release. In the Shinto temple at Miyajima is a picture over two hundred years old, in which the archer's hand is shown in the attitude of the ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVII 2i 186 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS Mongolian release. A picture of Tanniu, painted one hundred and fifty years ago and supposed to be a copy of a Chinese subject six or seven hundred years old, shows plainly the Mongolian release. In a picture by Keion, seven hundred years old, the archer is represented in the act of wetting with his tongue the tips of the first two fingers of his hand ; and this certainly suggests the Japa- nese form of the Mongolian release. Among the Emperor's treasures at Nara is a silver ves- sel supposed to be of the time of Tempei Jingo (765 A. D.), upon which is depicted a hunting-scene. Here the release, if correctly depicted, suggests the Mediterranean form. The bow is Mongoloid. The vessel is probably Persian : it is certainly not Japanese. The earliest allu- sions to Japanese archery are contained in "Kojiki, or Eecords of Ancient Matters," of which its translator, Mr. Basil Hall Chamberlain, says : " It is the earliest authentic literary product of that large division of the human race which has been variously denominated Turanian, Scythian, and Altaic, and even precedes by at least a century the most ancient extant literary compositions of non-Aryan India." These records take us back without question to the 7th century of our era. In this work allusion is made to the heavenly feathered arrow, to the vegetable wax-tree boiv and deer boiv, and also to the elbow pad. It is diffi- cult to understand the purpose of the elbow pad in arch- ery, assuming the same practice of the bow in ancient times as in present Japanese methods. It is difficult to believe that a pad on the elbow was needed to protect that part from the feeble impact of the string. If the pad was a sort of arm-guard surrounding the elbow, then one might surmise the use of a highly strung bow of Mon- golian form held firmly and not permitted to rotate as in the Japanese style. OF ARROAV-RELEASE. 187 The peculiar twist given the bow by the Japanese archer is, so far as I know, unique in archery practice. In Siam, a bow of curious construction is used for throw- ing clay balls. The ball is held in a netting, the string of the bow is double, the bow-hand has the thumb braced vertically against the inside of the bow, so that it may not interfere with the flight of the ball. A peculiar \\\\<\ is given the bow, so that the ball passes free from it . I know of no record to show that the Japanese ever used a bow of this nature ; in the Emperor's treasure- house at Nara, however, is preserved a curious bow nearly a thousand years old, and this is undoubtedly a bow used for throwing clay or stone balls. Instead of a netting to hold the bail there is a perforated leathern piece. This piece is adjusted to the cord a third way down the bow, at about the point from which the Japanese archer dis- charges the arrow. Whether the Japanese archer ac- quired this curious twirl of the bow to protect the feathers from rubbing against its side, or to escape the painful im- pact of the string, or, which is not improbable, acquired this novel twist from using the ball-throwing bow it is difficult to determine. In regard to the release practiced by the various tribes in India, I have no information. Through the courtesv of the lamented James Fergus- son, I was permitted to examine his large collection of photographs of Indian Temples : and in a brief examina- tion of these pictures I discovered a few releases in the sculptures. In the Peroor Temple near Coimbatore, an eight-armed God is represented as holding upright, be- tween the first and second fingers of the right hand, an arrow. It is impossible to conjecture the form of release in this attitude : though, if the arrow were carried to the string in this position, the Mediterranean release would be suggested. 188 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS On the southwest face of the temple of Halabeed, My- sore, an archer is shown with the arrow already released ; the attitude of the hand, however, suggests the Mediter- ranean form. In the Valconda, a small, ruined temple near Calamapoor, archers are shown having the tips of all the fingers on the string, in the same position as shown in the later Assyrian release ; and this would indicate the secondary release. These data are altogether too few and vasrue to deter- mine the form or forms of release of these people. Concerning ancient methods of archery in America, but little can be said. Probably the most reliable data are to be found in the few Mexican records which survived the shocking desecration by the Catholic Church at the time of the Conquest.1 An examination of the plates of Kingsborough's" Mexi- can Antiquities" reveals a number of hunters and warriors armed with bows and arrows. The figures at best are somewhat rudely drawn ; those that are in action have the shaft-hand so poorly drawn that in most cases it is diffi- cult to make out the release. In the few drawings in which the attitude of the shaft-hand is clearly shown, the tertiary release is probably indicated. To Mrs. Zelia Nuttall Pinart I am indebted for tracings of archers from the Atlas Duran, Plate i., and Mapjpe Quinatzin i, Plate iv. These, though quite as ambiguous as those to be found in Kingsborough's, can only be inter- preted as representing the tertiary release. In the latter 1 The fiercely intolerant spirit of the representatives of the church is well il- lustrated by the language of a letter written by Zumarraga, the chief inquisitor of Mexico, to the Franciscan chapter at Tolosa, in January, 1531. The words are as follows : uVery reverend Father, be it known to you that we are very busy in the work of converting the heathen; of whom, by the grace of God, upwards of one million have been baptized at the hands of the brethren of the order of our Seraphic Father. Saint Francis; five hundred temples have been levelled to the ground, and more than twenty thousand figures of the devils they worshipped have been broken to pieces and burned."— ExavipUs of Iconoclasm by the Conquerors of Mexico, by W. U. Holmes, OF ARROW-RELEASE. 189 work, Plates 90 and 93 of Vol. II. show apparently a Mediterranean release ; and were there no other reasons for believing that these people practiced the tertiary re- lease, it might be assumed that the Mediterranean release; was also practiced. The reasons are, first, that in every case the arrow is pulled to the breast or even lower ; and, second, and of more importance, in every instance when the archer is shown with the right hand toward the observer, the arrow is below the bow-hand, whereas in every case when the archer is shown with the left hand towards the observer, the arrow is above the bow-hand. The bow is represented vertically, as in all rude and early figures ; but the artist, not being able to represent the bow foreshortened and horizontal, has unconscious^ indicated the attitude of the tertiary release by preserving the atti- tude of the bow in relation to the hand. We have seen that the Mediterranean release has two forms, in one of which three fingers are brought into action ; in the other only two fingers are so used. Eng- lish authorities say that if one can accustom himself to draw the bow with two fingers, a better release is the re- sult. While the diiFerence between these two forms seems slight, as indeed it is, yet the practice to-day among Eu- ropean and American archers is to draw with three fin- gers. It was evidently not so universally the form in Europe a few centuries ago ; for at this time, judging from the few examples we have seen, the archers are al- most always depicted drawing with two fingers. It is true, the directions in the works of these early times as well as allusions to the subject state that three fingers on the string is the proper method of release. Yet the few sculptures, ivory carvings, etchings, manuscripts, draw- ings, etc., to which we have had access, almost invariably depict the two-fingered release. It would be interesting to know whether the bow has 190 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS become stiffer in later years, requiring three fingers to bend it, or whether (as more probable) the fingers have become weaker, thus requiring more fingers to do the work. It is interesting to find in these early works a uni- formity in the method of release employed, and that the Saxon, Norman, Fleming, French, English, Scandinavian, and Italian practiced essentially the same release. Hansard says (see the "Book of Archery," p. 77), "All representations of archers which occur in illuminated manuscripts of the thirteenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth centuries — and I have examined some scores of them — identify the ancient with the modern practice. The pen- and-ink drawings of John de Rous, a bowman as well as contemporary biographer of that Earl of Warwick who, during the Wars of the Red and White Roses, was the setter up and destroyer of many kings, will furnish amusement and information to the curious. The neces- sary slight inclination of the head and neck — ? this laying of the body in the bow,' the drawing with two and with three fingers — are there correctly delineated. They may be found among the manuscripts in the British Museum." According to Hansard, Ascham ordered the shooting- glove to be made with three fingers, "and when Henry the Fifth harangued his troops previous to the battle of Agincourt, he endeavoured to exasperate their minds by dwelling on the cruelties in store for them. Addressing his archers, he said the French soldiers had sworn to am- putate their three first fingers, so that they should never more be able to slay man or horse."1 1 Meyrick, in his famous work on "Ancient Armour" (Vol. I., p. 9), in speaking of the origin of the bow in England, says : '* The bow as a weapon of war was cer- tainly introduced by the Normans; the Saxons, like the Taheite at the present day, used it merely for killing birds. On this account, in the speech which Henry ol Huntington puts into the Conqueror's mouth before the battle, he makes him stigmatize the Saxon as ' a nation not even having arrows.' " OF ARROW-RELEASE. 191 The earliest figure I have met with, illustrating archery in England, was copied from the Saxon manuscripts in the Cotton Library. These manuscripts are of the eighth century. If the wood-cut contained in Strutt's f Sports and Pastimes " is correct, then the attitude of the hands shows distinctly the three-lingered Mediterranean release. The bow is short and thick, and has a double curve, something like the Roman bow, from which indeed it might naturally have been derived.1 The following examples have come under my notice in a very hasty and imperfect survey of the field, principally derived from books, engravings, and ivory carvings, re- productions, etc., in museums. The celebrated Bayenx Tapestry, a copy of which may be seen at the South Kensington Museum, represents the archers in the attitude of the two-fingered Mediterra- nean release, though a few are shown using three fingers. Also the following show the two-fingered form of the Med- iterranean release without exception : a fresco in Kumla Church, Vestmanland Co., Sweden, 1492 ; a sculptured figure in wood by Albrecht Durer, figured in Som- merard's "Arts of the Middle Ages" (5th Series, Plate xxvii.), also in the same work (10th Series, Plate xxv.) ; a chess piece in ivory supposed to be of the tenth or eleventh century ; in Meyrick's "Ancient Armour" (Plate viii., Vol. i.), a figure of a Norman of the eleventh cen- tury, on the doorway of the Cathedral of Amiens, a cast of which may be seen at the Trocedero Museum ; and, finally, in the Boston Museum of Fine Arts are a number of Florentine engravings of the early half of the fifteenth century, and these in every case represent in the 1 It may be well to state here that opportunity has not permitted an examina- tion of sources for early Ro.nan releases. On Trajan's column a few releases are shown, and these are of the Mediterranean form. 192 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS clearest manner the two-fingered variety of the Mediter- ranean release. A curious form of the Mediterranean release is shown on the door of the Church of the Made- leine at Vezelay, a cast of which is to be seen at Troce- dero Museum. In this release the archer has all four fingers on the string, the arrow being held between the second and third fingers. I had supposed that this was a mistake of the artist, as indeed it may have been, but Col. James Stevenson, in describing to me the methods of re- lease among the Navajo Indians of North America, illus- trated a release identical with this four-fingered variety. In conclusion, it is interesting to observe that all the re- leases thus far described have been practiced from the earliest historic times. Each release with the exception of the primary release, which admits of no variation, has one or more varieties. The secondary release may have the second finger, or the second and third fingers on the string. Some forms of this release in India and Assyria show all the fingers on the string ; it is hardly probable, however, that these are correctly represented. The terti- ary release may have the first and second, or the first, second, and third fingers on the string. The Mediterranean release may be effected with two or three fingers, and in two instances all the finders, on the string. The Mongolian release may have the assistance only of the first finger as in the Chinese and Manchu, or the first and second fingers as in the Korean and Japanese, — or, if rightly interpreted, the early Persian form, with the second and third only aiding the thumb ; and if the Mongolian release described on page 161 be an established form, then we have here a mixture of Mongolian and secondary. The persistence of a release in a people is well illustrated in the case of the Aino. For centuries the Ainos have OF ARROW-RELEASE. 193 battled with the Japanese, and must have been mindful of the superior archery of their enemies ; indeed on all hands, with the exception possibly of the Kamtschadals at the north, the Ainoshave been surrounded by races practicing the Mongolian release, and yet have adhered to their primitive methods of shooting. The releases vary in their efficiency and strength. The two strongest and perhaps equally powerful releases are the Mediterranean and Mongolian ; and it is interesting to note the fact that the two great divisions of the human family who can claim a history, and who have been all dominant in the affairs of mankind, are the Mediterranean nations and the Mongolians. For three or four thousand years, at least, each stock has had its peculiar arrow-re- lease, and this has persisted through all the mutations of time to the present day. Language, manners, customs, religions have in the course of centuries widely separated these two great divisions into nations. Side by side they have lived ; devastating wars and wars of conquest have marked their contact ; and yet the apparently trivial and simple act of releasing the arrow from the bow has re- mained unchanged. At the present moment the European and Asiatic archer, shooting now only for sport, practice each the release which characterized their remote ancestors. Want of material will prevent more than a passing ref- erence to a peculiar practice of archery which Moseley alludes to as pedestrial archery. It is a matter of com- mon record that in widely separated parts of the world, as South America, China, and Africa, the archer uses his feet in drawing the bow. In an " Essay of Archery " by Walter Michael Moseley, 1792, the writer says : "It is recorded by ancient writers that the Ethiopians draw the bow with the feet ;" and again, Xenophon speaking of the Caducians says : " They had bows which were three cubits long, and ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVH 25 194 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS arrows two cubits. When they made use of these weapons, they placed their left foot oa the bottom of the bow, and by that method they drove their arrows with great vio- lence," etc. It is recorded of the Arabians that they used their bows in the manner above alluded to, by the help of the foot. The release in these cases must be of a most vigorous character ; and when in some accounts the archer is rep- resented as resting on his back, with both feet bracing against the bow, the string is probably clutched with both hands, after the manner I have provisionally called the archaic release. In the following classified list of releases and the peo- ple who practice them, it is shown in a general way that the primary, secondary, and tertiary releases are practiced by savage races to-day, as well as by certain civilized races of ancient times ; while the Mediterranean and Mongolian re- leases, though originating early in time, have always char- acterized the civilized and dominant races. The exceptions to this generalization are curious : the Little Andaman islanders practicing the Mediterranean release, and the inhabitants of the Great Andaman Island practicing the tertiary release, are an illustration. The fact that the vari- ous groups of Eskimo practicing the Mediterranean release, and so far as I know being the only people who have de- signed a distinct form of arrow for this method, is exceed- ingly curious. Mr. John Murdock, who is engaged in a careful study of the Eskimo, has expressed to me a sur- mise that certain arts of the Eskimo may have been derived from Greenland through Scandinavian colonists ; and this might explain the anomaly. It may be shown that in tribes in which the bow is but little used, and then only for small birds and game, the release is weak or irregular. The data, however, are alto- gether too few to establish any conclusions respecting this. OF ARROW-RELEASE, 195 CLASSIFIED LIST OF TRIBES AND NATIONS REFERRED TO IN THIS PAPER. RECENT. Primary release. Savage. Ainos of Yezo. . Demerara, S. A. Navajo, N. A. Chippewa, N. A. Micmac, Canada. Penobscot, N. A. . Ute, N. A. ? Secondary release. Savage. Ottawa, N. A. . Zuni, N. A. . ... Chippewa, N. A. . Tertiary release. observed. published. reported. observed, photograph. observed. reported. Savage. Omaha, N. A observed. Sioux, N. A reported. Arapahoes, N. A. . . . " Cheyennes, N. A. . " Assiniboins, N. A. . . " Comanches, N. A. . . . " Crows, N. A " Blackfeet. ..... " Navajos, N. A " Great Andaman Islander . published. Civilized. Siamese observed. Mediterranean release. Civilized. European Nations. Savage. Point Barrow Eskimo. Cumberland Sound Eskimo. East Cape Siberia Eskimo. Little Andaman Islander. observed and published. reported, published. 196 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS Mongolian release. Civilized. Manchu soldier, China. . . observed. Cantonese, China. . . " Korean " Japanese. . . . . " Turks. published. Persians. .... " Irregular release. Temiangs, Sumatra. . . observed. ANCIENT. Primary release. Civilized. Assyrian, early. Egyptian. Grecian? Secondary release. Civilized. Assyrian, later. India? Tertiary release. Civilized. Egyptian. Grecian. Mexican ? Mediterranean release. Civilized. Assyrian, later. Egyptian, early. Arabian. Indian. Roman. Middle Ages. English. French. Norman. Fleming. Saxon. Swede. Florentine. OF ARROW-RELEASE. 1U7 Mongolian release. Civilized. Chinese. Scythian. Persian. Egyptian. ? Greek. ? Archaic release? Civilized. Ancient Greek. It is hardly necessary to call attention to the importance of a more systematic study of the methods of archery and paraphernalia of the archers than has yet been done. I would point out the necessity of observing greater care in copying drawings, rock-inscriptions, frescos, bas-reliefs, etc., as to the minor details, — such as the position of the hand, the shape and character of the ends of the bow and arrow, and the shape of the feathers ; also the possi- bility and importance of identifying among ancient objects and drawings arm-guards, thumb-rings, arrow-rests, etc. Travellers and explorers ought also not only to observe the simple fact that such and such people use bows and arrows, but they should accurately record, (1) the atti- tude of the shaft hand; (2) whether the bow is held vertically or horizontally ; (3) whether the arrow is to the right or to the left of the bow vertical ; and (4), of which no comment has been made in this paper, whether extra arrows are held in the bow-hand or shaft-hand. The method of bracing the bow is of importance also. The remarkable persistence of certain forms of arrow- release among various nations leads me to believe, that, in identifying the affinities of past races, the method of using the bow may form another point in establishing or dis- proving relationships. By knowing with more certainty the character and limitation of the forms of arrow-release, 198 ANCIENT AND MODERN METHODS OF ARROW-RELEASE. another clew may be got as to the date and nature of frag- ments of sculpture representing the hand. The peculiar attitude of the archer might lead to the interpretation of armless statues. The author would be very grateful for any information regarding the methods of arrow-release of tribes and peo- ples. Particularly would he desire the release as practiced by the Veddahs of Ceylon, the Hill tribes of India, the tribes of Africa, South America, and especially the Fue- gans. Indeed, any information regarding the methods of arrow-release in any part of the world would be accept- able. Such material in the shape of descriptions, photo- graphs, drawings, and if possible specimens of bows and arrows, may be sent to the author, Peabody Academy of Science, Salem, Mass., U.S.A., for which full credit will be given in a future publication on this subject. In addition to those already mentioned in these pages to whom the author is under obligations, he would men- tion Gen. Charles A. Loring, Mr. Edward Robinson, Prof. Otis T. Mason, Rev. W. C. Winslow, Mr. T. F. Hunt, Dr. W. S. Bigelow, Prof. John Robinson, Mr. S. R. Koeller, and Prof. E. F. Fenollosa, who have in various ways rendered him kind assistance. BULLETIN ESSEX INSTITUTE, VOLUME XVIII. 1886. SALEM, MASS. PRINTED AT THE SALEM PRESS 1887. CONTENTS, Page Mr. Toppan's New Process for Scouring Wool; by John Ritchie, Jr., 1 The Climatology of the United States ; by Frank R. Kimball, 15 Annual Meeting, Monday, May 17, 1886, 51 Election of officers, 51 ; report of the committee on plans to remodel the Daland estate, 52 ; retrospect of the year, 56 ; members, 56; meetings, 65; field meetings, 66; library, 71; financial, 82; excursion, 83; rose show, 84; museum, 85; abstract of secretary's report, 86. Dermatochelys Coriacea, Trunk Back or Leathery Turtle ; by J. H. Sears, 87 List of Native and Introduced Plants observed in flower in the vicinity of Salem, during the spring of 1886, on or before May 1 ; by J. H. Sears, 95 The Development of Crangon Vulgaris (second paper) ; by J. S Kingsley, 99 Conventionalism in Ancient American Art ; by F. W. Putnam, 155 A few additional notes concerning Indian Games ; by Andrew McFarland Davis, 168 (iii) BULLETIN ESSEX HTSTITTJTE. Vol. 18. Salem: Jan., Feb., Mar., 1886. Nos. 1-3. MR. TOPPAN'S NEW PROCESS FOR SCOURING WOOL. JOHN RITCHIE, JR. Read before the Essex Institute, March 15, 1886. Ladies and Gentlemen, — Two years ago, almost to a day, I had the pleasure of discussing before you what was at that time a new process of bleaching cotton and cotton fabrics, — a process which, since that day, has been developed with steadily increasing value by a company doing business under Mr. Top- pan's inventions. This evening [March 15] I desire your attention to a consideration of the effects of the same solvent principle upon that other great textile material, wool. The lecture of two years ago was illustrated by the pro- cesses themselves, practically performed before your eyes. It is our intention this evening to follow out the same plan and to illustrate and, so far as may be, prove by experiment the statements which shall be made. It is our intention to scour upon the platform various speci- mens of wool, and as well, to dye before you such colors as can be fixed within a time which shall not demand, upon your part, too much of that virtue, patient waiting. Mr. Toppan, who needs no introduction to this audience, will undertake, later in the evening, the scouring of wool, and Mr. Frank Sherry, of Franklin, has kindly offered to assist in the work of dyeing. To those of you who are not familiar with the authorities in this country, in the work of dyeing, I need only say, that Mr. Sherry is an expert in his chosen business, and that his books are the standard in a majority of the mills in New England and in Canada. Inas- much as the time necessary for dyeing is somewhat long, 2 MR. toppan's new process Mr. Sherry will begin at once, in order that his specimens may be ready for your inspection at the close of the lecture. Before proceeding to the discussion of wool, allow me to refer briefly to the principal statements of the previous lec- ture, of which this is indeed but a continuation. A reduction in the time necessary for bleaching was claimed. This claim has been substantiated in practice. The process will bleach the goods in one half the time of the next best practical process. As to color and quality, you can judge for yourselves. I have brought here bleached cottons in the piece for your inspection. A bleacher of my acquaintance, who has no interests at stake, being engaged in a specialty with which these goods do not compete, has assured me that he considers the Toppan bleached goods as fifteen to twenty per cent better in a monetary sense, than the same goods by the old process. The white proves to be permanent ; and when it is question of sewing the material, I am assured by ladies, that the ease with which it can be sewed, both by hand and on the machine, pays many times over for the trouble it is to find the article, which, as yet, has not secured a uni- versal distribution throughout the stores. The position of opponents to the process has changed. After the previous lecture, I was many times assured that, while the results of experiments with small swatches of cloth were very good, yet, on a large scale, the method would fail. This feeling or opinion has disappeared before practical results, and the question of cost is now raised. This is a considera- tion which it is not at all my province to discuss, but I can say in passing, that the Canton Company will give the Toppan bleach at the same price per yard as do the bleachers by the old system. It has been and will always be urged against new chemical processes in the arts, that practice in the mill does not follow closely enough the experiments in the laboratory; that a process which can easily be applied to a small quantity of material fails, through inability to use it on a large scale. This was the objection urged against the cotton bleach, and I should not be surprised if it were urged against the wool scour. There is this, however, to be considered : in the scouring of wool, the mill reproduces very closely the condi- tions of this platform, or the laboratory. Instead of handling goods by the ton, as in cotton bleaching, the wool is treated in lots of a few pounds each, and the care which the experi- ment here will of course receive, will not be so disproportion- ate as in other cases. The laboratory experiments on cotton FOR SCOURING WOOL. 3 have been confirmed in the mill, and by analogy we expect that, in the case of wool, the results will agree equally well. The scour has been practically worked a number of times in establishments, some of which are to-day under contract to scour by this method, and it is from the lips of practical woolen men that I have evidence of the success of the scour on a large scale. When the date of this lecture was fixed, I hoped to be able to present to you the actual figures of several weeks' work, but the weather of the past two months, with the delay imposed by it upon transportation, has prevented the erection of the plant upon which I counted. The machinery is now set, but it is too early to give reports from it. There is but little doubt that wool was in use before vege- table fibres, for the manufacture of fabrics, since it is, in its natural state, almost ready for the uses of a primitive people. It possesses fineness, flexibility, elasticity, — qualities not to be found in an equal degree in vegetable fibres in common use ; and it is practically a process of little difficulty to render it fairly available for ordinary usages. Its great difference, from a bleacher's point of view, lies in its susceptibility to heat, and the workman is, therefore, not able to apply to it the hot, length)'- processes which are used to whiten cotton. The strong caustics weaken the wool, and chlorine attacks it at the ordinary temperature, turning it a per- manent yellow. These are the bleaching agents for cotton, and they cannot be used. Wool is full of that grease and oil which serve to protect sheep against the weather, and usually bears with it quantities of dirt which mere washing fails to carry away. The work of the bleach, or scour, as it is termed when it is question of wool, has varied little since its invention, and the industry was, in all probability, known to the Romans, who brought into England, at the time of their invasion, the art of working wool, their establishments being located where Winchester now is. Wool scouring is simply a repetition of gentle treatment with soaps and lukewarm alkaline baths, and does not require a great length of time. The object of the process is to pro- duce the whitest wool possible without loss of its elastic quality, or loftiness, as it is termed. At its best, the process of scouring, as practised to-day in our scouring mills, does not produce white wool, and furthermore, the scoured wools gradually yellow. When the wool is to be used for dyed goods in dark colors, the white may not be considered the most important requirement; but when white goods are de- 4 MR. TOPPANS NEW PROCESS sired, the additional and disagreeable operation of sulphuring becomes necessary. Mr. Toppan's method of scouring involves the use of two preparations : first, the compound ; and second, the anti-com- pound, or as it has been termed, the S liquor. The compound is made from petroleum products, and is closely allied to the cotton bleach. This is a perfect solvent for the oil and fatty matter, and softens and disengages the dirt. The S liquor is a solvent for the compound and washes it out of the wool. A simple wash in cold water completes the process, which does not vary much from that in use to-day. The scouring of wool (differing from the bleaching of cot- ton) is the first step in its manufacture, and in his work the scourer must have consideration for the succeeding operations. The better the condition of the wool for spinning, weaving, dyeing, the more successful the scour. Mr. Toppan's scour is of such nature, that the succeeding processes in manufacture are prepared for in a remarkable degree. We will consider first the process itself, then the advan- tages in the after-processes. In the regular course of work at one of our woolen mills, I noted some time since a series of scours at about twenty min- utes to the scour. This was said to be quick work, and the operator said that the stock (Cal. spring clip) was needed at once. The scour was, even to the inexperienced eye, some- what imperfect. It was evident that the process had not been carried far enough to fully cleanse the wool, and sticking as it did to the squeeze rolls, it gave evidence of the presence of oil and gum. The usual time for scouring is, I am informed, not far from half an hour, varying of course with the nature of the wool. With heat, and with strong alkali, the process may be shortened in point of time, but attempts to economize in this way are dangerous. This I can illustrate experimentally, and the experiment is of interest to housekeepers, as well as to wool men. It is one of the first points which should be appreciated by wool scourers. I am rather loath to believe the statement which I have clipped from a trade paper: — " It is a fact not generally appreciated by wool washers, that wool can be dissolved until nothing is left visible. Hot water alone will not do this, wool may be boiled without being dissolved ; but put a little caustic potash, or anything of simi- lar nature, into the water, even if it be far from boiling, and FOR SCOURING WOOL. 5 the wool will rapidly disappear : the hotter the water, the more quickly it will melt." This melting of wool is, indeed, an instructive experiment, and is of sufficient character to be shown, even upon the plat- form. It will require two or three minutes only, and I have prepared it for your instruction. I have here an alkaline solution of twenty degrees Baume. This little instrument measures the specific gravity of liquids, and is the common way of testing their strength. The alkali stands at twenty, Baume, its temperature is 170, quite a little less than boiling. Water at this temperature is rather hot to hold one's hands in, but is not hot enough to really scald them. Into this liquid I drop a quantity of wool. In a short time the wool will be dissolved. Three minutes have sufficed in previous experiments, and I think it will be time enough in this instance. The wool disappears in the liquid, just as sugar does in your coffee. I pour this mixture through a glass funnel — you see that there are no lumps of wool in it. I pass it through a cold metal strainer, an opera- tion that will show what has been done. The meshes have caught a white substance, which is a soap of wool. All fibre, or fibrous appearance, has disappeared. The experiment is by no means a new one. Elwell, in his modern chemistry, published in 1806, speaks of a process which Chaptal had lately invented, whereby wool, instead of oil, was to be combined with an alkali to produce soap. The object was probably commercial manufacture of soap. Now, in order to economize time, I have dissolved the wool in strong alkali. Other experiments, made especially for this occasion, give the following results : — 20 degrees 3 minutes. 15 " 3 minutes. 10 " 5 minutes. 5 " 25 minutes. In these experiments there has been a considerable amount of instruction in other departments than the dissolving of wool. We tried some goods which were bought for all wool, and so warranted. It was astonishing how much material there was left after we had dissolved out all the wool, and it would not be surprising if, after all, some cotton had crept by mistake into these all-wool goods. At all events, it acted under the burning test exactly the same as cotton. Now, in the washing of woolen fabrics, you can all apply the experiment without difficulty. I do not mean to insinuate 6 MR. TOPPAX'S NEW PROCESS that there is a single lady here present who does not know a great deal better than I do about flannels and blankets and their treatment. But there are sometimes agents and assist- ants in our houses whose natures are poorly understood. I have before me the directions taken from a package of well-known and much-used soap powder: — " To each pail of water add one tablespoonful. If the water is hard, increase the quantity. Clothes wash easier if soaked over night." I dissolved a tablespoonful of this powder in half a pail of water and the specific gravity was five degrees Baume. In other words, twice the minimum direction quantity of powder produces an alkaline solution which will dissolve wool in half an hour, and with the liberty given in the directions to in- crease the quantity, and the knowledge that a larger quantity will perform the required work in a shorter time, servants, and even housekeepers themselves, may, and often do subject their clothing to a dangerous test, which, in proportion to the violence of the process, washes away — dissolves out — the wool. Soap powders are of value, but there should go with their use a knowledge of their nature, — an appreciation of what may result from careless application of their properties. The experiment has shown, to a certain extent, the points which the scourer of wool must care for, heat and strength of alkali. Greater heat and greater strength are the tempta- tions. The efficacy of heat is so great that it may well be believed that as high a temperature will be maintained as is outside the limits of real danger to the fibre. It is also evi- dent that, to a certain extent, or rather within certain limits, the greater the distance from the danger heat, the better the results, and a process which will scour wool at a lower tem- perature has its advantages, in the better condition of the scoured wool. The usual temperature to-day is from 130 to 135 degrees F. Mr. Toppan's scour produces its results at 120 degrees at the outside. This fact, of itself, assures greater strength of fibre. The time necessary for scouring wool is, as I have stated, not far from half an hour. I have seen it clone quicker, but really good results require about this time. Mr. Toppan's process has somewhat the advantage in point of time. The capacity of a scouring machine, which I saw at work some time ago, is about 900 lbs. of clean wool in a day often hours. It was at work on Cal. spring clip. A short time before my visit, the same machine had turned out,*with the same number of attendants, 400 lbs. of the same wool in three FOR SCOURING WOOL. 7 and a half hours, or at the rate of 1,200 lbs. per day of ten hours. It is safe to say that the Toppan process can produce from one third to one half more wool in the same time, and from the same machine, than the old scour. I have seen a scour done in ten minutes actual time, but the machinery, running for the first time, so delayed the transfer of the stock from one vat to another, that the time of the whole scour was about equal to that of the process of to-day. The scouring of wool is not an expensive process, so far as the chemicals used are concerned. The bill for labor is really of more consequence than that for the scour. I have had es- timates from two or three different sources. From one mill I have an estimate that the cost of scouring is less than a quar- ter of a cent per pound ; from another, and one of the best processes, the expense of scouring 2,000 lbs. of Texas wool is given as $2.79, or .135 cent, or a little more than an eighth. The expense of scouring 2,006 lbs. of the very same wool by the Toppan process was $5.07, or .2527 cent, almost ex- actly one quarter of a cent per pound. Economy in the cost of the scouring liquor is not claimed by Mr. Toppan, but, on the other hand, an increase, at the out- side, to twice the expense is conceded. But when it is known that the saving in oil will probably offset this loss, the disad- vantage disappears. And then again, with the ability to pro- duce in the same time, with the same plant, and the same force of workmen, twice or three times the amount of scoured wool, this disadvantage can hardly be urged. With a material in use to the extent that wool is, a saving of any considerable amount of the material itself is an item not to be passed unconsidered. It is a fact that wool scoured by Mr. Toppan's process yields a higher percentage of white scoured wool than do the scours of the day. Although the operation of wool scouring has been begun at Canton, it is to night too early to furnish comparative shrinkages from large quantities. Shrinkage in wool is a variable quantity. It is different in different lots of the same wool, and indeed in different parts of the same fleece. In order to determine the comparative shrinkage from small lots, it would be necessary to take wool from the same lot and treat it by the old and the new process as nearly as possible under the same conditions. This result would be definitive. The average shrinkage by the old process is, however, fixed from the results of many scours, and it is possible to state quite postively the shrinkage due to the scour. 8 MR. toppan's new process When a sufficient number of scours have been made by the Toppan process, the average of these will be comparable with the figures now known with reference to the present systems. But if I cannot quote figures of my own, I have fortunately a series of experiments which are as reliable as anything can be expected to be under the circumstances. Last year the Manufacturers' Review and Industrial Record of New York undertook a series of experiments which were conducted by their own men and, as they claim in their jour- nal, for their own information only. In order that an authoritative statement might be made to the trade, a series of tests and experiments was decided upon and Mr. W. B. Guild, the manager of their New England agency, was given entire charge of proceedings, with full authority to employ a dyer of his own selection to make any tests desired. The experiments were made for convenience at Canton and occupied several days. The utmost accuracy was maintained in the observations, and the weighing was done by Mr. Guild himself. The results of these experiments I give in the words of the report as published in the Record : — " The first test was taking 4§ oz. of Texas fleece which was estimated to give a very heavy percentage of shrink. This was placed in the scour liquor at 120 deg. F. for five minutes, and then passed through an S liquor about one and a half to two minutes. There resulted from this 2^ oz. of extremely clean, white, and handsome wool." The loss in weight in the specimen, through shrinkage, was 38 J per cent. The other experiments are thus described, one of them being with a yellow buck fleece : — " The yellow buck fleece was obtained for the purpose of getting the worst to scour that could be found. It was what is called a regular ' yellow bottom,' completely saturated with grease. The tags were very badly matted, and in order to get this fleece approximately clean and free from grease, with tags duly cleansed, etc., it required, by the old soda pro- cess, from twenty to thirty minutes, and even at that time the wool, though passably clean, was far from white or handsome. The average percentage of clean wool resulting from a num- ber of trials by the soda process, made as fairly as possible, was 30^ per cent clean wool. "By the Toppan process, the same wool was scoured perfectly dean, at a temperature of about 1230, in time from two and a half to five minutes. This, when put through the S water (which worked as well, either warm or cold) for FOR SCOURING WOOL. 9 about two minutes, gave a result in clean wool of 39 ,3(T per cent. These tests were made with especial care to get an average of the fleece for each style of scour, to give the soda scour 1300 to 1350 of heat, giving each about the same amount of liquor per pound of wool ; and giv- ing the Toppan process from 1200 to 1300 of heat, the average being 1200, which was found to give most satisfactory results. In every case, after the two and a half minute or five minute scour by the Toppan process, the yellow buck fleece came out far handsomer and cleaner than by the soda scour, even at thirty minutes. The yellow tinge was also bleached out, which was not the case when cleaned with soda." The old scour yielded about 30 per cent clean wool. The Toppan yielded less than 40 per cent clean wool, an increase of not far from one third in quantity. "After this«a number of experiments were made in washing a yellow buck fleece estimated to shrink about 69 per cent ; also with an Australian merino fleece estimated to shrink about 45 per cent by former methods. "The Australian fleece by the soda process gave 53^ per cent clean wool ; scoured by the Toppan process, it gave 6iy per cent clean wool, a gain on the gross weight of 7^ per cent in clean wool, or of the net clean wool, a gain of over 13 per cent in actual clean wool. " Regarding the time for washing of Australian fleece, also the yellow buck fleece, we give the following tabulated state- ments, and have samples in our Boston office which show exactly the results produced. u We have one sample each, scoured in the following man- ner, with the scour bath made up, as stated, one half ounce of Toppan compound to the gallon of water : — AUSTRALIAN FLEECE. Time. Heat. Result. 5m. 1300 Very clean and white. 2m. 1350 Extremely clean and white. ijm. 1230 Handsomer than 20m. soda scour. 10m. ioo° Handsomer than 20m. soda scour. YELLOW BUCK FLEECE. Time. Heat. Result. 2^m. 1350 Very handsome. 5m. 1300 Very handsome. 4^m. in0 Good. 15m. " ioo° Handsome. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. 2 10 " The buck fleece, from its superior whiteness and in every way handsomer appearance, was in every case superior to the soda-scoured product, and in most cases so much so that it seemed incredible that it should have come from the same fleece." While practice may or may not prove these percentages to be exact, it can be said that they were obtained by the most careful experiment, and to-day they represent our very best knowledge upon the subject. They point without doubt to a saving of some value in the weight of the scoured wool. Wool product of the world in 1871 was. ... 2,000,000,000 lbs. Australian product in 1883 400,000,000 lbs. United States in 1885 100,000,000 lbs. Imports into United States in 1885 100,000,000 lbs. This will give some idea of the enormous amount of wool employed in our manufactures ; and the process which can save to the consumer 10 per cent, or even 5 per cent, is of the highest value. To show the power of Mr. Toppan's compound as a solvent, I have here one extreme example : At Hall's Mills, Hallville, Conn., some experimental scourings had been made with good result ; more as a joke, perhaps, than in sober earnest, the superintendent said, "Well, I can give you something that you cannot scour," and he picked up a quantity of wool waste. This is torn from the wool in the different processes through which it goes, and is considered to be of absolutely no value. It is soaked with oil from the machines and the floor, and in practice is used as waste for wiping the machinery and is then burned. This was the material which was produced. I have some of it in this test tube, and I think that you can all see it or at least its color. Mr. Toppan tried it by way of experiment, giving it a scour of three minutes' duration. The result I have here in this other test tube, and I think you can all see a difference. This cannot be cleansed by the old scour at all, yet it has a fairly long staple, and is an article of some commercial value. It is much better than shoddy for purposes for which shoddy is used, and is literally a production of something from noth- ing. As a test of the solvent power of the compound, it is striking in the extreme. The opinion of an expert, with reference to comparative color and value, should not be passed over without comment, and the statement that the yellow tinge of the yellow buck fleece was removed, shows that the Toppan process is capable of better results in difficult cases than is the soda process. ■ FOR SCOURING WOOL. ] 1 And even further than this, the yellow ta^s have been scoured by Mr. Toppan, and put into condition to take light- colored dyes. The white color of scoured wools is not permanent. When kept in stock, the scoured wool gradually assumes a yellow cast. The reason for this lies in the fact that in the scour, the animal oil is not all scoured out, and sufficient remains in the wool to come out after a time and show its color. It is a whitewashing, and, after a while, ihe natural color comes to the surface. The same is true of cotton. Cotton yellows, and there seems to be no way to prevent it, except- ing at the expense of the fibre. Mr. Toppan's cottons, and his wools as well, retain their color. Specimens here have been scoured a sufficiently long time ago to prove this fact. Wool scoured by this process is already mordanted for many colors. A mordant is a bond of union between mate- rial and the dye, and where there is dyeing of fabric or fibre, there is, I think, almost without exception, the preparatory process of mordanting. There are a dozen — possibly two dozen — shades which can now be dyed without mordant in some shape. In the case of wool, mordanting consists in boiling the wool for some hours in the mordant. It is pitched into vats, stirred, to secure an even distribution of the liquor throughout the mass, is forked out, and is then ready for the dyer. This process, with the loss of time and with the injury to the wool that results from two handlings and a stirring, is completely eliminated in the Toppan wool. The compound is in itself a mordant for many colors commonly used, and enough of it remains in the fibre to prepare it for the dye. This is equally true of cotton, and, if you remember, at the other lecture, I had pieces of print which had been printed without mordant. The dyes take equally well on goods in the piece, without mordant. The saving in expense, by leaving out the mordant, is more than enough to pay for the scour. The colors which need no mordant, when applied after Mr. Toppan's scour, comprise a very larg. variety of light shades, ■both in anilines and in wood colors. Mr. Frank Sherry, who is here this evening, knows more about the dyeing of wool scoured by this process than any other man living, and has been experimenting for a year nearly, with these scoured wools. He can tell you all about it in the practical work, in the dye-room, and in the labora- tory, and dyers can learn more from him, in this special fea- ture-, than from me. 12 mr, toppan's new process I will simply give to you a few of the most salient points, and leave the technical parts, which would probably be of little interest to the major part of the audience, until I have finished, when Mr. Sherry will be pleased to answer any questions you may see fit to ask of him. Er^ After mordanting the wool, it is put into the dye-vats, and remains in the hot dye for some hours. Throughout this time the wool is constantly stirred or poled, in order that the dye may take evenly. This poling is an injury to the wool. | The absorptive quality of the compound causes the dye to take more quickly, and it is evenly distributed. Mr. Sherry says : — "The dyes take quicker, more evenly, with less poling, and probably with less dye. And further than that, ihe Toppan wool, being at least two shades whiter than any other scour, the color produced is proportionately brighter. The color is also permanent." There are here wools done by Mr. Sherry, for Mr. Guild. They have been lying for nine months exposed to the light of two windows ; one east and the other south, and within a couple of feet of the latter. There are some of the colors which are considered as rather hard to hold, yet a close exam- ination fails to show any variation in shade. Here is yarn which was dyed in 1876 and has held its color. There is another value to goods which are already mor- danted, and that is with reference to household or home dyes. These dyes are very good under many circumstances, but they must be so put up as to be worked by the inexpert. They lie, therefore, under the disadvantage of not being mordanted, as a rule. The application of a mordant involves another process, and although in some instances the mordants are also given, yet this is usually not the case. The successful working of these colors without a mordant precludes the use of many beautiful shades, and they are as a rule quiet in tone. With goods which are already mordanted, the value of house- hold dyes is largely increased. I have samples of wools dyed in these dyes, and to them I invite your special attention. Wool scoured by Mr. Toppan's process has been woven a number of times in different mills in this country at dates as far back as 1878. And by the way, it is interesting to ex- amine specimens which have been made this seven years. At these different times, there has been made a sufficient quantity of cloth to give substantial basis to statements which estab- lish, without question, the value of the process, and which are of themselves of sufficient importance to work a change in FOIl SCOURING WOOL. 13 the method of scouring. In the first place, less oil is neces- sary in spinning. From a third to a half is saved ; not a matter of great economy to be sure, but small as it is, it has been estimated that the saving in oil would just about balance the additional expense of the scour. In the second place, there is a material diminution in waste in carding. About one half of the card waste is saved, and the wool being cleaner, there is less gumming of the cards, and they need to be cleaned only about half as often. Third, the Toppan wool will spin ■finer than the same wool scoured in the ordinary way. Mr. Spalding, superintendent of the Ray Mills at Franklin, informed me that he was able to spin from a run to a run and a half finer than with his own scour. A run with Mr. Spald- ing means some 1,600 yards more of yarn to a pound cf wool. Finer thread, and more of it ; in other words, a cheaper grade of wool when scoured by this process is available for the same purposes, exactly, as a finer grade scoured in the old way, — a saving of several cents per pound of wool. This is not the substitution of a poorer article for a good one, or, in other words, an adulteration, but it is an advance in methods of pro- duction, whereby really valuable qualities, now to some extent latent, are made to take their proper place in the manufacture. The antiseptic quality of the compound in the case of wool, as well as with cotton, is a preventive of mildew. The dirt which comes on the fleeces is, to a considerable extent, the excrement of the sheep themselves. This dirt often amounts to half the gross weight of the wool. This is not really dissolved by the compound, but is softened and held in suspension. In a very short time, if allowed to stand in quiet, the dirt is precipitated, and the precipitate is a fer- tilizer of high order. There is no doubt but that this alone, if collected, would pay the cost of scouring. As to the value of the fertilizer, I quote from the report of Mr. John L. TIayes, to the government, on Sheep Husbandry in the U. S., page 17: — "Asa fertilizer, the manure of sheep in its intrinsic quality, and its distribution and prompt utilization among the roots of grasses, is unequalled. This has been so long and so notably manifest, that the sobriquet of ' Golden Hoof ' for the ovine animal has become proverbial. In England the sheep is the main dependence in the fertilization of the soil for the wheat crop. If the mutton returns barely suffice to pay for the field value of the turnip crop, the manure is deemed a liberal profit. Good farmers in this country understand the value of the sheep as a means of soil improvement." 14 MR. toppan's new process for scouring wool. The general advantages of Mr. Toppan's method of scour- ing wool are the following : saving of time in scouring ; saving of strength of fibre through less heat ; the wool is cleansed — it is made really white ; the white is permanent ; there is less loss of wool through shrinkage \ the wool is mordanted for many colors, and the cost of mordant and time of opera- tion are saved ; the dyes seem to take more quickly and evenly ; there is probably a considerable saving of dye ; the colors are permanent ; in spinning, less oil is needed \ there is less waste in carding ; there is less gumming up of cards ; there is less waste in spinning ; the wool will spin from one to one and a half runs finer. In closing the lecture, and before proceeding to the practi- cal work of scouring, I desire to call your attention to the fibres and fabrics which have been brought here for your exam- ination. There are some of the results of the cotton bleach; there are some fibres, flax, and hemp ; there are several different grades of wool in the grease, scoured by the Toppan method, and whenever it was possible to get the same thing precisely, scoured by other regular scourers for the trade ; there are two large triple sets of wool and several smaller ones; the Guild samples; flannels, made by Damon, which he said were whiter than the usual ones were, after sulphur- ing ; woolen cloths, woven in 1878; wool dyed by Barrettr and also with household dyes ; and many other things. Thanking you for your kind attention to the written portion of the lecture, I invite you for a while to the scouring-room and dyehouse which have been improvised here this evening. THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. With especial reference to the difference existing between the climate of the Pacific slope and that of the country lying between the Rocky mountains and the Atlantic coast.1 [From a lecture delivered by FRA.NK R. KIMBALL in the rooms of the Essex Institute, January 18, 1886.] This subject, owing to its comprehensiveness, can be treated only in a superficial way. The details and the differences existing between minor districts must be omitted. These of necessity would be included in a dis- course devoted to the consideration of climate in regard to health, but in the present case we shall merely examine the chief characteristics from a meteorological point of view. The climate of a country has a greater influence upon the health and prosperity of the people than is gen- erally realized. Man needs sunlight to maintain life, and air to breathe, food to eat and material for clothing. Next in importance to these fundamental necessities comes cli- mate and this is an important element in the progress of mankind. None of the leading nations are situated in the torrid or frigid zones and no nation has advanced to high civilization without the concomitant advantages of a good climate and the foremost nations of to-day are those pos- 1 In regard to the technical character of the following it should he stated that, in previous lectures on this subject, the speaker has omitted the elements of meteorol- ogy, considering at greater length kindred topics including a more detailed descrip- tion of the Pacific coast climate; but, as questions which followed have shown a misunderstanding of important facts, it was thought best to devote a portion to these matters even though this should be done at the expense of a more popular treatment of the subject, (15) 16 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. sessing the most favorable climatic conditions within the temperate zone. The greatest inventors, generals, states- men and authors and the leaders of civilization are the product of the temperate zone. The heat and the cold of the torrid and frigid zones enervate and stupefy men and retard development, so likewise, to a less extent, extreme variations of tempera- ture in the temperate zone have an unfavorable influence. We appreciate the fact that the degrees of heat or cold and the dryness or dampness of the air affect invalids who are frequently sent to other localities, according to the nature of their trouble where these conditions are different ; but it is also true that healthy persons are affected more or less by all weather changes. Many are affected by changes in temperature and others feel depressed during the passage of an area of low barometer though they may not be able to account for their feelings, therefore it becomes a matter of more or less interest and importance to know somewhat of other climates ; and we find a great variety in different parts of the world. Some regions are very hot and others very cold ; some have rain a large part of the year, in others it seldom rains ; some are subject to great extremes of temperature while others have very little change through- out the year. In order to form an idea of the climate of any given place we must know a few of the laws govern- ing weather changes, and then with the addition of what- ever statistics we may have, a tolerably accurate knowledge of the climate can be obtained ; but if we seek that knowl- edge blindly, by a few general reports, we are likely to be misled. It is frequently noticed that, in geographies, works of science and books of travel, the mean annual temperatures of places are given ; such are worthless for our purpose. As an example we might take the mean annual temperatures of the two cities San Francisco and THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 17 Boston, these are very nearly alike and yet the climates of the two places are very dissimilar. In Boston, the ther- mometer in the heated spells of summer often marks one hundred degrees in the shade, while in the coldest winter weather the mercury often falls to zero and sometimes below, showing a variation during the year of over one hundred degrees ; while in San Francisco, the variation from winter to summer is not much over forty degrees and the changes are much less abrupt. The same liability to error exists in judging of the rainfall, so we must know what figures we need and how to judge by the va- rious statistics at our command. In order to explain the character of and the laws governing the various phases of the weather, I shall first describe our own climate and the operation of the United States Signal Service, and then the climate of the Pacific slope, supplementing the whole with a short consideration of the climatic changes which have been taking place throughout the world dur- ing the last few years. Within the limits of the United States there exist three distinct meteorological regions. The first including that part of the country lying east of the Rocky mountains. This region has a precipitation of rain or snow at frequent intervals throughout the year ; the greater part of the region has cold winters and hot summers ; it is subject to variable winds at all seasons. The second region em- braces the country lying between the Rocky mountains and the Pacific coast and north of New Mexico and Ari- zona. It has a wet and a dry season, the former occurring in the winter months ; the precipitation is almost entirely in the form of rain, except in the mountains and is about one-half of that in the above-named region. The winters are mild and the summers cool on the coast and hot in the interior. The winds are variable in winter and westerly ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. 2 18 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. in summer, appearing then like trade winds and are so called. These characteristics are more marked between the Sierra Nevada range and the Pacific coast. The ele- vated plateau between the Rocky mountains and the Si- erra Nevadas, partakes somewhat of the character of the regions on either side ; its rainfall is however less than either of these. The third region consists of New Mexico and Ar- izona ; this like the last has a semi-tropical climate with a wet and a dry season, but these are reversed ; the wet sea- son occurring chiefly in July and August, the total rain- fall, however, being very small. The winters are warm and dry and the summers hot except in the mountains. Before proceeding to consider the Pacific climate we will note some of the chief features of our own variable climate. In the first place we shall notice that through- out the year, at intervals of every two or three days, es- pecially in winter, we are visited by storms of large area occupying from twelve hours to two days in passing; these storms travel in about the same direction and act in about the same manner. A person who is an observer of nature and interested in the phenomena occurring about us from day to day, would naturally put the following questions ? What causes these storms ? Where are they developed? Where do they go? and what becomes of them? A few words and a few simple illustrations may make the subject plain in a general way. It is often noticed on a summer day at the seashore, that the air will be quiet and warm, and in the afternoon the wind will start up from the eastward and refresh us with cool ocean breezes ; this is owing to the air over the land becoming heated and rising, causing a current of cool air to flow in from the ocean to take its place ; in this case we may have merely an afternoon breeze created which will go dowm with the sun. Again, we may take the case THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 19 of a great level plain heated by a summer sun till the air at some point commences to rise ; as it rises air will flow in from all sides and will follow the upward current al- ready created ; in ascending, it will assume a spiral mo- tion. This may be illustrated by taking a basin of water and allowing the water to run out through a hole in the bottom ; the water will not flow in radial lines toAvards the hole, but in a curved line. And, again, if a column of smoke above a hot bonfire is noticed, it will be ob- served generally to rise in a spiral form ; thus in the above case in the open plain, the air will rise in the same man- ner and currents will flow in from all sides, causing slight breezes along the surface of the ground. It is often no- ticed, on windy days, when the streets or roads are dusty, that little whirls of dust arise and travel for some dis- tance ; the action here is similar, but these, instead of being caused in a calm by the sun's action, are caused by conflicting currents of air ; these of course being origi- nally caused by the heat of the sun. Atmospheric disturbances, similar to the above cases, occurring when the air is dry, will continue only so long as the sun remains above the horizon to heat the surface of the earth and the air. After sunset these will cool and the air will have no tendency to rise, hence such disturb- ances cannot develop into storms ; but where there is moisture in the air the case is different. It is a well-known fact that when water evaporates, heat is absorbed ; hence we say evaporation causes cold. When the molecules of water separate and assume the vaporous condition, they need energy and so absorb all the heat they can. When condensation takes place, the molecules come together again and assume the cold, sluggish condi- tion of a liquid, hence they do not need the energy to keep them in activity and the heat is given off again. 20 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. This latent beat plays a most important part in the pro- duction of storms. In the above cases we have assumed that the air was dry. We will now suppose it to contain moisture to a considerable amount. Where the layers of air next to the surface of the earth become heated, the air rises and in so doing it ex- pands and cools. The moisture condenses and we haveclouds formed ; but in condensing heat is given out which pre- vents the air from cooling as much as it would otherwise, therefore it continues to rise till it reaches a hi^h alti- tude and overflows, passing off from the central spiral of ascending air ; greater quantities follow and an activity is started by the new supply of heat which maintains the action after the sun has ceased to exert a direct influence ; thus we have the development of a typical storm which continues day and night. Now, if we cut through this storm and take a horizontal section or ground plan, we shall see that in the centre is a calm of ascending air ; about this a rain area and beyond this an area of clouds and we shall see that the winds rush in towards this centre. Therefore, on the north side of the storm we shall notice northerly winds, on the east side, easterly winds and so on, the storm appearing like a great wheel, with the excep- tion that the winds, instead of following radial lines to the centre, as the spokes of a wheel do, tend to reach that centre by a more or less curved line, this curve changing according to the distance of the centre. At great dis- tances from the centre the winds are drawn towards it in nearly radial lines, while of course at the centre the mo- tion is nearly circular. This motion of the winds towards the centre is always in the opposite direction from the hands of a watch (that is, from right to left) in the northern hemisphere and from left to right in the southern hemi- sphere. Such are ordinary storms in all parts of the THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 21 world ; they are called cyclones on account of their form, though many people improperly restrict the term cyclone to a tornado or a very severe cyclonic storm, whereas a cyclone may be of very slight energy and may only man- ifest itself to ordinary observers as a slight shower. Having now noticed the formation of storms the next question would be, Where do they come from? In an- swering this question we may suppose two lines to be drawn, one just north of the United States running east and west, and another running south from the eastern point of the United States. From some point within these lines all our storms come ; that is, all the storms in the north temperate regions travel in an easterly or north- easterly direction, therefore every storm which passes oyer New England comes from a westerly or southwest- erly point. No storm ever comes from the northeast or east ; the majority come from the region extending from the Gulf States to the northwest states. A few come from west of the Rocky mountains, but whether they come up the great Mississippi valley or across the centre of the country, or from the northwest, they almost always pass to the lake region and thence clown the St. Lawrence valley. Besides these, there are what are known as the West India cyclones which come from a southwestern or sometimes nearly a southern point, following the coast to Cape Hatteras or Cape Cod and then passing off to the eastward over the gulf stream. These occur most fre- quently from August to December and are very apt to be severe. By bringing to mind the horizontal section of a cyclonic storm before described, it will be readily seen that as these storms approach New England and pass off to sea that the northern side is usually the only one felt, therefore as it passes away and the weather clears, the winds will back from northeast to north and northwest 22 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. instead of passing around to the south, southwest and west, as in the case of a storm passing down the St. Law- rence valley to the north of us. The majority of storms after leaving our coast travel to the northeastward, across the Atlantic and pass north of England. When a storm first develops it is of small area ; but as it progresses from day to day its- diameter increases and in high lati- tudes it disappears from this very fact ; for when the di- ameter of the centre becomes so great that the ascending air does not overflow, but cools and sinks back into the centre again, the storm dies out. Tornadoes are very destructive storms of small area and tremendous energy which frequent the centre of the country, being most destructive in Kansas, Illinois, Mis- souri and neighboring states. The South Atlantic states have also been visited by very disastrous ones, especially in February, 1884, when a great many people were killed and wounded and thousands of dollars' worth of property destroyed within a few hours. Until within the last few years very little has been known about the nature of these storms or the laws governing them ; and it is only within the last two years that the Signal Service has attempted to give any daily indications of their probable occurrence for different localities. Their sudden development, nar- row paths and short courses, together with their destruc- tive force, have prevented very accurate observations until lately. What appears to be a thunder storm rises in the west and in the midst a funnel-shaped cloud appears sus- pended above the earth, moving up and down and swaying from side to side. The clouds above appear in greatest com- motion, while an indescribable roaring is heard in the air. The storm travels like others, generally in a northeasterly direction, sometimes veering toward the north at the rate of about thirty miles an hour. They are liable to occur THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 23 at any time of the year, but are mostly confined to the summer months and are most frequent in June in the lat- ter part of the afternoon. The path of great destruction varies from 300 or 400 feet to a quarter of a mile in width, and the course of the tornado ranges from a few miles to 100 or 200 miles. When one occurs in the daytime it can be seen on the western plains a long distance away and its roar can be heard in time for the inhabitants in its path to escape. When it is seen approaching from the southwest a flight to the southeast will soon take one beyond the limits of its devastating path ; but when one occurs at night the inhabitants either awake to find it already upon them or are often so terrified as to lose their self-possession and judgment, and thus lose the opportunity for escape to a place of comparative safety. For this reason, it is common to have " dug-outs " in the ground connecting with the cellar or close at hand, to which a family may quickly re- sort in case of danger. The Signal Service has enlisted the cooperation of town officers, postmasters and others in the regions liable to these visitations, and these parties act practically as voluntary assistants to the regular sig- nal office observers in different parts of the country in collecting information and statistics in regard to every tor- nado visiting their locality. After a tornado has occurred, the United States' ob- server at the nearest station will often make a series of personal observations, going over the course of the stoim and taking the observations and accounts of eye-witnesses, and combining them with his own observations make out a report which is forwarded to Washington. In this way much valuable information is obtained and the Signal Ser- vice has been enabled to give within the last year or so indications of the probable occurrence of tornadoes in 24 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. which the percentage of verification has been very large considering the great difficulty of the subject, and very likely in this short period many lives have been saved. Many people in the east consider that the large destruc- tion of property in the west by tornadoes is partly due to the light construction of the wooden houses there ; but it should be borne in mind that brick and stone buildings succumb to these blasts almost as quickly as those of wood. When a tornado strikes a building it generally tears it in pieces, carrying the debris aloft within the funnel-shaped cloud and throwing it out from the top to either side as it advances, leaving the wreckage of a homestead scattered along in a northeasterly line for distances, varying from a few yards to one or two miles. It sometimes, however, happens that a house will ex- plode by the expansion of the air within, as the rarefied air of the funnel passes over it, and the four walls will be thrown out in as many directions. This may occur fre- quently without being observed, as the parts may be car- ried away by the in-blowing currents and thus all trace of this action may be obliterated. Tornadoes have been found to travel in connection with some cyclonic disturb- ance to the north and their courses are generally parallel with the course of the main storm, though generally from 200 to 500 or 600 miles away. The theory which is now generally accepted is, that when a body of cool air flows southward and meets a mass of warmer air, it sometimes flows over instead of under the warmer air and in seeking a condition of stable equilibrium the warm air forces an opening through the stratum of cool air above, an inter- change of positions thus taking place. Taking account of the temperatures, amount of moisture in the air and barometric pressures at the time, the Signal Service has THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 25 succeeded in sending out very correct indications in re- gard to the results likely to follow such given conditions ; and during the last summer western farmers were enabled to go about their work without being needlessly alarmed at the sight of every ordinary thunder shower. These storms within the past five or six years have been spreading over a greater area and becoming more severe. This is in part merely apparent from the spread- ing of the population over hitherto unpopulated districts and the greater number of reports received of these storms ; but aside from this there seems to have been a greater display of this form of atmospheric disturbance than formerly. Besides cyclones and tornadoes, we have thunder showers and local showers which need no special explanation after what has already been said. Having now noticed the principles of weather changes |n our climate, we will devote a few moments to the consideration of the United States Signal Service and its work in collecting reports of the weather and deducing therefrom the bulletins and indications which are daily sent out to the principal cities of the country. When me- teorologists and scientific men found that storms moved and acted in a somewhat orderly way and travelled in about the same direction, it became apparent to them that some plan might be adopted whereby vessels about to leave port might be appraised of the approach of severe storms, especially those from the West Indies, and, accordingly, a move- ment was set on foot with this object in view. On Feb- ruary 9, 1870, Congress passed a joint resolution authoriz- ing the Secretary of War to put this scheme into operation and a weather bureau was established in the Signal Ser- vice to collect weather reports and issue warnings and probabilities of wreather changes for the benefit of com- merce and agriculture. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. 3 26 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. On November 4, 1870, the first weather bulletin was issued. On that day twenty-four stations sent simulta- neous reports to the office in Washington and the bulle- tins were prepared and sent to more than twenty cities. There are now nearly five hundred stations scattered over the country from the Atlantic to the Pacific, and from the Great Lakes to the Gulf of Mexico. These are classed as those of the first order, second order, cotton region, mountain, river and seacoast stations. The main office at Washington keeps a continuous record by means of self-reg- istering instruments. Stations of the second order like Boston and other principal points take six observations and send three telegraphic reports to Washington daily and one monthly by mail. Other stations take five obser- vations and send three reports daily ; still others take only one observation daily. The river stations report the height of the water at various points on the great rivers as indi- cated on a gauge which is placed on the bank and extends from the extreme low water line to the danger line ; thus, the central office is kept informed of the condition of the great rivers and their tributaries, and is able to give no- tice of any probable rise or of any approaching flood in the river valleys, and river commerce is quite dependent on these reports. The cotton region stations, numbering between 100 and 200, take one observation, daily at five p. m. The seacoast stations take various observations, in- cluding the character of the wraves, or the approach of swells which indicate the presence of a storm at sea and are often forerunners of cyclones coming up the coast. These stations also work in connection with the life-sav- ing stations and are connected by a coast telegraph line and with the central office. Storm signals were first displayed on October 24, 1871, a red flag with a square black centre by day, and a red THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 27 lantern by night is called the cautionary signal and denotes that a storm of considerable energy is approaching and that the wind will probably blow at the rate of twenty-five miles or more per hour. In this connection it should be noted that when the wind blows twenty-five miles per hour in Boston it may blow forty miles per hour off Cape Cod ; therefore when a person in the city considers the warning not justified he should remember that it is displayed for the benefit of mariners, owing to the large number of vessels trading between ports scattered over an immense coast line extending from the provinces to the Gulf of Mexico. The display of signals at various points on that line is a matter of interest to a great many people having the care of a large amount of property, and when a very severe cyclone is coming up the coast the signal officer in a port like Bos- ton, for example, not only displays the signal when he re- ceives orders to that effect from Washington, but sends the police boat about the harbor to notify officers of vessels about to leave port of the character of the approaching storm. When the wind is expected to blow very strongly from the west or northwest the cautionary off-shore signal is displayed. This consists of a white flag with a black cen- tre above the red flag already mentioned by day and a white light above the red light by night. The white flag alone indicates a cold wave. Of the display of these sig- nals it may be said that about ninety per cent have been justified. When the wind does not attain a velocity of twenty-five miles per hour within the district the display of the signal is considered unjustified, yet the wind may attain nearly that velocity and so we may consider a larger proportion correct in a general way. The inland weather signals consist of three white flags, one with a red ball, one with a red crescent, and one with a red star denoting respectively higher temperature, lower temperature^ &nd[ 28 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. stationary temperature, and three white flags, one with a blue ball, one with a blue crescent, and one with a blue star denoting general rain or snow, clear or fair weather, and local rain or snow. These are not displayed by the gov- ernment but are recommended for use, and responsible parties willing to display them regularly will be furnished with daily telegraphic reports from the signal office for that purpose. In the preparation of the daily weather bulletins a num- ber of charts must first be made out and when it is consid- ered that several hundred stations send in their reports it is not surprising that a large force is necessarily em- ployed at the main office. Seven graphic charts in all are prepared showing the barometric pressures, the tempera- ture, direction and velocity of the wind, moisture in the air, etc., at the various stations throughout the country. These charts then pass into other hands and the bulletiu giving a synopsis of the weather throughout the coun- try is prepared and the indications are made out and tel- egraphed to all the principal cities in the United States. The per cent of verifications of these indications has averaged a little higher than that of the storm signals. In addition to these telegrams there are the Farmer's Bul- letins which are printed and sent to the smaller places by rail. In this work some forty railroad companies assist in distributing two-thousand or more bulletins daily ; these are posted in conspicuous places by station agents, postmas- ters, etc. In 1873 General Myers, chief signal officer, attended the Meteorological Congress at Vienna, a gathering composedof the officers of the various national weather bureaus of Eu- rope, and representatives of scientific organizations. On this occasion he submitted a plan for united work, whereby a simultaneous record of meteorological conditions in differ- THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 29 ent parts of the world might be obtained from time to time or at regular intervals. The idea was favorably received and at the present time meteorologists are gaining consid- erable knowledge on the subject from the bulletins of the International Weather Bureau. Before leaving the subject of forecasting weather changes, I will say a few words in regard to those who are known as weather prophets, men like Mr. Vennor and Mr. Wig- gin who have enjoyed quite a notoriety at times. These men were not in the habit, as some have intimated, of sending out predictions, based upon nothing but the ca- price of their own imaginations simply to attract public attention. On the contrary, they each had s}^stems more or less worthy of scientific investigation and they themselves believed in their systems and at the same time endeavored to gain a reputation for accuracy in foretelling meteorolog- ical events. The late Mr. Henry G. Vennor, of Montreal, was a gentleman of learning, a Fellow of the Geographi- cal Society, a naturalist and an author, having completed a record of meteorological observations extending: over a period of many years. He found what appeared to be a series of recurring weather changes; that is, a period in which the weather would repeat itself, or go through the same changes as occurred in a former period : cold winters, hot summers, wet and dry seasons, etc., occur- ring in a certain order, through a certain number of years ; these changes then being repeated throughout the next period of years, and so on. Mr. Vennor, however, did not disdain to seek aid for his predictions from other sources ; and his knowledge in the field of natural history was of great advantage in enabling him to judge of the character of coming seasons from the migrations and ap- pearance of birds, and the actions of animals and insects. He published a monthly bulletin and an almanac ; these 3 0 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. contained a great deal of matter more or less interesting and instructive in regard to the weather, agriculture, etc. Mr. Wiffgin, who has been connected with the finance department of the Canadian Government at Ottawa, is an astronomer, and though not devoting so much time to me- teorological work as did Mr. Vennor ; yet he has made a number of predictions, some of his earlier ones proving correct and creating for him quite a notoriety. His pre- dictions, however, are based not on the recurrence of weather changes, but upon the influence exerted upon the earth with its elastic envelope of atmosphere by the su- perior planets and other heavenly bodies. Without doubt there is much in such a system and although we might not be able to rely upon it entirely, yet not only the sun and moon, but the other heavenly bodies, exert an influence to a greater or less extent upon us, or the earth and air. The chief difficulty with which we should meet would be the reduction of these general facts to any practical sys- tem. In order to use them, we should know how much influence is exerted under certain conditions, and how that influence would manifest itself. In making predic- tions, weather prophets, on whatever system they work, refer to conditions which have not at the time begun to manifest themselves ; whereas the Signal Service, as a gen- eral rule, draws indications of the increase and progress of conditions already developed. Having now considered the principal features of our eastern climate, and the operation of the Signal Service, we will cross to the Pacific and note some of the peculiar- ities of that climate. After crossing the Rocky Moun- tains we find ourselves in what is called the great enclosed American basin, a plateau of 4000 to 5000 feet elevation, extending westward to the Sierra Nevada range. This region is mountainous, dry and barren in general, with a THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 31 few productive spots like the great Salt Lake Valley, which lies in the eastern part at an elevation of about 4000 feet above sea level. This valley is about the only locality here, capable of supporting at present any large popula- tion. Passing on to the west, we cross the great Alkali Desert ; a region producing very little in the way of vege- tation but sage brush. The rainfall in this section of the country is very light, ranging from eighteen inches at Ogden to four inches at Humboldt per annum, as com- pared with an annual precipitation in Boston of forty-eight inches ; and as more water is lost here by evaporation than is furnished. by the rainfall, the lakes, including Great Salt Lake, are gradually diminishing in size. The winters here are cool and the summers quite warm, but the ex- tremes are not so great as in much of the country east of the Rocky Mountains, nor are the changes in temperature as great or as sudden. This condition appears to be the result of the relative position of the plateau with regard to the Rocky Mountains and the Pacific Ocean. We should expect to find it somewhat cooler than the lowlands of the great Mississippi Valley, but we also find that it is less subject to the violent fluctuations of temperature which we experience when warm areas of barometric depression are rapidly followed by cold waves from the west or northwest. The majority of these cold waves sweep down into the United States in a southeasterly and easterly direction from the northwest states and the region to the north, along the eastern slopes of the Rocky Mountains which here trend in a southeasterly direction. The region to the west of these mountains is subject to more or less change, but in a less degree; and again, the character of atmospheric changes, advancing from the west, would be influenced by the proximity of the Pacific Ocean which is milder than the Atlantic in the same latitudes, a matter which will be 32 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. considered later. Having reached the Sierra Nevada range, we find the western slopes very much more abrupt than those of the Rocky Mountains, and we descend very rapidly into the valleys of California. We are now in a region which possesses well marked climatic peculiarities. The state of California is about eight hundred miles Ion a* and two hundred miles wide, with a coast line of a little over one thousand miles. Its surface is cut up by mountain ranges running parallel with the coast, and di- viding the state into numerous long narrow valleys. The prominent features of the climate are, first, a wet and a dry season ; the former occurring in the winter months, while from May to October rainfalls are rare, and a shower in June, July or August, is of very unusual occurrence. Secondly, a small rainfall, the amount of precipitation in the rainy season being no greater than that of the corresponding period in New England. Thirdly, mild winters, snow being a rarity except in the mountains, and the climate in the southern part of the state being of a semi-tropical character. The first question which would naturally arise would be in regard to the cause of the dry season. A person in the east is very apt to consider that the same causes tend to produce precipitation either in the form of rain or snow in all seasons, and when one finds a region where the rain ceases in the spring and does not begin again until fall, curiosity is aroused as to the peculiar conditions which cause a cessation of rainfall during a part of the year. In considering this question, several important facts must be borne in mind. In the first place, there is a tendency for weather changes to move in an easterly direction : and, secondly, the western sides of the continents are milder than are the eastern sides in the same latitudes. This may be partly due to the influence of warm oceanic cur- THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 33 rents coming from southern latitudes, flowing in a north- easterly and easterly course and striking the western coasts with a temperature above that of the surrounding water. The mild climate of the British Isles is attributed to the influence of the gulf stream. There may be other causes, but these currents certainly have a considerable share in producing the effects which we notice. The gulf stream flows northeasterly at some distance from our coast, while a cold current from the Arctic regions passes southward between the coast and the gulf stream, conse- quently much of the influence of this latter stream is here counteracted. In the Pacific, a great ocean current exists similar to the gulf stream ; it is called the Kurosiwo or Japan current, and flows from the coast of Japan in a northeasterly course towards the Aleutian Islands and Alaska, a small part passing into Behrings Sea and the balance sweeping down the Pacific coast of the United States. Owing to its great size, it preserves a very even temperature throughout its long course, both in winter and summer, and consequently has a marked influence upon the climate, not only of Alaska but of British Co- lumbia and the regions to the south, giving these places very mild winters. Sitka, in the southern part of Alaska, corresponds in latitude to tbe northern part of Labrador, and yet its winter climate is not much colder than that of New York. The average temperature of this current, as it reaches San Francisco, is about fifty-five degrees, and as it tem- pers the cold of winter it also mitigates the heat of sum- mer ; but here another feature of this climate, the trade wind as it is called, presents itself. This is in reality a continual indraught of air from the ocean during the sum- mer season, caused by the rising of the air in the great ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. 4 34 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. interior valleys to the eastward, which are very dry and hot at this season of the year. We may include in the list of localities contributing to this, the regions even to the east of the Sierra Nevada range, for it seems quite probable that the great enclosed basin before referred to may constitute quite an important factor in the case. It is true that in a large part of it the heat is not excessive, but the aggregate of thermal energy throughout such a large area would amount to considerable, and in the southern part the heat is quite sufficient. The most favorable conditions, however, for producing this summer wind are to be found in the great valleys of the Sacramento and the San Joaquin ; these two in reality forming one continuous valley, running north and south between the Sierra Nevada and the coast ranges. The temperature is very high here in summer and the coast mountains are comparatively low and a number of open- ings in the range admit a flow of air at a low level from the sea to the valley. The principal opening through which this wind reaches the valley is that through which the Sacramento flows, on its way to the Bay of San Francisco ; hence this bay and the adjacent localities are subject to much stronger sum- mer winds than other parts of the coast north or south. Now, as we have seen, the temperature of the sea along the coast is quite low, and the winds passing over it are cool and do not absorb much moisture ; and when they strike the laud which at this latitude is quite warm, what- ever moisture they may contain is absorbed rather than condensed ; consequently rain is impossible as long as these conditions continue. When, however, the interior regions cool in the fall, there is no longer a continued demand for this cool ocean breeze, and winds, more or less variable, take its place. THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES, 35 Rain occurs and the climate assumes characteristics more or less like our own, with the exception of the cold, as the Japan current still exercises its influence on the tem- perature, causing, as above stated, mild winters. Such is a brief explanation of the causes operating to produce the dry season in California. The dry summers and the mild winters are the distinguishing features of this cli- mate ; but, in addition, the claim is reasonably made that no other region of equal area otfers such a variety of cli- mates as the State of California. This might seem somewhat contradictory, especially when applied to the summer season, but even then a great change in temper- ature may be found by travelling from the coast inland or from the valleys up into the mountain ranges. It may be argued that various climates in one sense may be found in New England in summer, by travelling from the coast inland or among the White or the Green mountains. It is true that in New England as elsewhere, it is likely to be cooler near the seashore than inland, but aside from this the two regions are quite dissimilar. In New England, on the coast, it is at times as warm or nearly so, as in the interior, and places in the interior are at times as cold as those on the coast, while the moisture in the air causes mugginess in warm weather and chilliness in cold weather ; hence all localities here partake more or less of the same characteristics. In California, though there may be slight changes, the permanent climatic features of dif- ferent localities are more marked : for example, in San Francisco, although it has a somewhat disagreeable cli- mate, we may expect about the same weather from day to day throughout the summer season ; while if we pass a few miles to the south into the Santa Clara valley, we may, likewise, expect about the same weather from day to day, but it will be unlike that of San Francisco, and although 36 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. we may find disagreeable features in both, we may be very sure that they will not exchange places. We should hardly expect to find in Santa Clara the fogs and the strong cold winds of San Francisco, while at the same time San Francisco was basking in the hot, clear air of Santa Clara. I have spoken of the dry air, especially in the interior, but we find along the coast a fog bank which encroaches on the land at night and retreats in the daytime ; this is particularly notice- able at San Francisco. In the morning it extends some miles inland, the distance varying with the character of the country, the mountains offering a barrier to its progress. During the forenoon the land radiates suffi- cient heat to dissipate it and the rest of the day is bright. The fog bank, however, is likely to remain over the sea, appearing like a huge cloud rolling in towards the shore but not reaching it till sunset, when it spreads inland and a clear evening is uncommon. As we pass along the coast, away from San Francisco, the winds and the fogs become less noticeable, while if we go back into the Sacramento or San Joaquin valley we get beyond the reach of the fog, but we also lose the benefit of the cool breezes ; consequently, the pleasantest climate is found nearer the coast, but at some distance from San Fran- cisco. The coast range sends out numerous spurs which form a broken line of hills or low mountains along the shore in many cases rising quite abruptly from the sea. Among these are many little valleys which are quite sheltered from the fogs and winds and yet are comparatively cool. Here we find small fruit ranches nestled at the foot of the hills or climbing the sides which are in some cases so steep as to necessitate terraces, and here and there are mineral springs and pleasure resorts on a small scale for summer and THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 37 winter. The position of these mountain ranges running north and south in connection with the steady westerly wind produces (as has been stated) a great variety of temperatures. In San Francisco the thermometer regis- tered 80° not more than five or six times in the summer and the average would be about 75°. When the interior valleys become a little cooler the trade wind becomes weaker and the weather warmer. On this account July and August are the coolest months and June and Sep- tember are generally a few degrees warmer. What are called dog days in the east are scarcely known on the Pacific Coast. When we reach Sacramento we ex- perience a summer heat of 90° and as we go north or south towards the heads of the two great valleys we get beyond even the slight influence of the trade wind which Sacramento feels, and the temperature rises to 100° and over, and occasionally the mercury registers 110° in the shade ; but, owing to the dryness of the air, a temperature of 100° is no more trying than one of 85° in New York, and this region has the advantage of cool nights ; though the people of Sacramento have a mid-day heat of 90° they find blankets necessary at night. The winters here are colder than on the coast but the rain- fall is less, averaging about nineteen inches only ; these valleys sometimes have nearly two hundred and fifty clear days in the year without fog or clouds. The rain- fall increases from the southern part of the state towards the north. It is greatest near the coast, and is generally more on the western sides of the mountains than on the eastern ; the amount is however quite variable from year to year. It averages in San Francisco twenty-three and one-half inches, at Santa Barbara fifteen inches, at Los Angeles twelve inches, at San Diego ten inches, and at Colton nine inches per year. The Los Angeles region 38 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. like Nevada and Arizona is subject to occasional cloud bursts when the water comes down in a deluge carrying everything before it. These generally occur in the moun- tain canyons and small valleys and have not been known near the large towns, though the railroads and towns suffer from the rapidly rising streams at such times. Sand storms also occur here as they do in the San Joaquin valley. To the east of southern California lies the Ari- zona meteorological region in which the small rainfall oc- curs in summer ; this season is excessively hot except in the mountains. The mercury in a few places some- times reaching 120° in the shade, and the hot days are followed by hot nights ; the southern part, however, has a fine winter climate the mountain districts being cold. The mean July temperature of Yuma, which is in the low- lands, is one hundred and four degrees and the rainfall at this place is only four inches. Between this region and southern California lies a desert which is influenced by the dry winters of the former and the dry summers of the latter. A year or more has often passed without rain, but an occasional cloud burst supplies the country with an unwelcome amount in a few minutes ; coming in this way little good is done, and no vegetation is pro- duced here. As I have stated Nevada and Utah differ somewhat from California in climate, so also Colorado and the western parts of Texas partake somewhat of the climate of the Arizona region, but the classification of the three principal regions of the United States already made is sufficient in a general way. It remains to be stated that the above characteristics and statistics refer to the weather in its normal condition, but a change has been taking place throughout the world during the last five or six years, which the majority of meteorolo- THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 3 9 gists have as a general rule refrained from considering with the exception of some of the phenomena resulting therefrom. We may consider that somewhere about the years 1880, 1881 or 1882, we entered a cycle of astro- nomical disturbance, and this fact has manifested itself in the unusual terrestrial and atmospheric phenomena which we have witnessed in this period. The climatic changes occurring in various localities have been noticed and com- mented upon, but no general explanation has been given by the leading meteorologists to whom people look for in- formation in such matters. Local changes have been at- tributed to local causes, and peculiar phenomena like the "Yellow Day" have been explained to the satisfaction of many, but not in a way to comply with the conditions in the case. The "Yellow Day" occurred in New England in September, 1881. I was at Marblehead Neck at the time and had a fair opportunity of observing the phenomenon. When I awoke on that morning I discovered the harbor and the surrounding landscape bathed in a most peculiar yellow light. This continued throughout the day. The grass appeared blue and all colored objects had a strange appearance and the atmosphere was very still and oppres- sive. People were at first unable to give any explanation or form a theory in regard to it. Men who went to their business in Boston returned with accounts of the peculiar aspect of the city where gas was used in many places throughout the day. The papers gave descriptions of it, but no adequate explanation. The superstitious believed the end of the world was near at hand, and the members of one religious sect prepared to ascend, and waited pa- tiently all day. More practical people, particularly those who had been in tropical regions, expected that an earth- quake or a hurricane would follow, but nothing of the kind took place ; and when the sun had set, the strange light 40 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. lingered but a little while and the moon and sky then ap- peared as clear as usual. A theory was then evolved and adopted to explain this appearance. It was to the effect that owing to the ex- tensive forest fires then raging to the north of New Eng- land, a great quantity of smoke had drifted to the south and east over the country, thus producing the yellow light ; and in support of this theory it was stated that many persons noticed an odor of smoke and that in New Hampshire it was particularly strong. As no better expla- nation was offered it was accepted generally. Nevertheless, it would not satisfactorily stand a test. The ordinary ruddy glow of sunset is simply caused by the way in which the rays of light penetrate the atmos- phere which is apt to contain considerable moisture ; but when we have to deal with a phenomenon like the Aurora Borealis (or northern lights) wc find we have a more com- plicated subject to analyze. We can scarcely sa}r that the light is caused by the presence of gross foreign matter in the air, unless we class magnetism and electricity as such. This light at times appears in the form of a few streamers or an arch of white light. At other times it will rise to the zenith and even stretch over towards the south. Occasion- ally, it spreads over a large part of the distance between the east and the west, and at times it assumes a reddish hue, and the flickering and darting motions of the stream- ers or rays are very common. It has been noticed that a brilliant display of this kind often accompanies or follows a sun storm, that is, a disturbance in the envelope of the sun, such as may be witnessed in the development and ex- pansion of a so-called sun spot. A change of weather or of temperature is also looked for, after a display of north- ern lights. This subject is little understood, yet we can but feel that a bond of sympathy exists throughout the THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 41 solar system and that oftentimes unexplained phenomena are but the manifestations of reactions between the mem- bers of that system. Now to revert to the subject under discussion ; it appears to me quite necessary to attribute the cause of the "Yellow Day" to something higher than smoke in the air, and I will mention a tew facts which seem to make the smoke theory untenable. In the first place, it is granted that in the neighborhood of an extensive fire the sky assumes a murky hue from the smoke ; but there have been many forest fires of great magnitude in the regions to the northeast, north, north- west and west of New England without being followed by any such conditions as were present on the "Yellow Day." It is claimed that the wind was not in the proper direc- tion on these occasions, but that on the "Yellow Day" it was. Now let me say that though there may possibly have been a little smoke in the air in northern New Hamp- shire and Vermont, yet the yellow light of that day appeared over other parts of New England nearly simul- taneously. If smoke had been the cause, we should have had a gradual thickening of the sky, as the smoke ad- vanced from one district to another southward and it would have passed away in the same gradual way. Such was not the case ; it appeared in a short space of time and disappeared with the sun. Furthermore, if the wind had been violent enough to have brought such an im- mense volume of smoke down over New England and carried it away so suddenly, then that wind, even if at a high altitude, must have caused some motion in the air next to the earth. But the air was calm on that day, and, again, if such an amount of smoke had been carried along over so large a territory in so short a time, it would have presented more the appearance of masses of clouds ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. 5 42 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. driven before a strong wind, whereas there was very little appearance of that kind. The yellow light seemed to be equally diffused over the heavens and at rest, though there occurred now and then whitish spots or what appeared to be breaks or openings in the yellow expanse, but no definite outlines were visible and the difference in the tints was so slight as to amount to no more than the variations in the sunset glow or the breaks in the white expanse of the northern lights. A number of persons claimed to have noticed the odor of smoke in the air, but I think they may have remem- bered such a fact after being informed of the smoke the- ory, and one might quite readily imagine smoke in the air when it was so close and oppressive as on that day. In the northern part of New England I doubt not, there may have been more or less smoke in the air, not only on that day but for some time, not, however, in sufficient quanti- ties to cause such a sudden and extensive combination of atmospheric conditions. Such facts we may consider as negative proofs. Let us now see if there are any cases in which such appearances occur without the presence of smoke. We have only to seek such information from a sea captain or some one who has been in tropical regions, and we shall find that a calm, sultry air and a^brassy appearance of the heavens often occur before elemental disturbances of great violence, and even here in New England we have oc- casionally noticed such appearances before the breaking of a heavy thunder shower ; and when we find that in some regions a calm, sultry air with a yellow light in the heav- ens continues for some time without the presence of smoke and is generally followed by atmospheric disturb- ances, we are led to believe that such conditions are produced by the same agencies, and that as these are va- riable, it is possible for the above appearances to exist THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 43 under certain circumstances without the attendant dis- turbances. Another fact in connection with the " Yellow Day" is that the same yellow light was observed within a day or two after, in Virginia and then in Iowa. In the latter state the light had a flashing appearance like the northern lights in activity. It certainly seems quite unreasonable to suppose that smoke came down to New England, then passed to Virginia and then over to Iowa. The only satisfactory way to account for it is, as above stated, on the supposition that it was caused not by the mere inter- ference of gross matter held in suspension in the air, but by the same forces and conditions which are concerned in the production of many other singular terrestrial and aeriarphenomena, and which may have much to do with the aurora borealis and the red afterglows at sunset which have attracted so much attention within the last two or three years. These brilliant results began in the fall of 1883, appearing in India in September, and being very marked in October, November and December, not only in Asia, but in Europe and America. The display began when the ordinary ruddy glow of sunset had faded ; then a deep red light illumined the western sky, extending at times even to the zenith. A writer, describing the ap- pearance in New England, says : "The display was al- most startling and there was something almost bewilder- ingly grand in the evidences of the red glow. It was at almost six o'clock that the most peculiar phase of the phenomenon was witnessed, when in the starlit sky the peculiar ruddy glow came and went. The coldly bril- liant stars seemed blue and green by contrast with red and their brilliancy was fantastically magnified. " Astron- omers and meteorologists here and abroad advanced dif- ferent theories and each seemed plausible. Prof. Piazzi 44 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. Smyth, Astronomer Royal for Scotland, maintained that there must have been an excessive amount of vapor in the higher atmosphere caused by unusual meteorological con- ditions. The "New York Herald" also strongly supported this theory, while other leading astronomers claimed that the cause was to be found in the volcanic dust thrown up by the great eruption in the Island of Java. This theory has perhaps been more generally received than any other. Mr. Norman Lockyer, Professor Ball of Dublin and Mr. Raynard being among its supporters. Professor Loomis was not inclined to endorse either of these theories. It has also been claimed by several scientists of high stand- ing, that the earth passed into a stream of meteoric dust about the time of the beginning of these displays, and others have sought the cause in the attenuated matter of a comet's tail in the atmosphere. The theory of volcanic dust from Java has, however, as above stated, been the one most universally accepted, and yet that seems scarcely adequate to explain the matter fully, for the eruption took place August 27, and three days later these after- glows were seen in Brazil, over nine thousand miles from the disturbance, and if the wind had borne the dust thither it must have travelled at a great speed ; and, fur- thermore, it must have travelled rapidly in various direc- tions to have produced such results in Asia, Europe and North America as well, and there have been reports of such appearances before the earthquake. And, again, if the upper atmosphere had become so permeated with for- eign matter, it seems very strange that the effects should not have been noticed every day. As it was, several days often passed without the display, followed by one or a number of successive brilliant afterglows, which at times assumed the motions of the northern lights, stream- ers of red darting upwards, and then retreating in a man- THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 45 ner different from the ordinary changes of sunset hues, and scarcely to be accounted for on the mere supposition of light passing through a veil of suspended volcanic dust. On the whole it appears quite as reasonable to suppose that the cause which produced the great earthquake of Java also produced atmospheric phenomena at the same time, and it does not particularly affect the case whether, as is generally supposed, the causes of earthquakes exist within the earth or whether, as is not improbable, outside influences are largely concerned in their production, or both. In referring to the matters above my object has been to show that unusual phenomena have occurred within the period before mentioned, and numerous other cases might also be cited ; one or two of the principal ones I will hastily consider in order to make the case more dis- tinct. The eruption of Krakatoa in Java in the summer of 1883 was the most powerful convulsion on record. Other great catastrophes have occurred within the last century or so, such as the great Lisbon earthquake of 1755 ; the Java earthquake of 1815, and that which devastated the western coast of South America in 1868 ; but the one we are consid- ering destroyed more human beings and its disastrous action continued for a longer time — one-hundred thousand persons were killed. A range of mountains disappeared beneath the sea and the topography of the whole country and the neighboring regions was changed, so that mariners knew not where they were ; waves rolled where dry land had formerly been, and land appeared where vessels had sailed, while the sea for a long time after was covered for miles upon miles with a layer of pumice stone and ashes. To this may be added the earthquake of England, which though slight in comparison with the above, was an unu- sually severe one for the country in wmich it occurred. The disastrous floods and tornadoes in the United States 46 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. within the last five years have been unparalleled in the his- tory of the country, and the frequency of severe storms all over the world has been very unusual. In January, 1884, a paper was read before the Academy of Sciences at Paris, giving a review of the year 1883. The following lines are taken from a synopsis of this paper. "At the last January session of the Paris Academy of Sciences, M. Foye gave a rather startling summary of re- cent physical commotions both on the earth and on the sun. Among the numerous exceptional phenomena noted for some time such as the frightful volcanic explosion of Krakatoa, the immense sea waves and air waves which swept round the globe, and the strange celestial lights and colorations, he mentioned that the month of January in Europe resembled in temperature the month of April, while systematic observations disclose singular variations in sun-spot frequency and no less singular behavior of the magnetic needle. During the present summer in the southern hemisphere extraordinary heat has been recorded, the thermometer at Buenos Ayres rising in the shade to 101° and in Queensland to 106°. In consonance with the disturbed state of the earth, M. Wolf of Zurich reports two pronounced sun spot maxima in April and October last, and only four days in 1883 in which the sun was not spotted. Though these maxima were not so high as that of April, 1882, and there are now indications that the sun's activity is decreasing, physicists will not be slow to con- nect the terrestrial disturbances with the solar storms. The French scientist may now add to his list of strange phenomena the late unparalleled Ohio floods, the extraor- dinary southern tornadoes of recent date, with the reported death roll of several hundred persons and the phenome- nally early and extensive efHux of Arctic ice upon the At- lantic." The above extract points quite plainly to the fact THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 47 already mentioned, that is, the relation existing between the members of the solar system. If a sympathy exist be- tween the sun and the earth, it must also exist between the sun and the other planets, aud if changes in the sun affect these it is not unreasonable to suppose that they in turn may exert some influence upon the sun, and if they ever do, we should expect the effects increased when the superior planets occupy such positions with regard to one another as they have within the last five years. Now after these superficial observations, I will refer to my for- mer statement that the characteristic climates of the dif- ferent sections in the United States which I have described, have not within the last few years been in their normal condition. As an example the dry season in California has been growing shorter, the rains have continued later into the spring, and commenced earlier in the fall, aud light showers have occurred in June and last summer a light one occurred the first of July, and in some localities in the state thunder and 1 ightning accompanied it, a remark- able event for that region. A Spaniard who had resided in Monterey most of his life stated that he had never seen lightning until two years ago. The Californians boast of their freedom from thunder showers ; light ones occur though very rarely but the state is subject to eight or ten earthquake shocks a year. These, however, are generally light, and in the majority of cases are scarcely noticeable, and the residents prefer them to thunder showers. In support of this preference they bring up the undeniable fact that in twenty years only forty deaths from earth- quakes have occurred in the state, and these mostly by the falling of old adobe houses, while in the rest of the United States subject to thunder showers the deaths by lightning amount to nearly one hundred and fifty a year, and if the deaths by tornadoes be added, the total would 48 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. be from 250 to 300 a year and sometimes more. Of course there always exists in California the liability of a severe earthquake, but though showers have taken place there lately, they are not likely to develop into any such severe and frequent electrical storms as are experienced elsewhere. Changes in our own climate are also quite plain : for several years our proverbial April weather has been a stranger. We have not had mild days with typi- cal April showers and bright blue skies alternating in rap- id succession, as formerly, but instead, we have had cold rainy Aprils more like November, with a few instances of unseasonable heat ; and again, our winter season formerly preserved its characteristics in a regular and orderly man- ner. The snow came and the cold came and remained in quite an even way. We were accustomed to have sleigh- ing through a large part of the winter, and we expected a short thaw of two or three days in the early part of January known as the January thaw, but of late years we have had very little continuoussleighing here, some years havingvery little snow and at other times having the larger part of it in one or two heavy storms. Our thaws have occurred every few days, nearly every snowstorm being followed within a day or two by one ; cold waves and warm spells alternating in rapid succession. The present season has possessed more or less the true winter features, but we have had an alterna- tion of many very severe storms, very cold waves, and warm spells. On the whole, the winter has been a cold one with considerable of the old time regularity in its snowfalls, but nearly as changeable as others of late. This change- able and uncertain weather of the last few years has caused an unusual amount of sickness everywhere. The influences bringing about these changes have also manifested them- selves in other ways. The most important agents of climatic change within the THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. 49 control of man are the forests. These have an important bearing on the climate of a place and their wholesale des- truction is apt to create an unfavorable change. This is confined chiefly to the temperature and the prevalence of droughts and floods. In the case of the latter in a defor- ested region, the effect, so far as the destruction of the forest is concerned, is not produced by an extra amount of precipitation but by the water reaching the streams more rapidly ; and it often happens that barren regions suffer most from floods, other things being equal. It should be noted, however, that many of the unusual floods of late years have been caused by very heavy rainfalls on account of the abnormal conditions which we have been consider- ing, but the results have been more marked in scantily wooded regions than they would have been had the hills been covered with a heavy growth of timber. It has been quite strongly maintained by some authorities that forests do not actually cause more rain ; but if they do not in a direct way, they do indirectly, and numerous examples are afforded us for observation while the evil effects of forest destruction are too common. Whole districts which once were rich and productive have become dry and bar- ren, their streams have dwindled to mere brooks, except after heavy rains, when they rise rapidly and sometimes overflow and the soil is gradually washing away from the hills. The effect in temperature varies somewhat with the surrounding conditions. The clearing of forest lands in Germany had the effect of raising the temperature. In England the same result followed, but in Iceland the tem- perature has been lowered. It may be said, however, as a rule that a forest equalizes the annual temperature as well as the distribution of the rainfall. About ten years ago I wrote an article, calling atten- tion to the importance of united work for the preservation ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. G 50 THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE UNITED STATES. of our already rapidly decreasing forests; and localities, which I then had in mind, have since been denuded of their timber, and the changes, above mentioned, to a cer- tain extent, have been the result. The destruction of forests could not cause all the varied and unusual mete- orological phenomena which we have been considering, yet a corresponding influence is contributed to exaggerate all abnormal weather changes. The " arbor days," instituted of late in a number of our states, are the result of excel- lent ideas, and if they are generally observed will be of great benefit in creating an interest in the subject. I think many would find a source of recreation in the subject if their interest were once aroused. It is not only important from a climatic and sanitary point of view, but it is a very instructive and interesting study in other ways : and the organization of local societies, composed of both sexes, devoted to the study of forestry in all its branches, including botany, with the intention of making practical use of the knowledge thus gained by means of united work, would eventually bear as much fruit as many of the other societies organized for various purposes in our dif- ferent cities and towns. But the subject of forestry is too vast to be considered at any length within the limits of the present discourse, and as I have been expected to con- fine myself to meteorology I have not digressed from that subject, and I will close with the hope that the questions which I have endeavored to explain have been made clear. BULLETIN ESSEX: UsTSTITTJTB Vol. 18. Salem: Apr., May, June, 1886. Nos. 4-5-6. Annual Meeting, Monday, May 17, 1886. Held this evening at 7.30 o'clock. The President in the chair. Records of preceding meeting read and ap- proved. The annual reports of the Secretary, Treasurer, Libra- rian and Auditor, were read and accepted. The committee on nominations reported the following list of officers proposed for election. A ballot was taken and the ticket as reported was elected. PRESIDENT: HENRY WHEATLAND. VICE-PEE SIDENTS : Abner C. Goodell, Jr. Daniel B. Hagar. Frederick W. Putnam. Eobert S. Rantoul. SECRETARY: TREASURER: George M. Whipple. George D. Phippen. AUDITOR: LIBRARIAN": Richard C. Manning. William P. Upham. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIIf. 7 . (51) 52 ANNUAL MEETING, MAY 17, History— Henry F. Waters. Manuscripts— WILLIAM P. TJPHAM. Archaic-logy— Frederick W. Putnam. Numismatics— Matthew A. Stickney. Geology— Benjamin F. McDaniel. CUKATOKS: Botany— GEORGE D. PHIPPEN. Zoology— Edward S. Morse. Horticulture — Music— Joshua Phippen, Jr. Painting 4 Sculpture— T. F. Hunt. Technology— Edwin C. Bolles. COMMITTEES : Finance .• The President, Chairman ex off. The Treasurer, ex off. Geo. R. Emmerton. Henry W. Peabody. David Pingree. William Mack. Library : E. B. Willson. Henry F. King. B. F. McDaniel. William D. Northend. Theodore M. Osborne. The Librarian, ex off. Edward S. Atwood. J. S. Kingsley. Robert S. Rantoul. Publication .• James A. Emmerton. Henry M. Brooks. Lecture : Frederick W. Putnam. Edwin C. Bolles. T. F. Hunt. A. L. Goodrich. Fielder Israel. Wm. Neilson. Meld Meeting : The Secretary, Chairman ex off. George A. Perkins, Salem. Clarence E. Murphy, Salem. George Cogswell, Bradford. Frank 11. Kimball, Salem. Francis H. Appleton, Peabody. Eben N. Walton, Salem. . Nathaniel A. Horton, Salem. Winfield S. Nevins, Salem. Geo. a. Bates, Salem. John H. Sears, Salem. Mr. Hagar, from the Board of Directors, presented and read the following report which, he said, had the cor- dial endorsement of the Directors. " The sub-committee of the Directors of the Essex Institute appointed at a meeting holden April 16, 1886, would respectfully submit the following report. ANNUAL MEETING, MAY 17. 53 The Salem Athenaeum, the owners of Plummer Hall, on the 25th of May, 1885, gave the Essex Institute the two years' notice of the termination of the present con- tract between the two societies. The accommodation of the present Plummer Hall building being insufficient to meet the requirements of both societies, the AthenaBum needing the whole of the second story for the proper ar- rangement of its library and reading-rooms, it was thought advisable to secure accommodations for the Institute li- brary elsewhere. The finance committee of the Institute was therefore authorized to negotiate for the purchase of the Daland estate, which purchase was duly effected and the proper deeds passed. In devising plans for the utilization of the purchase, it was deemed a fitting opportunity to attempt to obtain a public library for our city. A joint committee on the part of the Athenaeum and the Institute was ap- pointed to prepare a plan looking to the union of the li- braries of these societies, the cooperation of other library organizations, and the city government. The plan pro- posed by such committee, not meeting with the unanimous approval of the proprietors of the Athenaeum, and it be- ing deemed unadvisable without such approval to carry the plan into effect, the committee was discharged from consideration of the subject. It now devolves upon your committee to propose a plan looking to the establishing of the Essex Institute in its own building, which should be at once prepared for its ac- commodation, and in general terms, to say, that the Daland estate can be so prepared at moderate expense ; plans have been drawn showing the proposed alterations and an estimate of the cost has been made. The plan pro- poses on the first floor, a large room 49 X 19 feet for meetings and social gatherings, an office or reception room, a room for the publications of the society, an 54 ANNUAL MEETING, MAY 17. historical room, a fire-proof room for manuscripts and valuable documents, toilet room, etc. Ou the second floor, a commodious, convenient and well- lighted double room for a general reading room, which is to be stocked with the current reviews, periodicals, mag- azines, newspapers and books of reference. A room for the Story Library, separate rooms for special libraries with tables and. conveniences for readers and for consultation, and a fire-proof room for the collection of war relics ; on the third floor, special library rooms, and shelving for books and printed matter which may be useful for reference, but would not be of such general interest as the libraries located in the second story. Attic and basement for du- plicates and general storage purposes. Certain slight al- terations are to be made in the house, besides building a new stairway, and the rendering fire-proof of certain rooms in the brick addition. The library and reading room should be neatly furnished, and so arranged as to be made attractive for members and others visiting them and the advantages to be gained by joining the society be such that an increased membership may be looked for. It is estimated that the sum of fifteen thousand dollars will more than cover all the expense to be incurred, be- sides providing a sum suflicient to pay the running ex- penses for the next three years, and increasing the library by the purchase of new books, works of reference and works relating to history, science and art, and furnishing the reading rooms with a selection of the best reviews, magazines, weekly and daily papers, English and Ameri can, for the use of members. The active cooperation of every member and friend of the Institute is needed at this time. In the building we have secured, or in fire-proof additions that in the future may be erected on land in the rear, might be gathered and preserved the records and relics of the old families, the ANNUAL MEETING, MAY 17. 55 histories of cities and towns ; in fact all that pertains to the old life and the new of the county; with a rallying centre so stable there would be a constant influx of books, manuscripts, works of art, etc., a collection which, with that already formed, would be of great value and interest to the whole community. The occupation of the new building will, undoubtedly, mark an important epoch in the history of the Society, and the necessary arrangements should be liberally provided for, with a careful and judi- cious consideration of the results in view. Your committee would therefore recommend that the directors present this plan to the members at the annual meeting, at which time, a committee be appointed for the purpose of raising the money needed, and of carrying the plan into successful operation. H. Wheatland, Chairman. Mr. Hagar, in presenting the report, said that it was time that the Institute occupied its own building and this opportunity should not be allowed to pass unimproved. He hoped that the members of the Society would see that the plan was vigorously carried forward. Messrs. E. B. Willson, E. C. Bolles, W. P. Upham, T. F. Hunt and F. W. Putnam spoke strongly in favor of the report, the general opinion being expressed that the recommenda- tions contained in said report should be adopted. Mr. F. W. Putnam, after stating that he was in full sympathy with the movement and should do all in his power to see it carried out, offered the following preamble and note. Whereas in the alterations and improvements in the es- tate lately purchased by the Essex Institute contemplated by the report of the Directors just accepted, and in the carrying out of the plans therein outlined, the work of 56 ANNUAL MEETING, MAY 17. this Society can be carried on to better advantage and its plans of usefulness extended Voted, That the Directors of the Society are hereby fully authorized to make all necessary arrangements to carry into effect the plans proposed, and are hereby given full power to appoint committees outside of their own number for the purpose of raising funds or for any other special purpose connected with the project, which they shall deem expedient. This vote was unanimously passed. Mr. Upham, in speaking favorably of the proposed plan, said that he had hoped that the Institute might find it ex- pedient to open a part of its library, free to the public, and open the way for an Essex Institute Free Library which he sincerely hoped might come at no distant day, but possibly it was not the time for it now. The meeting was strongly in favor of the plans proposed in the report of the Directors and of the vote offered by Mr. Putnam. The plans of the proposed alterations in the Daland estate were shown, also an estimate of the probable ex- penditures. THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR compiled from the several reports read at the meeting, and the remarks of several members in relation thereto, pre- sents the work of the Institute in its various departments since the last annual meeting. Members. Changes occur in the list of our associates, by the addition of new names and the withdrawal of some by resignation, removal from the county or vicinity, or by death. We have received information of the death of the following members. THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 57 Solomon Varney, one of the oldest retired tanners and curriers of Salem, died May 24, 1885 ; a son of Solomon and Esther (Buxton) Varney, born in Salem, 20 Nov., 1814. In early life a tanner and currier, after- ward for a time associated in the Boston Leather firm of Varney, Haskell & Co. ; an active member of the Univer- salis! society and highly esteemed. Elected to member- ship, Nov. 4, 1872. Martha Goodhue Wheatland died at Salem, June 6, 1885 ; daughter of Benjamin and Mary Eddy (Bemis) Wheatland, born at Newmarket, N. H., March 12, 1828 ; removed to Salem in 1846. Elected to membership, Aug. 18, 1865. Samuel Appleton Safford died at Fortress Monroe, Va., June 14, 1885 ; son of Samuel and Joanna (Appleton) Safford, born in Boston Jan. 1, 1813. Resided in Salem ; for many years a member of the firm of E. Dodge & Co., flour merchants ; was for several years commander of the Salem Light Infantry, a popular and much esteemed offi- cer. After his removal from Salem he was a clerk in one of the departments in Washington, D. C. An orig- inal member. Luke Brooks died in Salem, June 23, 1885 ; son of Tim- othy and Abigail (Mason) Brooks, born in Salem, Aug. 9, 1797 ; went to Eastport, April 1819 ; returned in April 1832 and engaged in the lumber business with his brother Samuel. In 1843 went into the Eastern commission bus- iness in Boston, continuing his residence in Salem. Elected to membership, Feb. 1, 1854. Samuel Pickman Walcott died at his residence on La- 58 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. fayette Street, in South Salem, June 25, 1885 ; son of Samuel Baker and Martha (Pickman) Walcott, born in Hopkinton, Mass., Feb. 11, 1834. Elected to member- ship, May 9, 1866. John Francis Tuckerman died suddenly of heart dis- ease in Salem, on Saturday, June 27, 1885 ; son of Gustavus and Jane (Francis) Tucker man, born in Bos- ton, June 13, 1817 ; graduated Harvard Coll., 1837, and from the Medical School, 1841. In early life a surgeon in the U. S. Navy, afterwards in mercantile pursuits, and has been a resident of Salem for more than a generation. He possessed great musical taste and culture, and has been distinguished as a composer as well as a practical vo- calist and an accomplished musician. Admitted to mem- bership, July 6, 1864. Charles 31. Richardson died in Salem, July 2, 1885. He was son of Charles and Sarah (Mansfield) Eichardson, born in Salem, 17 Jan., 1807 ; a pupil in the famous Mas- ter Archer's School. On the 11th of July, 1822, he en- tered the hardware store of William Dean, corner of Essex street and Derby square. In that locality his business was continued until his death, being interested in the suc- cessive firms, Wm. Dean & Co., Adams & Richardson, Richardson & Waters. He has held offices in the state legislature, the city government, and in various institu- tions, religious, charitable, etc. Elected to membership, April 6, 1853. Augustus Timothy Brooks, a well-known and highly esteemed citizen, died on Tuesday evening, July 28, 1885. He was a son of Thomas and Mary (Richardson) Brooks; THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 59 born in Salem, Oct. 9, 1814; a member of the first class in the Salem English High School; left May 24, 1828, and entered the store of a relative, the late Isaac P. Fos- ter. In a few years he established himself in the grocery and ship chandlery business on Derby street, gradually merging the latter into an extensive flour and grain, and coal business, remaining for half a century in the same neighborhood. He served in the common council several years and was one of the most prominent and active mem- bers of the Tabernacle Church and Sunday School. He was elected to membership, March 8, 1854. James Silver Williams, one of our younger class of ship- masters, died at Salem, Aug. 1, 1885, after a brief illness. He was son of Charles F. and Sophia (Silver) Williams and was born at Salem, Oct. 1, 1843; after graduating from the High School, he went to sea and soon rose to the command of vessels in the Zanzibar and East African trade, owned by the late Capt. Bertram ; during the late civil war, he entered the U. S. Navy as acting volunteer ensign ; afterward agent for Capt. Bertram in the East ; was several years U. S. consul at Aden, Arabia, whence he returned only a few months since. Admitted to mem- bership, May 12, 1875. Henry Kemble Oliver, originally Thomas Henry Oliver, died at his residence in Salem, on Wednesday, Aug. 12, 1885. He was son of Rev. Daniel and Elizabeth (Kem- ble) Oliver ; was born at North Beverly, Nov. 24, 1800. He was fitted for college at the Boston Latin School and Phillips Academy; entered Harvard in 1814, remained there two years and then removed to Dartmouth college, entering the junior class in 1816, graduated 1818. He entered upon teaching in June, 1819, at the Salem Latin ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIH. 60 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. School; on the establishment of the High School in 1827, he was appointed to the mastership and remained there three years. He then erected a building on Federal street, Salem, for an academy of which he was the in- structor, until 1844, first for boys, afterwards for girls, when he was appointed by Gov. Briggs, Adjutant General of the state. In 1848, appointed agent of the Atlantic Mills, he removed to Lawrence where he continued twelve years, serving the city in various ways, especially on the school committee and as its mayor; in 1860 elected state treasurer ; and then he returned to Salem. The constitu- tional term having expired, by invitation of Gov. Bullock, he visited the manufacturing districts, respecting the em- ployment of children. In 1869, he was appointed by Gov. Claflin, chief of the Bureau of Labor and Statistics ; he held this office four years. In the year 1876, a mem- ber of the Board of Judges at the Centennial Exhibition, Philadelphia; Mayor of Salem, 1877-8-9-80, retiring in 1881 from public life. He was many years a member of the examining committee of Harvard College and in 1846, secretary of Board of Visitors at U. S. Mil. Acad., West Point ; lectured frequently on literary and educa- tional subjects ; composer of music, etc. Admitted to membership, July 6, 1864. George Johnson Breed died at the Homoeopathic Hos- pital, Boston, Aug. 12, 1885 ; son of Capt. Holten J. and Nancy (Symonds) Breed; born in Salem, January 7, 1827. In the decease of Mr. Breed, Salem loses one of its most accomplished musicians. That he was extremely modest and unambitious and hence unknown to many does not impair the statement that we have seldom had among us a more thorough pianist, a more brilliant performer, a THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 61 better teacher ; yet his peculiar temperament led him to withdraw from society and exert his talents for the bene- fit of a few only. He was an excellent gentleman and had many warm friends and admirers. Admitted to member- ship, April 14, 1873. Albert Gallatin Browne, a well-known citizen of Salem, died on Friday, Oct. 9, 1885, after a long illness. He was a son of James and Lydia (Vincent) Browne and was born in Salem, Dec. 8, 1805. In early life a cordage manufac- turer, afterwards an agent of the Boston Hemp Co. In 1852 a member of the Executive Council. During the civil war, he held a government agency in the south, having the custody of the southern cotton. In late years he had retired from business. He was one of the early abolition- ists and a friend of Garrison, Whittier and Sumner. Ad- mitted to membership, Jan. 21, 1867. Joseph Chisliolm died on Saturday, Oct. 10, 1885. He was a son of William and Martha (Vincent) Chisholm, and was born in Salem, July 20, 1806. The father was a Scotchman of the ancient clan of Frazer, and the mother was a granddaughter of an Italian from Tuscany ; a rope- maker by occupation, and was the clerk of the Naumkeag Fire Club from its organization, August, 1832. He was a person of extensive reading, and interested in the literary and religious institutions of the city. Admitted to member- ship, Nov. 10, 1852. Charles T. Jenkins, a well-known citizen of Salem, died very suddenly of heart disease on Wednesday, Nov. 18, 1885, at the age of sixty-two. He was born in New York, June 18, 1827, and was the son of James and Susanna (Jordan) Jenkins. He came to Salem from California 62 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. about fifteen years since and married a daughter of the late Nathaniel Weston ; a man of wealth, a director of the Naum- keag Street Railway Co., and a member of the Masonic Fraternity. Admitted to membership, Aug. 17,1874. David W. Bowdoin died at his home in Washington, D. C, on Tuesday, Dec. 1, 1885, at the age of sixty-nine years. The body was brought to Salem and buried in Har- mony Grove cemetery, on the Thursday following. He was born in Braintree, Mass., came to Salem in early life and was a well-known photographer. About 1873 he re- moved to Kentucky, a few years after settled in Washing- ton, D. C, following the occupation he pursued in Salem. He married Florence E., daughter of the late Gilbert Tap- ley of Danvers, who survives. Admitted to membership, Sept. 8, 1858. Thorpe Fisher died in Salem, Dec. 9, 1885. He was the son of Moses and Louisa (Thorpe) Fisher, and was born at Francestown, N. H., April 24, 1804. He came to Salem in early life and was engaged in several occupa- tions. In his declining years he was interested in the cul- tivation of his garden, contributing to the exhibitions of the Institute many specimens of choice fruits and flowers. An original member. Rev. Sumner Ellis, E.E., died in Chicago, 111., Jan. 26, 1886. He was born in North Orange, Franklin County, Mass., May 17, 1828. He was installed pastor of the Universalis t society, Salem, Feb. 1, 1854, and closed a successful ministry, Sept. 1, 1858. The society flour- ished by his earnest labors. Admitted to membership, Jan. 8, 1858. THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 63 William Sluman Messervy, ex-mayor of Salem, died on Friday, Feb. 19, 1886, after a long and painful illness. He was a son of Capt. William Messervy, an old-time ship- master in the East India and other trades. His maternal grandfather, Capt. William Sluman, for whom he was named, commanded a private-armed vessel in the Revolu- tionary war, and lost his life in the service. He was born in Salem, Aug. 26, 1812 ; after leaving school he went to Boston and served as clerk and book-keeper in several ex- tensive establishments. In 1834 went to St. Louis, and found employment ; in 1839 he engaged in the over-land trade to Mexico and went to Santa Fe. He spent seven years in Chihuahua and six in Santa Fe. Upon the organi- zation of the territory of New Mexico he was elected dele- gate to Congress, and was at one time Secretary; during the absence of the Governor he became acting Governor. In 1854 he returned to Salem and in 1856-7 was the Mayor. After his return from Mexico he was engaged in attending to his own business affairs and as a director in one or more insurance offices and other corporations. He took an active interest in several of the literary and sci- entific institutions. Admitted to membership, Sept. 1, 1852. . Charles Roundy, the oldest of our old-time ship mas- ters died at his residence, Salem, on Friday, Feb. 26, 1886. He was the son of Capt. Nehemiah and Rebecca (Boynton) Roundy, born in Beverly, Oct. 15, 1794. About 1804 the family removed to Salem. In 1809 he entered upon a seafaring life in the ship Augustus and continued in the merchant service always in the employ of Capt. Joseph Peabody one of Salem's most enterpris- ing and distinguished merchants, until he left the sea in 1835. During the period of the war with England which 64 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. interrupted the commerce of the country, he enlisted in the Navy and served in the Frigate President, Commodore Rodgers and the Frigate Guerriere, Commodore Decatur, from which he was discharged in March, 1813. Upon leav- ing the sea, Capt. Roundy was interested as a merchant in many foreign voyages and other enterprises. Admitted to membership, June 9, 1864. Abraham J. Stanley, a well-known musician, died in Salem, on Sunday, March 21, 1886. He was a son of Abraham and Thankful (Fish) Stanley and was born in Salem, Aug. 2, 1826. He had been connected with the Salem Brass Band for upwards of twenty-five or thirty years ; a clarionet player ; also a member of Gilmore's Band. Admitted to membership, July 14, 1864. Jeremiah 8. Perkins, long favorably known as super- intendent of burials in Salem, died on Friday, March 12, 1886. He was the son of Aaron and Sarah (Staniford) Perkins, and was born in Ipswich, April 13, 1797. At the age of sixteen he came to Salem, and learned the tailors' trade and subsequently established himself in business, Mr. Samuel Chamberlain being his partner for five years ; later he was associated with his brother Daniel, and after- wards took his son Jeremiah into partnership. In 1847 he was appointed superintendent of burials and continued in this office until his resignation in 1885. He was Cap- tain of the Salem Mechanic Light Infantry from 1828 to 1834. Admitted to membership, July 6, 1864. Francis Willoughby Pickman died at his residence in St. John, N. B., on the evening of March 21, 1886. He was the son of Benjamin and Anstiss (Derby) Pickman and was born in Salem, May 13, 1804. He generally re- sided in the Province of New Brunswick, occasionally in his native city. Admitted to membership, May 12, 1858 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. 65 John James Babson, a prominent citizen of Gloucester, died on Tuesday, April 13, 1886. Born in Gloucester, June 15, 1809. He occupied many positions of trust. For many years cashier of the Gloucester Bank and for more than forty years a member of the school committee, being chairman for twenty-five years. Bank commissioner of Massachusetts in 1864 and 5, and member of both houses of the State Legislature. The historian of Gloucester and a trustee of the Sawyer Public Library ; a member of Mass. Hist. Society and of the N. E. Hist. Gen. Society, and was in all an active worker. An original member. Aaron Perkins died in Salem, on Wednesday, April 14, 1886. He was the son of Aaron and Sarah (Stam- ford) Perkins, and was born in Ipswich, June 16, 1799, and came to Salem when a youth. He learned the trade of a sailmaker, and afterwards by himself, and subse- quently with William B. Brown, carried on an extensive clothing and furnishing business on Derby street. For many years, he was an active participant in the public affairs of his day, a director and afterwards President of the Mercantile National Bank. He was a member of both boards of the City Government and a Representative of the Massachusetts Legislature in 1846 and 1847, and an of- ficer of various charitable and other institutions. Ad- mitted to membership, April 16, 1866. Meetings. Regular meetings were held on the first and third Monday evenings of each month. The following communications and lectures may be specified. From Edward 8. Morse, a familiar talk on "The Study of Natural History. Chase Palmer, a lecture on "Combustion." William D. JVbrthend, on "The Bar and the Legal Pro- ceedings in Essex County."1 iSee Hist. Coll., E. I, xxn, 161. 66 THE RETROSPECT OF THE YEAR. Frank R. Kimball, on the "Climatology of the United States."2 Frank Hamilton Gushing, a familiar talk on "Zuni Folk-lore, or Myths and Stories of the Zimis." B. F. McDaniel, a lecture, "The First Steps in Geol- ogy-" Edwin G. Bolles, on the "Microscope and its Applica- tion." John Ritchie, of Boston, a lecture with experiments and illustrations, on "The New Process of Wool-scouring lately invented by Charles Toppan."3 F. W- Putnam, on "Some Problems in American Ar- chaeology and their partial solution." E. S. Morse, a paper on "Ancient and Modern Meth- ods of Arrow Release."4 J. S. Kingsley, a familiar talk on "The Modern Methods of the Study of Natural History." Howard Ayers, of Ann Arbor, Mich., on "The Cara- pax and Sternum of Decapod Crustacea.'*5 Stephen P. Hathaway, jr., of Marblehead, "The Second Congregational Church in Marblehead."6 George A. Perkins, "The Family of John Perkins of Ipswich, part n."7 James A. Emmerton, "Salem Baptisms."8 John H Gould, of Topsfield, "Tops field in the Revolu- tion."9 Field Meetings. These have been held during the season, as follows : First, on Thursday, July 9, 1885, at Nantasket Beach in Boston Harbor. At 2.30 o'clock the afternoon session was held in the large parlors of "Hotel Nantasket." The President in his opening remarks alluded briefly to several meetings that had been held on the sea- 2 Sec Bulletin of E. I., XVIII, 15. sSee Bulletin, xvni, 1. hargis coriacea. The first one taken on the coast of the United States was found on the surface of the water in Massachusetts Bay in 1824 and brought to Boston where it was purchased by Mr. Greenwood of the New England Museum of its captors for two hundred dollars." In the summer of 1852 or 1853 one was washed on the shore at Nahant, and one was captured on the coast of Maine in July, 1866, from which specimen Prof. E. S. Morse made a sketch. The one now in the cabinet of the Boston So- ciety of Natural History was taken at Annisquam in 1880. Mr. Winchester Smith of Salem in September, 1882, bought one of these turtles from some fishermen in Gloucester; it was caught some distance from that port and was purchased of Smith and Parker of Salem in 1884, TRUNK BACK OR LEATHERY TURTLE. 91 by the Peabody Academy of Science. Another one was taken in Portland harbor July 22, 1885, and on the twenty-fifth of August, 1885, Mr. Parsons of Rockport caught a fine specimen of the leathery or trunk-back turtle alive. This turtle was found entangled and completely wound up in a mackerel net which was set in the cove between the Salt Kocks and Milk Island opposite Long Beach, Kockport. It was towed to shore on Long Beach, where it required the efforts of eight men to load it on a wagon ; it was carried to Pigeon Cove from which place Mr. Parsons sent a telegram to the Peabody Academy of Science announcing that he had a new species of turtle. On going to Pigeon Cove the next morning, I found he had caught a superb specimen of the leathery or trunk- back turtle. This specimen measured 7 feet, 3 inches from his nose to the end of his tail, 5 feet across the back in the widest part ; his anterior flippers or arms were 3 feet long and 16 inches across in the widest part ; the pos- terior flippers were 22 inches long and 20 inches wide. The skin on his back and upper portions of the body was a peculiar greenish brown color not unlike dried fucus. The sides and upper parts were a creamy white blotched with a bluish black. The motions of this turtle were remarkably quick for so large a creature when out of its natural element ; it moved around the room in which it was confined, upsetting barrels, tables and the stove as easily and as quickly as a Texas wild steer would have done, causing a general commotion. In its struggles while being secured (which was accomplished by lashing the anterior flippers together on the under side) it uttered a sound of great volume, an indescribable kind of noise such as is heard sometimes at a menagerie. Its eyelids open vertically or in the opposite direction to that of other turtles. Unlike other turtles, this species cannot ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. 12 92 DERMATOCHELYS CORIACEA, turn their head sidewise or move it up or down, so that we Avere perfectly safe from his vicious snaps while secur- ing his flippers. This turtle lived two and one-half days in captivity, and on the twenty-eighth of August was purchased by the Peabody Academy of Science. Before his preparation for the Museum I made a partial examination of his in- ternal structure. Each lobe of the brain measured eleven and one-half inches in longitudinal circumference and nine and three-quarters inches transversely ; the whole brain weighed seventeen ounces. From its close convo- lutions and weight I considered that it would be a high order of development. This is unlike other species of turtles, as they are all described as having a small brain and of a lower order of development. The base of the tongue, roof of the mouth and the whole inside of the digestive canal was lined with a series of long, sharp, pointed spines. In the mouth, throat and oesophagus they were of a hard, horny substance throughout. In the stomach cavity these spines were one-third of an inch in diameter and two and one-half inches long, of a carti- laginous nature with hard, sharp points, all of which pointed downwards. The entire digestive canal with its lining of spines has been preserved for future study* The widest part was eight inches across and four feet six inches long. Before this canal was cut open it was quite rigid, being completely filled with these spines which would seem to prevent anything of a large size from be- ing swallowed, and as the turtles have no teeth they are obliged to swallow their food whole or in such parts as they can bite off with their beak-like jaws. To whatever use in the digestive economy these spines are adapted I shall not attempt to consider, but they led Mr. Garman to remark that it was an excellent provision for rapid TRUNK BACK OR LEATHERY TURTLE. 93 digestion. In Dr. Storer's Eeport of the Reptiles of Massachusetts, published in 1839, I find the following in regard to these spines : " Upon the middle and posterior portions of the roof of the mouth are strong spinous pro- cesses and a portion of the oesophagus is in the cabinet of the Boston Society of Natural History ; it is completely armed with long, firm and very sharp spines." In the diges- tive canal I found quite a number of Amphipod crustaceans of the genus Hyperia, identified by Doctor Faxon of the Museum of Comparative Zoology. The species is un- known. These little crustaceans are often found attached to the under side of the larger jelly fishes and it is possible that the jelly fish forms a portion of the food of this rep- tile, though in the stomach there were found some pieces of what appeared to be loligo partially digested. In Wood's Natural History I find the following : "The Leather turtle feeds upon fish, Crustacea, mollusks, radi- ates and other animals." In the smaller intestines there was found a kind of whitish mucus and curiously enough a piece of bark about two inches in diameter. The gall- bladder was quite large, holding I should think about a quart of very dark green matter. The lungs were over two feet in diameter, transversely, and eighteen inches in length ; they were traversed by air tubes a quarter of an inch in diameter. The heart was about the size of an ox and not unlike it in general shape. Just inside the skin was a lining of a cartilaginous substance from one-half to one inch thick on the sides and back ; when this was cut into, a clear, yellow oil would run out, but upon coming into the air would soon congeal to a granular mass resem- bling cosmaline. The skin on the under side was about a quarter of an inch thick resembling coarse sole leather. The turtle proved to be a male and weighed 750 pounds. When found in the net there was a large specimen of the 94 DERMATOCHELYS CORIACEA. pilot fish under his flipper which I procured from Mr. Parsons, and it is now in the collection of the Peabody Academy of Science. As this specimen of the Derma- tochelys is the third one taken on the coast of Essex County, it may be recorded as one of the Testudinata of this county. This is in accordance with the recorded list of birds, fishes, etc., in the county collection, as many spe- cies of birds that are recorded as county specimens are only occasional visitors, or rest here during their migra- tions to the north in the breeding season. I append a list of the Testudinata of Essex County, as represented in the cabinet of the Museum of the Peabody Academy of Science, as follows : TESTUDINATA OF ESSEX COUNTY. Sphargididm. Dermatochelys coriacea Blainville. Trunk Back or Leathery Turtle. Chelydroidce. Chelydra serpentina Schweigg. Snapping Turtle. Cinosternoidce. Aromochelys odorata Gray. Stink-pot or Musk Turtle. Emydoidce. Chrysemys picta Gray. Painted Turtle. Cistudo carinata Flem. Box Turtle. Nanemys guttata Ag. Spotted Turtle. Erays melagris Brongn. Blanding's Tortoise. Glyptemys insculpta Ag. Wood Tortoise. List of native and introduced plants observed in flower in the vicinity of salem, during the spring of 1886, on or before may 1. BY J. II. SEATCS. Symplocarpus foetidus, Salisb. Skunk Cabbage. Draba verna, Linn. Whitlow Grass. Anemone hepatica, Linn. Liver Leaf. Erythronium Americanum, Smith. Dog's-tooth Violet. Oakesia sessilifolia, Watson. Bellwort. Trillium erectum, Linn Purple Trillium. Nepeta Glechoma, Linn. Ground Ivy. Taraxaeum Dens-leonis, Desf. Dandelion. Antennaria plantaginifolia, Hook. Everlasting. Tussilago Farfara, Linn. Coltsfoot. Houstonia cserulea, Linn. Bluets. Aralia trifolia, Gray. Dwarf-Ginseng. Chrysosplenium Americanum, Schwein. Golden Saxifrage. Saxifraga Virginiensis, Michx. Early Saxifrage. Eibes hirtellum, Michx. Gooseberry. Potentilla Canadensis, Linn. Common Cinquefoil. Fragaria vesca, Linn. Strawberry. Cerastium arvense, Linn. Field Chickweed. Stellaria media, Smith. Common Chickweed. Viola sagittata, Ait. Arrow-leaved Violet. Viola pubescens, Ait. Yellow Violet. Capsella Bursa-pastoris, Moench. Shepherd's Purse. Sanguinaria Canadensis, Linn. Blood-root. Aquilegia Canadensis, Linn. Columbine. Caltha palustris, Linn. Marsh Marigold. Thalictrum Anemonoides, Michx. Rue Anemone. Anemone nemorosa, Linn. Wind-flower. Medicago lupulina. Black Medick. Thalictrum dioicum, Linn. Early Meadow Rue. Ranunculus abortivus, Linn. Small-flowered Crowfoot. Callitriche verna, Linn. Water Starwort. Viola lanceolata, Linn. Lance-leaved Violet. Viola blanda, Willd. Sweet White Violet. Actea spicata, var. rubra, Michx. Red Baneberry. Senecio vulgaris, Linn. Common Groundsel. (95) 96 LIST OF NATIVE AND INTRODUCED PLANTS Introduced Garden Plants. Pachysanclra procumbens, Michx. Pachysanclra. Trillium sessile. Dark-flowering Trillium. Trillium grandiflorum, Salisb. Large White Trillium. Trillium erythrocarpum, Michx. Painted Trillium. Ranunculus flcaria, Linn. Pilewort. Narcissus jonquilla. JonquiL Narcissus pseudo-Narcissus. Daffodil. Galanthus nivalis. Snowdrop. Crocus vernus. Spring Crocus. Tulipa suaveolens. Sweet Tulip. Tulipa Gesneriana. Common Tulip. Scilla verna. Squill. Hyacinthus orientalis. Hyacinth. Muscaria Botryoides, Mill. Grape Hyacinth. Vinca minor. Common Periwinkle. Uvularia grandiflora, Smith. Large-flowered Bellwort. Tiarella cordifolia, Linn. False Mitre-wort. Claytonia Virginica, Linn. Spring Beauty. Viola Tricola, Linn. Heart's-ease. Viola odorata, Linn. Sweet Violet. Primula sinensis. Chinese Primrose. Primula officinalis. English Cowslip. Primula grandiflora. True Primrose. Doclecatheon Meadia. Dodecatheon. Buxus sempervirens. Box. Lamium amplexicaule. Dead Nettle. Phlox subulata. Ground or Moss Pink. Merteusia Virginica. Lung Wort. Fritillaria melargris. Guinea Hen Flower. Iberis sempervirens. Evergreen Candytuft. Iberis montana. Common Candytuft. Phlox setacea. Neuroloma. Phlox nivalis. White Neuroloma. Corydalis nobelis. Large-flowered Corydalis. Tulipa sylvestris. Scotch Tulip. Saxifraga crassifolia. Thick-leaved Saxifrage. Dicentra spectabilis. Bleeding Heart. Helleborus nigra, Linn. Black Hellebore. Trollius laxus, Salisb. American Globeflower. Adonis vernalis, Spring Adonis. Anemone Hortensis, Star Anemone. Uvularia perfoliata, Linn. Perfoliate Bellwort. Polygouatum gigauteum, Dietrich. Great Solomon's Seal. OBSERVED IN FLOWER, SPRING OF 1886. 97 Fritilaria Imperialis. Crown Imperial. Luuaria bienis. Honesty. Lamium album, Linn. White Dead Nettle. Lamium maculutum, Linn. Spotted-leaved Dead Nettle. Corydalis aurea. Golden Corydalis. Dicentra eximia. Dutchman's Breeches. Eranthis hiemalis. Wioter Aconite. Alyssum Saxtile. Rock Alyssum. Epirnedium alpinum. Barren Wort. Epimedium macranthum. Large -flowered Barren Wort. Native Grasses, Sedges, etc. Poa annua, Linn. Low Spear Grass. Carex prsecox, Jacq. European Sedge. Carex vulgaris, Fries. Sedge. Carex Pennsylvanica, Linn. Wood Sedge. Luzula campestris, D C. Wood Rush. Equisetum arvense, Linn. Common Horsetail. Native Trees and Shrubs. Acer dasycarpum, Ehrhart. White or Silver Maple. Acer rubrum, Linn. Red or Swamp Maple. Acer saccharinum, Wang. Sugar or Rock Maple. Acer platanoides, Linn. Norway Maple. Salix discolor, Muhl. Glaucous-leaved Willow. Salix humilis, Marshall. Prairie Willow. Salix corclata, Muhl. Heart-leaved Willow. Salix petiolaris, Smith. Petioled Willow. Salix viminalis, Linn. Basket Willow. Salix livida, Wahl. var. occidentalis. Livid Willow. Salix alba, Linn. White Willow. Ulmus Americana, Linn. White Elm. Ulmus campestris, Linn. English Elm. Alnus incana, Willd. Hoary Alder. Alnus serrulata, Ait. Smooth Alder. Populus tremuloides, Michx. American Aspen. Populus grandidentata, Michx. Large-toothed Aspen. Populus balsamifera, Linn. var. candicans. Balm of Gilead. Populus alba, Linn. White Poplar. Corylus Americana, Walt. Wild Hazel-nut. Corylus rostrata, Ait. Beaked Hazel-nut. Ostrya Virginica, Willd. Hop Hornbeam. Carpinus Americana, Michx. American Hornbeam. Taxus baccata, Linn. American Yew. 98 PLANTS OBSERVED IN FLOWER SPRING OF 1886. Juniperus Virginiana, Linn. Red Cedar. Juniperus communis, Linn. Juniper. Lindera Benzoin, Meisner. Spice Bush. Cassandra calyculata. Leather-leaf. Epigea repens, Linn. Trailing Arbutus. Vaccinium Pennsylvanicum, Lam. Dwarf Blueberry. Amelanchier Canadensis, Torr. Shad Bush. Comptonia asplenifolia, Ait. Sweet Fern. Myrica Gale, Linn. Sweet Gale. Betula lutea, Michx. Yellow Birch. Betula alba, L., var. populifolia, Spach. American White Birch. Fraxinus Americana, Linn. White Ash. Fraxinus sambucifolia, Lam. Black Ash. Ribes aureum, Pursh. Missouri Currant. Ribes rubrum, Linn. Red Currant. Prunus Cerasus. Cherry. Prunus Persica. Peach. Amygdalus nana. Flowering Almond. Zanthorhiza apiifolia, L'Her. Shrub Yellow-root. Pyrus communis. Pear. Forsythia viridessima. Forsythia. Forsythia suspensa. Slender Forsythia. Forsythia Fortunii. Forsythia. Salix caprea. European Willow. Salix kilmarnock. Kilmarnock Willow. Dirca palustris, Linn. Leather-wood. Magnolia conspicua. Yulan of the Chinees. Spiraea prunifolia. Bridal Wreath. Larix Europea, Linn. European Larch. Prunus domestica. Garden Plum. Daphne Cneorum. Garden Daphne. Magnolia soulangeana. Hybrid Magnolia. Negundo aceroides, Maench. Box-leaved Elder. Shepherdia argentea, JSFutt. Buffalo-berry. Pyrus malus, Linn. Apple Tree. BULLETIN ESSEX I1TSTITTJTB. Vol. 18. Salem: July, Aug., Sept., 1886. Nos. 7-8-9. THE DEVELOPMENT OF CRANGON VULGARIS. SECOND PAPEB.1 (With Plates I and II.) BY J. S. KINGSLEY, Sc.D. The observations here recorded were made at Salem, Mass., during the summers of 1885 and 1886. I have here to return my thanks to Dr. Henry Wheatland, Mr. George D. Phippen and the Naumkeag Street Railway for many facilities afforded me. The literature of crustacean embryology has become so enormous that any resume of the work of previous writers, even on the limited group of decapods, is next to impossible. I have, however, en- deavored to give proper credit in the text for all work done by other embryologists, while appended is a bibliog- raphy of the papers quoted. Full titles are given of only those papers which are not mentioned in Faxon's valuable bibliography ('82). irThe first paper of the series is upon the development of the compound eye and appears in the first number of Whitman's "Journal of Morphology." ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. 13 (99) 100 THE DEVELOPMENT OF Several authors have investigated the development of Crangon, and an enumeration of their names may not be out of place here in order that the present paper may have an historical completeness. Kathke ('36 and '37) was the first to study the devel- opment of the species,2 but his account to-day possesses but little more than historic interest, though he describes the changes which occur within the egg. He compares it with Palsemon and Astacus, but foiled to see the gastrula which is such a conspicuous feature in the latter genus, according to the accounts of all observers. Captain Du Cane describes and figures ('39, pi. vii, figs. 7 and 8) the newly hatched Crangon, while K. Q. Couch ('44) de- scribes the same species as it escapes from the egg. Neither of these two papers has any present value. L. Agassiz makes a curious statement regarding this and some other genera. He says ('52) that Cuma is a larval form, the so-called different species being the young of Palsemon, Crangon and Hippolyte. This he claims to have proved beyond a doubt because he has raised them from the egg. A little later, C. Spence Bate showed that the Cumacea were adult, whereupon Agassiz reiterates ('56) his statement. Clans ('61) describes and figures a larva from Heligoland which he regards as the young of the present species. It is farther along in its development than auy of the stages included in the present article. E. Van Beneden ("70, p. 142, pi. x, fig. 20) has some remarks upon the segmentation of the egg in this species which are quoted and criticised on a subsequent page of the present article. Smith ('73, p. 529) merely mentions 2Rathke calls his form Crangon maculoszis. but it is clearly but a color-varia- tion of the widely distributed Crangon vulgaris. CRANGON VULGARIS. 101 the date at which the young appears in Vineyard Sound. Spence Bate ('76) states that in Crangon and several other genera of shrimps, "he has demonstrated that the three pairs of mobile appendages in the cirripedal or JSTauplhts form of larva homologize with the eyes and two pairs of antennae, and not with the antennae and mandibles, as stated by Fritz Mtiller, Anton Dohrn, and others." It is unnecessary to go into any detailed demonstration to show that nothing of the sort really occurs. Kingsley ('86 and '86a) gives a brief account of the development of the compound eye in this genus. METHODS. I was not very successful in keeping my shrimps in confinement, owing, doubtless, to insufficient means of renewing the water. On this account I was obliged to depend for my material on fresh specimens caught almost daily, and to rely upon chance for the successive stages. Many attempts were made to obtain the parents before oviposition and to have them lay in confinement, but with- out success. I made some observations upon the ovarian egg, but they are not complete enough for publication. For surface views I studied the fresh egg, and in the earlier stages I found it extremely useful to allow weak alcohol to run under the cover glass while the eggs were on the stage of the microscope. In this way parts before invisible are rendered distinct, and, at a certain stage of the process, the embryonic portions, when viewed by re- flected light, are white upon a dark ground afforded by the yolk ; by transmitted light, brown upon a translucent surface. This effect soon vanished, and all portions, when thoroughly impregnated with the alcohol, appeared alike. Stained specimens, viewed as opaque objects, were also of great value as may be seen from the plates. 102 THE DEVELOPMENT OF Attempts to render the whole egg transparent and to mount it in balsam were not very successful. For hardening, Perenyi's fluid, followed by successive strengths of alcohol in the usual manner, was found to be the best. For staining, Grenadier's alum-carmine gave the best results. Kleinenberg's hgematoxylon and Grena- dier's borax-carmine were also used with success. It was found impossible to remove the egg membranes, but the reagents mentioned penetrated fairly well. Except in studying the eye after the deposition of pigment had be- gun, the embryos were stained entire. The eggs were embedded in paraffin by means of chloroform ; the sec- tions were cut by the Thoma microtome and fastened to the slide with Schallibaum's collodion clove-oil mixture. I do not find it necessary, in using this, to heat the slide until the clove oil has evaporated, but merely enough to melt the paraffin and allow the sections to drop into the sticky film. The paraffin was then dissolved in turpen- tine and balsam and cover glass applied. The sections never became loosened. The processes involved in study- ing the eye are given elsewhere and need not be repeated here. The small size of the eggs rendered it difficult to em- ploy the ordinary method of orientation and so the fol- lowing process was devised : The eggs (from thirty to fifty at a time) were placed in melted paraffin in a flat watch-crystal, and allowed to cool. Then, on looking through the glass with a hand-lens the exact position of each egg could be readily ascertained, and those suitable for sectioning could be cut out with a knife and mounted on the plug of the microtome in any desired position. The drawings illustrating this paper were all made with the Oberhauser camera ; in some the outlines being drawn by it and the details then filled in freehand, while in oth- CRANGON VULGARIS. 103 ers every nucleus was placed in the drawing with that in- strument. THE EGG. The eggs are laid at Salem from the middle of June un- til the latter part of Juhr. The method in which they are attached to the pleopoda calls for no special remark. They are placed in a single row in long, apparently structure- less tubes which may frequently be untangled and straight- ened out, when they present a moniliform appearance. The eggs themselves vary slightly in size ; some are nearly spherical but the majority are ovoidal and have a major axis of .024 and a minor one of .018 inch. As I have not been fortunate enough to see the oviposition, I cannot say whether, at the time of laying, the nucleus (apparently) dis- appears. In the earliest stage I have seen (Fig. 1), it was present, and the egg presented but slight difference from the later ovarian egg. The egg is enveloped in a very thin structureless envelope, inside of which I have found no traces of an inner or vitelline membrane, nor is there any space between the shell and the yolk. The protoplasm occupies a central position ; it is not regular in outline, but gives off pseudopodal prolongations which ramify and pass between the yolk spherules in all directions. Whether these anastomose in their finer filaments or not, I am un- able to say. I have not seen any such unions in the larger branches. The protoplasm is granular, the granules ap- parently taking a deeper stain than the rest, though this appearance may be due to a different refractive index. The nucleus is large and vacuolated, and in its interior is a well developed chromatin reticulum which traverses it in all directions, the fibres uniting on the wall of the nucleus in a thickened layer. Whether this reticulum is formed from one or from several filaments, my lenses and preparations 104 THE DEVELOPMENT OF do not allow me to determine. I have seen no trace of any connection between the nuclear reticulum and the pro- toplasm of the egg. The yolk is granular, the yolk glob- ules ranging considerably in size. The color of the fresh egg is a dirty- white. SEGMENTATION. The first and second segmentations of the egg take place before the so-called segmentation planes appear, and they are so similar in character that they may be described to- gether. With the first segmentation the protoplasm begins to leave its central position and seek the surface of the egg ; before the second division is completed it has reached the surface, leaving the yolk in the centre. In the process of cell division I have never seen any traces of karyokinesis ; the division seems to be direct, and affects first the nucleus and next the protoplasm. Fig. 2 represents a section taken through the egg at the second segmentation, the plane passing through each of the resulting nuclei and the as yet unsevered protoplasm connecting the two potential cells. It exactly parallels, except in being nearer the sur- face, the phenomena of the first segmentation. The two nuclei have taken their places near the extremities of the elongate protoplasmic mass and each is vacuolated and provided with a chromatin reticulum. The protoplasm at either end shows the radial ramifying condition char- acteristic of the same material in the unsegmented ovum ; but between the two nuclei extends a smooth cord, in the interior of which the granules present the appearance of longitudinal striae. There is, besides, in this region an appearance as if the connecting band were double. As will be seen at either end, the protoplasm has reached the surface ot the egg and surface views show that it there extends itself in the same stellate manner as was seen in CRANGON VULGARIS. 105 the unscgmented ovum. The character of the protoplasm and the yolk need but a word. The vacuoles in the for- mer I attribute to the action of the reagents. In the lat- ter the yolk globules have become largely confluent and have lost the spherical shapes which are seen in the fresh egg. The round marks are oil globules. The whole yolk stains faintly but I have not thought it necessary to repre- sent it. After the second protoplasmic segmentation is effected, the first segmentation furrows appear, the one following close upon the other. The first to appear corresponds in its direction to the first nuclear division, the second is at right angles to it. Though well marked when viewed from the surface, these furrows are in reality shallow grooves which affect but the superficial layers of the deutoplasm and which never have the depth of those occurring in many if not in most decapods (e. g., Pakemon, Astacus, Eupa- gurus, Homarus, Cancer, etc.). In sections they show but as superficial constrictions ; the mass of yolk never segments. That this is not the result of the hardening re- agent (Perenyi's fluid) is shown by the fact that yolk seg- ments do not appear in eggs hardened with alcohol alone. Still it does not follow that the segmented egg with un- scgmented yolk is a syncitium. The nuclei and the sur- rounding protoplasm are completely separated and these are the essential portions of the cells ; the yolk is second- ary and adventitious and is to be regarded as occupying an extracellular position not only in Crangon but in many other cases, Balfour's remarks ('80, p. 98) to the con- trary notwithstanding. The general features of a decapod segmentation have been detailed so often (Haeckel, '75; Ishikaw^a, '85 Mayer, '77; Faxon J79; etc.) that it is not necessary here to follow it throughout in Crangon, which presents no 106 THE DEVELOPMENT OF marked differences from other genera except in the direc- tion already indicated. Figs. 3 and 4 are respectively surface and sectional views of a stage with about sixteen nuclei, and are introduced for the purpose of showing the external appearance and some of the points of internal structure. As will be seen from fig. 4, most of the pro- toplasm has reached the surface of the egg but there still remains some near the centre of the yolk. Whether this is the same as the protoplasm described by several authors (Reichenbach in Astacus, Ludwig in Spiders, '76) I cannot say; but I am certain not only that it is derived from the first segmentation nucleus, but also that it plays a part in the formation of the blastoderm. As this retardation of a portion of the cells in their journey to the surface seems to explain several points in the early stages of the arthropods, a moment may be given to it. While the cells which have reached the surface and which have thus formed a blastoderm are undergoing division, this central protoplasm also divides and gives rise to sev- eral cells which migrate, though much more slowly to the surface. In fig. 6 this migration is clearly shown, and it is to be noted that the cells are all proceeding in the same direction, apparently toward one side of the egg. This is shown in several of my sections, and not one indi- cates that these belated cells migrate to several portions of the surface. This migration of the belated cells toward one point, together with a more rapid division of those in the same region which earlier reached the surface, results in the for- mation of the not very clearly delimited germinal area. Fig. 5 represents a section through the area shortly be- fore the formation of the gastrula. Iii other parts of the egg, the nuclei are placed near the surface as at 6, each sur- rounded with a scanty amount of protoplasm ; but in the CRANGON VULGARIS. 107 germinal area, the protoplasm is far more abundant and forms a layer of considerable thickness (ga). In sections this has the appearance of a syncitium, as I am unable to discover any cell boundaries. In surface views, it is true, the cells here, as earlier, seem clearly marked off from each other; but as the figure shows, these lines of demarcation are but superficial and do not descend to any depth. This obliteration of cell walls here may be due to the action of Perenyi's fluid and I regret that this idea did not occur to me at the proper time to test it, so I cannot positively state that this region is really a syncitium. In the figure is represented, at c', one of the belated cells which has not yet joined its fellows ; the complete series of sections of the egg show that it was the only one which remained be- hind. In surface views it is not easy to assign limits to the germinal area as it shades off insensibly into the sur- rounding undifferentiated blastoderm and is merely a por- tion of the surface where the protoplasm is more abundant and the nuclei more numerous than in other parts. In its general appearance it does not differ much at this stage from fig. 8, except that the blastopore shown in that figure is, of course, absent. The variations in the character of the segmentation and the method of forming the gastrula and the germinal lay- ers are so closely connected that a discussion of the seg- mentation of Crangon, as compared with that of other arthropods, is deferred until the end of the next section of the present paper ; but here it is necessary to mention a conflict between my results and those of another observer. Edouard van Beneden ['70? P- 142] saj^s : — "Chez les Crangons, il se produit un fractionnement total du vitellus, comme chez les Gammarus locusta, et les cellules du blas- toderme resultant de ce que dans chacun des segments, il s'opere en separation complete entre les elements proto- KSSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. 14 108 THE DEVELOPMENT OF plasmiques et les elements nutritives du vitellus." Though not referred to in the text, his figure 20 on plate X was apparently introduced to illustrate this point. It, however, does not do so, for it does not represent the central portion of the egg as divided, but can readily be interpreted to agree with the opinion here maintained. Van Beneden cut no sections, but depended on surface views for his re- sults. Here I believe is the cause of our difference, for I can hardly regard it as the result of our having studied different species, since Crangon vulgaris is by far the most abundant Crangonid on the shores of Europe. In surface views the furrows of all crustacean segmentation seem deeper than they actually are and this I am confident led him into error. I may remark in passing that, to my mind, Van Beneden's statement (I. c.) that Gammaruslo- custa has a total, while a congeneric form has a partial, segmentation needs confirmation, as the point cannot be settled by surface observation. The illustrations given by Van Beneden of the segmented egg of Gammarus lo- custa certainly do not prove his point. As to the presence or absence of karyokinesis in the segmentation and cell division of Crangon, my observa- tions are not conclusive. I have not had the lenses neces- sary for a careful study of the subject, but even in the large nuclei of the earlier stages of segmentation as well as later in the large, rapidly-dividing, endodermal nuclei, I have not seen anything which I could interpret as relating in any way to karyokinesis, although the nuclear reticulum was clearly visible under my highest objective (Hartnack, viii). Under the circumstances, I am inclined to believe that the cell division is direct. Mayer in Eupagurus ('77) does not state whether a spindle metamorphosis of the nuclei occurred, but like myself he saw elongate nuclei and two nuclei in a cell. In fact, I do not recall a single statement CRANGON VULGARIS. 109 of karyokinesis being witnessed in decapod segmentation, excepting in Astacus (Reichenbach, '86) ; though it occurs in other Crustacean groups (e. g., Cladocera, Copepoda, Grobben, '79 and '81) . On account of the large size of the nuclei in the eggs of Cancer and Crangon they form es- pecially favorable objects for studies in this direction. THE GASTRULA AND GERM LAYERS. Owing to the difficulties of following the changes of the cells in the living egg, I have been unable to follow out the phases of gastrulation as clearly as I could wish ; but still my permanent preparations and my sections give a fair idea of the steps. Three of these are shown in figs. 7, 8, and 9. Of these the earlier is 8, which represents the invagination as already begun and is taken from an alum- carmine specimen, mounted entire. It shows the germinal area fading out on all sides into the general blastoderm while near the posterior margin of the area the blastopore is seen, the endodermal cells having already sunk beneath the surrounding surface. I am unable to say whether ear- lier these endoderm cells could have been recognized among the others of the germinal area ; but I feel confident that there is no specialization of the mesodermal cells be- fore the formation of the gastrula such as is described by Grobben ('79) in Moina and ('81') Cetochilus. Neither was there the shallow pit seen by Ishikawa in Atyephyra ('85? PP« 411-412) which is subsequently divided into two. In the cells which surround the margin of the blastopore (fig. 8), the nuclei are mostly placed in the distal ends of the elongate cells, while in fig. 7, which represents a slightly later surface view, this feature of the circum-blas- toporal cells is still further emphasized, the inner ends of the cells seeming to run down into the closing blastopore. What interpretation is to be placed on this I do not know. 110 THE DEVELOPMENT OF The more prominent of the internal features of the gas- trulation may be seen in fig. 9, which represents an ob- lique section through a stage intermediate between those shown in surface views. The endoderm cells (h) are be- ing forced almost vertically into the yolk, though with an inclination towards the anterior end of the egor The nu- clei are placed at the deeper ends of the cells, the proto- plasm of which stretches upwards to the blastopore. In the upper ends of these endoderm cells the boundaries be- tween the cells can be seen with some distinctness as is shown in the figure, but deeper they entirely disappear. This invaginated endoderm is a solid mass and contains no lumen, or archenteron, and the blastopore itself is but a depression in the general surface of the egg. The subse- quent fate of these cells will be traced later ; but here we may say that they soon separate from the parent layer and sink into the yolk where they divide into two groups, a few going to the region where the stomadeeum is subse- quently to form, while the greater portion do not move far from the point of their differentiation and later unite with their fellows and with the proctodeum. These cells here, as in other species, form the mesenteron, the cavity of which exists, until after hatching, only in a potential condition, being filled completely with the deutoplasm. Through all of the larval stages these endodermal cells can be readily recognized by their larger size and by the fact that their nuclei stain less deeply than those of mesodermal or ecto- dermal origin. Fig. 9 also shows some features in the origin of the third germinal layer, the mesoderm. On either side of the endodermal invagination may be seen some cells with large nuclei and amoeboid outlines, which are plainly budding from the cells at the mouth of the blastopore and sinking into the yolk. Owing to the great difficulties encountered in orienting the eggs at this early stage, I cannot say that CRANGON VULGARIS. Ill I have fully satisfied myself as to the limits of the origin of the mesoderm. It certainly arises from both sides and from the anterior margin of the blastopore; whether it also has its origin from the posterior margin or not, I can- not positively say, though I am inclined to think that it does not. It certainly does not form there as abundantly as it does in front. Later, the mesoderm may be recog- nized by the fusiform cells with small nuclei crowded be- tween the ectodermal structures and the yolk. It acquires its greatest development at first in the abdomen but ap- pears only as a thin sheet in the cephalothoracic region until the embryo is nearly ready to hatch. I have at no time seen anything looking like f mesenchyme ' nor have I seen anything that could be interpreted as a budding of mesoderm cells from either ectoderm or endoderm. Nei- ther do I see anyway, looking at Crangon alone, of decid- ing from which of the other germinal layers the mesoderm arises. It seems to come from the junction of the two. Before the next stage becomes outlined the blastopore becomes completely closed. As a considerable time elapses between this closure and the formation of the stomodeal and proctodeal invagination it is a matter of considerable difficulty to say exactly what are the relations of the blas- topore to either mouth or anus. As no appendages are as yet developed, there are no landmarks by which the posi- tion of the blastopore can be recognized in surface views and all that there is to guide one is the general outline of the rapidly changing germinal area. From this it would appear as if the anus arose either within or a very little in front of the position formerly occupied by the mouth of the gastrula ; and I am inclined to the former view, since there is in the meantime a very rapid division and hence considerable extension of the circumblastoporal cells. 112 THE DEVELOPMENT OF The relations of the mesoderm to the proctodeum would also seem confirmative of this view, for, as will appear later, most of it remains in the region where the anus is formed. The mouth appears to arise seme distance in ad- vance of the blastoporal region. While the phenomena of gastrulation are well developed in most of the Crustacea, in the Hexapods and Acerata (Arachnids plus Limulus, Kingsley '85), they are so ob- scured as to have caused no little trouble for students. It seems to me that the facts detailed above for Crangon throw some light upon the other members of the group and show that the peculiar manner of origin of endoderm in the old group of f Tracheates' is to be reconciled with the gastrsea theory. The great majority of the arthropods have a segmenta- tion which is usually characterized as superficial (Haeckel, '75), or centrolecithal (Balfour, '80), both terms indica- ting that the segmentation is confined to the surface of the egg^ while the centre is occupied by }'olk which may, but which usually does not, segment. The term endolecithal, introduced by Claus, is synonymous with the earlier one of Balfour. Bruce ('86) is, as far as I am aware, the only one who has questioned this centrolecithal or superficial terminology. He says that the process in Thyridopteryx "can hardly be called a centrolecithal segmentation." These terms (centrolecithal, endolecithal, superficial segmentation) seem unfortunate, for while there is a con- siderable similarity in the mode of segmentation of most arthropod eggs, in the earlier stages the yolk does not oc- cupy a central position, nor is the segmentation superficial. As I have shown above, the egg nucleus, and presumably the segmentation nucleus, occupies, at first, at least in the egg of Crangon, a central position ; while, gathered around CRANGON VULGARIS. 113 it is the protoplasm of the egg, the whole being enveloped with the deutoplasm, a condition just the reverse of that implied by the terms endolecithal or centrolecithal. The first segmentation is confined to this central protoplasm, and it is not until the second segmentation is nearly com- pleted (vide fig. 2) that any of the protoplasm reaches the surface ; and for a long time afterward that which remains behind continues to undergo cell-division as well as that which has earlier reached the surface and has there be mon, but this arose from cells clearly endodermal. Reich- enbach ('77 and '86) has a secondary mesoderm which is budded from the true endodermal cells after the process of gastrulation is completed. Ishikawa, in Atyephyra, also has two kinds of mesoderm, one arising from the edge of the blastopore ; while the other arises from the CRANGON VULGARIS. 139 endoderm, all of the endodermal cells elongating and budding off cells which go to make up the third germinal layer. The earlier of these mesodermal cells of endo- dermal originally closely resemble their fellows, but later they are much smaller and stain more deeply. These latter are regarded as comparable with the secondary mes- oderm of Reichenbach. It does not appear that either of these two groups of mesoderm fall under the head of the mesenchyme of the Hertwigs. Reichenbach claims that in Astacus the mesoderm is differentiated before the actual gastrulation, and he fig- ures mesodermal cells in advance of the blastopore. This reminds one of Grobben's studies on the Entomostraca. In Cetochilus at the thirty-two cell stage there are already differentiated one mesoderm and two endoderm cells, be- sides two more which are partly mesodermic and partly endodermic, but it is to be noticed that, according to Grob- ben's interpretations, the mesodermic cell is behind the en- dodermic ones. In Moina the same differentiation of mesoderm before invagination is noticed, and the meso- derm occupies the same position with relation to the endoderm. Here, however, the genital cells are differen- tiated from the other mesodermal ones before either are invaginated, exhibiting an instance of precocity only par- alleled in some Hexapods {vide Witlaczil ('84, pp. 571 and 671-677). Concerning Lucifer there is some question. According to Brooks ('82) the egg has a regular and total segmen- tation followed by a blastopore stage. At the close of segmentation one of the cells is differentiated from the rest by containing a large amount of food yolk. In in- vagination this cell becomes divided, and the two resulting cells do not take a part in forming the endoderm, but are pushed into the segmentation cavity. Brooks is uncertain ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVIII. 18 140 THE DEVELOPMENT OF whether the whole of the primitive yolk-bearing cell be- comes thus pushed in or whether ouly its deeper eud is segmented off and placed into the blastoccele. The fur- ther history of these cells was not traced. It would seem probable that they go to form the mesoderm, and, if so, they would afford another instance of early differentiation of that layer. Brooks, however, is inclined to the be- lief that they go to form a food-yolk like that of other decapods. His reasons, however, are far from apparent. In the other groups of Crustacea the information as to the origin of the mesoderm is extremely scanty. In Oniscus (Bobretzky, J74), it would appear that both mes- oderm and encloderm are formed at the same time and are differentiated by a delamination at a later date. Bullar's results in Cymothoa do not differ greatly from this. Nus- baum's account of the process in Oniscus is summarized above. New observations are, however, greatly needed, for these accounts lack greatly in desirable details, and it will possibly prove that the origin of the mesoderm in all these meroblastic types does not differ greatly from that of the more common uninvaginate forms. EXTERNAL DEVELOPMENT. From this point where the three germ layers are devel- oped, it is necessary to follow out the different organs separately, since the whole cannot be described at once. In order to have a means of correlating the stages of growth -of the different systems, I give first an outline of the external features up to the time of hatching, leaving the internal organs until a later time. I may say at the outset that I do not attempt to trace the various modifica- tions of the appendages in detail, but merely to figure and describe the general external appearance, so that the CRANGON VULGARIS. 141 reader may have landmarks to guide him in the discussion of the internal development. Immediately after the gastrulation, the embryo begins to be outlined. As will be seen by fig. 8, the germi- nal area is mostly in front of the blastopore and is char- acterized by smaller and more closely placed cells. It is here that the most marked changes first take place. The next stage is represented in fig. 10 ; a larger and more detailed representation of this stage is shown in fig. 1 of my other paper ('87). At the posterior end of the egg is shown a broad, somewhat kidney-shaped disc, ta, the representative of the germinal area in fig. 8, and which, following Reichenbach, I call the thoracico-abdominal area. The blastopore closed in the median line of the posterior portion of this disc. From the two anterior angles of this disc, two cords of smaller cells extend out- wards and forwards, each terminating in an oval disc or plate of still smaller cells (ol) , the rudiments of the optic lobes for whose subsequent history the reader is referred to the paper just quoted. In the fresh egg treated with dilute alcohol, this somewhat U-shaped germ is brought into strong relief, while staining shows that it is differen- tiated from the rest of the blastoderm by the smaller size of the cells and the consequently closer position of the nuclei. The cells are smaller in the optic lobes and in the thoracico-abdominal area than in the cords connecting them. In section these cells are all more columnar than those of the undifferentiated blastoderm, which are very flat and much as in the earlier stages. This stage of the egg, which I may call A, corresponds rather closely with Keichenbach's ('86) stages A — D, with the following exceptions : Most noticeable is the fact that I have not seen the optic lobes in Crangon be- fore the closure of the blastopore, while Eeichenbach (?.c, 142 THE DEVELOPMENT OF pis. I and II) has them well differentiated in Astacus even before invagination begins. Again, Reichenbach has the nuclei of the optic lobes and the two halves of the tho- racico-abdominal region exhibiting a marked concentric arrangement. This I have not seen in Crangon. Besides these points and the relatively greater distance in Cran- gon between the optic and thoracico-abdominal lobes, and the smaller number of cells (a necessity from the much smaller size of the egg) our results compare favorably. Mayer, in his studies of Eupagurus ('77) did not go into such detail as Reichenbach, as he did not trace the cells in his earlier stages. His figures 14 and 15 com- pare well with that of Crangon now under discussion, ex- cept he does not figure the cords connecting the optic lobes (Kopfanlage) with the thoracico-abdominal area. In Crangon, these cords are fainter than the rest of the germ, and hence they may have existed in Eupagurus but have escaped observation. In other respects — the shape of the thoracico-abdominal region and the distance between this and the optic lobes — there is a close resem- blance between these two forms. Accepting the terminology which Ishikawa applies to his figures of the early embryos of Atyephyra ('85, pi. XXVI, figs. 55 to 59) it is not easy to reconcile his results with mine. It would seem, however, that his mandibles and abdomen are not in reality such but that together they form the thoracico-abdominal region. There is, however, not sufficient evidence to decide this point as the stages be- tween these figures and his figure 60 are lacking. If this view be the true one (his mandibles being but the lateral expansions of the thoracico-abdominal region) his results will compare well with those of Reichenbach and Mayer as well as with my own and we shall be relieved of the difficulties surrounding the appearance of the mandibles CRANGON VULGARIS. 143 before any other appendages are outlined. Connected with this area by a slender peduncle is a circular area interpreted as the "carapace." Unless this be what I have termed the dorsal organ which will be described later, I have seen nothing to compare with it in Crangon. The optic lobes in Atyephyra are at about the same distance from the tho- racico-abdominal area as in Crangon, but Ishikawa does not represent the cords of small cells connecting them. Between the stage just described and the next, which I designate as B (fig. 11) there occurs a gap in my material but the changes which have occurred in the interval can easily be understood. The embryonic area is now consid- erably smaller than before (a subject to be mentioned later), while its form has undergone considerable altera- tion. The optic lobes are now larger than before and more closely approximate, the broad area of undifferen- tiated blastoderm which formerly existed between them, (reaching back to the thoracico-abdominal area) having disappeared except for a V-shaped prolongation which ex- tends between the optic lobes. These lobes are also much nearer the rest of the embryo ; and the thoracico-abdominal area shows the beginning of the differentiation which justi- fies the name applied to it. The cords of cells uniting the optic lobe with the rest cf the embryo in fig. 10 have now united in the median line to form part of the ventral surface of the shrimp. The optic lobes at this stage are elsewhere described, but the rest of the embryo needs further men- tion . From the lateral cords a broad plate formed by their union has developed, with the mouth, a shallow pit (mo) near its anterior margin, while on either side is seen the first rudiment of an appendage (7) which the subsequent history shows to be the first antenna or antennula. It is to be noticed that this appendage at this time is distinctly 144 THE DEVELOPMENT OF postoral ill its position. Behind this appendage this re- gion becomes confluent with the undifferentiated portion of the thoracico-abdominal area. At the outer portion of this region the nuclei are more closely placed than in the centre, and sections show that in the former portions the cells are more columnar, while in the median line they are more nearly pavement like. The line of demarcation be- tween the two kinds of cells is rather abrupt and indicates the division between the ectoderm of the median line and that which is to give rise to the ventral nervous cord. In the thoracico-abdominal area a differentiation is also tak- ing place, as the abdomen is budding out. This is accom- plished by an infolding near the anterior margin of the area (af) by which the abdomen is separated from the rest of the area, while the ectoderm, thus inpushed, forms the ven- tral surface of both thorax and abdomen. This inpushing does not at first take place clear across the thoracico-ab- dominal area, but begins near the median line and pro- ceeds there more rapidly than at the sides, the result be- ing to form a pouch projecting some little distance into the egg, the walls of which are formed by the ectoderm of the ventral surface. I think that Ishikawa has been mis- led by this development of the abdomen and has inter- preted the pouch thus formed as the proctodeum. Cer- tainly his "pd" in fig. 62 ('85, pi. XXVII) is not the hind gut, but is the beginning of the abdominal fold. In Cran- gon, as we shall see later, the proctodeum does not appear until some little time has elapsed. In this formation of the abdomen, Crangon agrees closely with Eupagurus. Mayer's fig. 28 ('77, pi. XIV) represents a condition which is frequently seen in cutting sections of the earlier stages of Crangon parallel with the general ventral surface, so far as the thorax and abdomen are concerned ; the amoe- boid cells there figured I have hot seen. The scattered CRANGON VULGARIS. 145 mesoderm and endoderm cells have no such appearance in Crangon. It is at this stage that I have first distinctly seen the first embryonic cuticle, though I have seen traces of it in the stage A. It is a delicate, cuticular pellicle, secreted by all the cells of the blastoderm and forms a second en- velope inside the chorion. Its fate I have not traced. What these blastodermic cuticula mean from a phyloge- netic standpoint I am not ready to say. They occur in various arthropods, having been described in many Crus- tacea and some Arachnids as well as in Limulus (Kings- ley, '85). In Atax, Limulus and Apus they form a protective envelope for the embryo after the splitting of the chorion, and in such cases Claparede's term deutova may be applied to them. In other cases they seem to play no part in the subsequent history of the animal. They clearly have no connection with the protective en- velopes (amnion and serosa) of hexapods, nor have they any connection with the dorsal organ (micropylar appa- ratus) of the Edriophthalma. Kennel ('84) sees in them a remnant of the trochosphere of the annelid ancestor of the arthropods, a view which seems to have but little to support it. In stage C (figs. 12 and 13) the optic lobes are more elon- gate, the upper lip (?) has developed, covering the mouth, while a second pair of appendages (II), the antennae, have been formed between the antennuhe and the thoracico-ab- dominal area. The antennulse and the mouth begin to show a change in their relative positions, for while in the last figure the base of this appendage was distinctly postoral, it has now moved forward so that the mouth is opposite the middle of the base. The abdomen is also farther de- veloped by the inpushing of the pouch already described, the extent of which is best shown by the side view, fig. 12, af. 146 THE DEVELOPMENT OF Stage D (fig. 14) is characterized by the appearance of the mandibles (HI), the increase in size of antennulae and antennae (II), the indications of the supraoesopha- geal and optic ganglia, the larger size of the abdomen and the appearance of the rudiments of the heart and dorsal vessel, d. There is no longer a large space between the labrum and the tip of the abdomen, and the latter ex- hibits traces of segmentation. Both pairs of antennae are in front of the mouth. Stage E is another step in advance (figs. 15 and 16) in which the most marked features are the development of four pairs of appendages behind the mandibles, making seven in all (a number which persists for some time) and the biramose condition of the second antennas (II). The proctodeum is also visible, although it was formed in the preceding stage. This account varies considerably from that of other ob- servers on the early stages of decapods. For instance, Reichenbach ('86) describes the mandibles as the first appendages to appear and then the antennulae and lastly the antennae,1 thus arriving at the so-called nauplius stage. Like myself (cf, '86, pi. 11a, fig. 7a, "lb" et "Ell") he has all the appendages at first distinctly postoral, while he does not find that the mouth is distinctly behind the antennae until a stage (his "G") comparable to my stage E. This primitively postoral position of all the crustacean appendages has now been too firmly settled to admit of dispute. Ishikawa has the mandibles appear first in Atyephyra, but this, as explained above is, I think, a mistake. There is one feature in the history which has already been detailed to which attention should be called. A com- 1 Reichenbach regards the ophthalmic stalk as an appendage homonomous ■with the rest, hence there is a discrepancy of one in the nomenclature of our plates. V - CRANGON VULGARIS. 147 parison of figs. 10 and 11 shows, as was mentioned above, a considerable difference in the size of the embryo, the older being considerably the smaller of the two, the original dimensions not being regained until the stage just past. Mayer ('77), calls attention to a similar state of affairs in Eupagurns, while Ishikawa's figures show that the same occurs in Atyephyra. In Astacus, according to measurements of Reichenbach's plates, there is a similar contraction of the germinal area, though not to so great an extent as in the other forms mentioned. So far as I now recall, this circumstance is not readily paralleled in the animal kingdom, nor is it easy to explain. Indeed, I can think of but one interpretation to be placed upon it and that is not over satisfactory. It is as follows : almost all decapods now leave the egg and begin a free life in a com- paratively advanced condition, but the evidence presented by Lucifer, Penseus, etc., shows that their ancestors be- gan their free life when much more immature1, or at least when in a condition far less like that of existing adults than is the newly hatched embryo of to-day. There is evidence that this early crustacean had an egg with com- paratively little food yolk ; indeed, this element seems to have been introduced at a comparatively recent date. For such an embryo it would be a great advantage to begin its free life with only those organs necessary to its existence and hence the more rapidly the whole egg was converted into the germ the better for the individual and hence for the race. The more direct the development within the 1 As will appear in the sequel, I do not give the nauplius that extreme phyloge- netic importance which many do. I regard it as an introduced, adaptive, larval condition which, of course, has become hereditary, and marks a connection be- tween all Crustacea, but which must not be regarded as representing the adult condition of any ancestor. The arguments are too many against such a view. A full discussion of this and allied points is reserved for the concluding sections of my studies of Crangon. ESSEX INST. BULLETIN, VOL. XVUf. 19 148 THE DEVELOPMENT OF egg the better, and hence any modification which would place each organ in its proper place at first, without the aid of later interstitial growth, would be a material gain* In this way the two extremities of the body would come to lie at the two poles1 of the egg (compare fig. 10 or bet- ter, Mayer, ('77, pi. xiii, fig. 15), while the appendages would arise between. An increase in the amount of food-yolk would result in an increase in the size of the egg, and, supposing the first formed rudiments to retain their relative positions, this would of course widely separate the organs first to ap- pear. Now, we may imagine it would be an economy for the embryo, in its early stages, when the protoplasm was scanty in comparison with the food-yolk, to have its parts near together, and it may be that in this way this strange contraction of the germ has been introduced. In other words the widely-separated, optic lobes and thoracico-ab- dominal area of stage A are an inheritance from a small egged precocious ancestor, while the contraction seen in the later stages is a consequent of the increase in amount of food-yolk. The manner in which this contraction is produced is al- most equally obscure. I regret that I have made no accu- rate measurements on the living egg which might throw light upon it. For the present I accept the explanation of Mayer ('77, p. 232. " Offenbar kommt eine solche Naherung aller einzelnen Partien auf der Bauchseite des Embryo nur dadurch zu Stande, dass sich die zwischen ihnen liegeiiden Blastodermzellen contrahiren und sich hiermit zugleich in ein Cylinderepithel umwandeln." This of course involves a corresponding expansion of the blastoderm of the dorsal surface, and Mayer calls for the 1 The term pole is used with a mathematical and not with a physiological sig- nificance. CRANGON VULGARIS. 149 testimony of his sections to support his view. He fur- ther thinks (p. 228) that the germinal area is formed by a similar contraction and consequent thickening of the cells, but I am confident that in Crangon the germinal area is due largely if not wholly to the mode of forma- tion described above. Whether there be a contraction as well I cannot say. At stage C there appears another structure, the mean- ing of which I do not understand. On the dorsal surface of the eggt about opposite the mouth in the median line, one sees a patch of about twenty or thirty cells much smaller than those of the surrounding blastoderm. This I have termed a "dorsal organ" for the reason that it agrees with all other structures known by the same name in being unintelligible. In sections (fig. 19) it is seen to be made up of columnar cells with elongate nuclei, the cells being arranged in a radial manner as though an in- vagination were taking place. The development, so far as my sections show, goes no farther and in the later stages the cells of this region are not distinguishable from those of the surrounding ectoderm. This structure, as shown in fig. 19, at once recalls the early stages of the dorsal organ as described by Bullar ('78) in Cymo- thoa. It bears less resemblance to the dorsal organs of other forms. The next stage (F) is shown in figs. 17 and 18, which need no extended description. The most prominent fea- tures are the beginning of the deposition of pigment, the appearance of the edge of the carapax and the beating of the heart. The deposition of pigment brings plainly into view the compound eyes as well as the median ocellus (oc). There also appears in either half of the cephalic ganglion a double pigment spot (jpg, fig. 17) which so simulates an ocellus that I have been unable to decide whether it were 150 THE DEVELOPMENT OF such or not. The pigment of the compound eye is first deposited in a linear patch (fig. 18, ey). In this stage the yolk is much less abundant than in the previous one. The changes which occur between stages i^and G (fig. 20) are chiefly those of degree. The yolk is less extensive, the edge of the carapax is free all around, the eye has more pigment and pigment spots are visible upon the sides and on the antennulie. In the abdomen the ganglia are plainly visible (na) and the telson (vide fig. 22) is bifurcate and armed with the typical seven spines on either half. The anterior end of the intestine terminates in a wide open fun- nel which spreads to embrace the yolk and the whole tube keeps up a constant peristaltic motion which forces the yolk granules in the funnel-like extremity back and forth with an oscillating motion. The heart beats as rapidly and more vigorously than before. Its general appearance is shown drawn to a larger scale in fig;. 21. A detailed de- scription of it will be given later. Stage H (fig. 23) is the young shrimp nearly ready to hatch. The abdomen has now become greatly longer and is wrapped around the body, its tip passing between the eyes to the front of the head. The yolk is greatly re- duced, two large lobes of it remaining in an unbroken con- dition while another portion is being rapidly converted into yolk globules by the waves caused by the peristaltic action of the intestine. The heart is larger and more vig- orous than before. It still possesses but two ostia (one on either side) but a new feature is seen in the appearance of bipolar nerve-cells in its walls. I have not been able to trace the origin of these cells. The snlls are be